The November 1954 issue of The Railway Magazine included an article by C. A. Knight about the railways between Sellafield and Maryport and inland as far as Cockermouth and Kelton Fell.
The featured image at the head of this article (and the article by C. A. Knight) shows an early 1950s image of Workington Station with a train to Euston ready to depart behind a ‘Royal Scot’ loco. [1: p757]
Reading Knight’s article encouraged me to begin a review of the different railways and tramways of the area. This article is the first of a series. …
Knight says: “Travellers to Keswick by the ‘Lakes Express’ during the summer [of 1954] may have speculated on the country to the west of that delectable town which is served by the train in the final stages of its journey. Some may venture as far as Cockermouth, but few will follow the train to its terminus at Workington, that product of Victorian enterprise in industry, as there is little in the area to attract the tourist from the delights of the Lake District. To the student of railway history, however, its tangle of intersecting railways holds promise of interest.” [1: p757]
Knight tells us that, “The early evolution of the railways of West Cumberland was not marked by the contentious episodes which frequently characterised railway development in the mid-nineteenth century; rather [it could] be described as a process of peaceful penetration. … The narrow belt of agricultural land on the western edge of Cumberland was for many years practically isolated by the difficulties of travel through the mountains of the Lake District. The discovery of rich seams of coal, and the improvement of mining technique which enabled coal to be won from under the sea-bed, led to development of shipping facilities, and the economic factor became the distance from the port of shipment. Tramways in various forms were installed to enable coal to be brought from more distant pits, and on these, horse-drawn vehicles were no doubt used.” [1: p757]
The Early Tramways of West Cumberland
Early tramways in West Cumberland were primarily focused on moving industrial goods—specifically coal and iron ore—rather than passengers. Online references to Industrial Waggonways and Tramways in the 19th Century include:
Woodagreen Pit to Whitehaven Harbour: a crude wooden waggonway built at the Ginns as early as 1683. [9]
Seaton Tramroad: A 3 mile wooden waggonway built from Seaton pit to Workington, in the early 1730s. [6]
Harrington Harbour/Bain’s Tramway (c. 1760/1840s): A wagonway was established at Harrington Harbour as early as 1760. Later, it became known as “Bain’s Tramway,” which is shown on an 1864 OS map connecting Harrington Harbour with mines at John Pit and Hodgson Pit, passing through Rose Hill.
Whitehaven Harbour: A horse-drawn tramway was completed in 1854, authorized by the Whitehaven and Furness Junction Railway Amendment Act 1853. It allowed goods wagons to travel from Preston Street to the south end of the harbour.
Mr. Curwen’s Waggonway: A significant waggonway owned by Henry Curwen of Workington, which necessitated a bridge for the Whitehaven Junction Railway to pass over it in 1844.
Colliery Lines: These include: Waggonways from Lonsdale Collieries on Broughton Moor; Howgill Colliery Waggonway; and Whingill Colliery Waggonway.
Whitehaven Mineral Lines: The rapid development of haematite deposits in the Cleator Moor and Egremont districts in the 1840s led to numerous industrial lines and tramroads, later absorbed by the Whitehaven, Cleator & Egremont Railway (opened in parts from 1857).
The First Howgill Incline: constructed by 1813 in Whitehaven. [22]
Rowrah & Kelton Fell Mineral Railway: A significant line developed to serve the limestone quarries and iron ore mines near Rowrah, with development occurring through the 1860s and 1870s.
Jane Pit to Quayside (Workington): saw horses towing basic coal trucks from the pit down and over the railway, along to Chapel Bank and on to the Quayside. [8]
Cleator & Workington Junction Railway (1879): While technically a later railway, it was built to connect the existing iron and coal mining infrastructure (early pits and associated wagonways) with the coast to break existing transport monopolies.
Harrington and Lowca Light Railway: (commonly known as the Lowca Light Railway or LLR)
Lowca: An early locomotive works was established at Lowca, lasting until 1926, its business was fatally undermined by a disastrous fire in which the wooden patterns used during manufacture were burned. [5]
Corkickle Brake: A standard-gauge rope-worked incline survived as late as 1986, which was a remnant of early industrial transport methods, handling 500,000 tons of traffic at its peak.
Yarlside Iron Mines Tramway: built by John Barraclough Fell. [21]
These early, often private, waggonways generally used iron rails (replacing wooden ones) to connect pits to collieries or directly to the rapidly developing ports of Workington, Harrington, and Whitehaven.
Main Line and Branch Line Railways
There were a surprising number of standard-gauge railway companies operating in West Cumberland, as the maps above show.
The Whitehaven Junction Railway
The Whitehaven Junction Railway (WJR) was a historic English railway company sanctioned in 1844 to connect the town of Whitehaven with the Maryport and Carlisle Railway, facilitating industrial growth in West Cumberland. It played a crucial role in linking local coal mines and ironworks to broader transport networks. [10]
The Whitehaven & Furness Junction Railway
The Whitehaven & Furness Junction Railway (W&FJR) was established to connect the town of Whitehaven with the Furness Railway at Broughton-in-Furness. [11]
The Whitehaven, Cleator & Egremont Railway
The Whitehaven, Cleator and Egremont Railway (WC&ER) was built to open up the hematite orefield to the south-east of Whitehaven. It opened for goods traffic in 1855 and for passenger traffic in 1857. [12]
The Maryport & Carlisle Railway
The Maryport and Carlisle Railway (M&CR) was incorporated in 1837 to connect the two towns of Carlisle and Maryport. George Stephenson was the engineer of the line, which opened fully on 10th February 1845. [13]
The Cleator & Workington Junction Railway
The Cleator and Workington Junction Railway (C&WJR) served the towns of Cleator Moor and Workington and intermediate villages. It was mainly used for coal, limestone and iron ore traffic for the local industries. [14]
The Cockermouth & Workington Railway
The Cockermouth and Workington Railway (C&WR) was established by act of Parliament in 1845. The railway opened for service in 1847, and ran from the Whitehaven Junction Railway station at Workington to a station at Cockermouth near the bridge over the Derwent. [15]
The Cockermouth, Keswick & Penrith Railway
The Cockermouth, Keswick and Penrith Railway (CK&PR) was incorporated by Act of Parliament on 1st August 1861, to build a line connecting the town of Cockermouth with the London and North Western Railway (LNWR) West Coast Main Line at Penrith. [16]
The Whitehaven & Furness Junction & Whitehaven Junction Joint Railway
While they were separate companies, the W&FJR and the WJR worked together, particularly around Whitehaven. By 1852, a connecting line (including the Bransty tunnel) linked the W&FJR from the south with the WJR from the north. From the mid-1850s, the two companies merged their efforts to focus passenger traffic at Whitehaven Bransty Station (jointly managed) and goods traffic at Preston Street. [17]
The Harrington & Lowca Light Railway
The Harrington and Lowca Light Railway (commonly known as the Lowca Light Railway or LLR) was a short railway close to the coast on the South side of Harrington. Rosehill Junction was the junction between Bain’s Tramway (later known as the Harrington and Lowca Light Railway) and the Cleator and Workington Junction Railway’s Harrington Branch (later known as the Rosehill Branch). [18][19
Tramways
A Proposed Electric Tramway for West Cumberland– 1901
At the turn of the 20th century, the Cleator Moor Electric Tramway was planned and Acts of Parliament were sought for its construction. [3] Sadly, this standard-gauge tramway was not built, even though three different enabling Acts of Parliament were sought and passed (1901, 1903 and 1905). [3]
The tramway was to be operated by the ‘West Cumberland Power & Tramway Company Limited’ [4]
Later Industrial Railways
These railways include:
The CORUS Works Tramroad: a 3 ft-gauge works railway. [7]
Whitehaven Harbour: by the late 19th century, almost all of the harbour had a rail network. Locomotives were first introduced in 1848, the last locomotive being disposed of in 1986. [20]
Various Inclines and Other Lines: in addition to the Corkickle Break mentioned above (which lasted until 1986) there was a second Howgill Incline built by 1923 and of which remains can be found adjacent to Wellington Lodge. The Howgill Incline(s) have been out of use since 1972. [23][24]
References
C. A. Knight; Railways of West Cumberland; in The Railway Magazine, November 1954; Tothill Press, London, 1954, p757-765.
N. Caplan reviewed parliamentary activity relating to railways in 1858 in The Railway Magazine of December 1958. His aim was to encourage research into railway history through the various Acts of Parliament relating to railways.
The Railway Magazine, December 1858, page 833. [1: p833]
“By 1858, the Railway Mania was well in the past, hostility to the railways had largely died away, and Parliament evidently felt that the railways might reasonably be left to consolidate their position by more prudent management, subject to the continuing close scrutiny of railway Bills by Parliamentary Committees. Some 8,000 miles of railway had been constructed, and the main trunk routes had mostly taken shape by 1858. After the financial disasters of the collapse of the railway boom, money was not readily forthcoming.
Most of the railway schemes before Parliament in 1858 were relatively modest. But there was plenty of fresh legislation with over seventy railway Acts receiving the Royal Assent in that year. These were, almost without exception, ‘Local & Personal Acts’ relating to particular railway companies, there were only two ‘Public General Acts’, and one of these applied only to railways in Ireland, the other amended the famous Act of 1844.” [1: p833]
Prior to reading Caplan’s article I was unaware of the distinction made in Parliament between ‘Local & Personal Acts’ and ‘Public General Acts’,
It appears that UK Acts of Parliament Acts of Parliament can be divided into two types: public acts and private acts. …
“Public actsare legislation of universal application and change the general law. Private acts (also known as local and personal acts) affect the powers of individual groups,such as companies or local authorities.Prior to 1798, all acts, both public and private, were published together with private acts listed as ‘local and personal acts declared private’. Since 1798, printed acts have been divided into two series: ‘public general acts’ and ‘local and personal acts’.” [2: p2]
The picture after 1798 is relatively complex:
According to the House of Commons information Office, [2: p3-4] Private Acts are listed as:
(a) Private Acts (until 1802); (b) Local and Personal Acts, not printed (1802-1814); Private Acts (1815-date) (titled Personal Acts from 1948).
All private acts have been printed since 1922.
Local and Personal Acts include:
(c) Public Local and Personal Acts (1798-1802);
(d) Local and Personal Acts to be judicially noticed (1803-1814); Local and Personal Acts declared public and to be judicially noticed (1815-1867);
(e) Provisional Order Confirmation Acts (regarded as public acts of a local character) (1867-1963);
(f) Local and Personal Acts (1868);
(g) Local and Private Acts (1869);
(h) Local Acts (1870 onwards).
The House of Commons Information Office comments: “The differences between all these series can often be set aside, except in searching out the actual texts from library shelves. However, it is normal to cite acts in a standard way, despite what may appear on the document itself.” [2: p4]
“It is now usual to cite public acts of all periods with arabic figures and post-1797 non-public acts with roman numerals. Personal Acts have italic arabic figures, and it is a service to the reader to supply the information (Not Printed) after the citation of any such act known never to have been printed. The [Chronological Table of the Statutes](CTS) is a useful guide for citing public acts of whatever age.” [2: p4-5]
The House of Commons Information Office goes on to provide specific details of how citations should be structured and then gives examples of how this should be done, note that ‘cap’ is short for ‘chapter’:
For Public Acts examples are: [2: p5]
Disorderly Houses Act 1751 (25 Geo 2 cap 36) Debtors Act 1869 (32 & 33 Vict cap 62) County Courts (Penalties for Contempt) Act 1983 (cap 45)
For Local Acts, examples are: [2: p5]
Aberbrothwick Harbour Act 1839 (2 & 3 Vict cap xvii) Epping Forest Act 1878 (41 & 42 Vict cap ccxiii) British Railways (Liverpool Street Station) Act 1983 (cap iv)
For Personal and Private Acts, examples are: [2: p5]
Marquess of Abergavenny’s Estates Act 1946 (9 & 10 Geo 6 cap 1) Hugh Small and Norma Small (Marriage Enabling) Act 1982 (cap 2)
Returning to Caplan’s article: he speaks of just two Public Acts relating to railways in 1858, it appears that these are:
An Act to continue “The Railways Act (Ireland), 1851.” UK Public General Acts 1858 cap. 34 (Regnal. 21_and_22_Vict). [3]
The Cheap Trains and Canal Carriers Act 1858 (21 & 22 Vict. cap. 75), which amended earlier regulations regarding passenger duty and company liabilities. [4]
Caplan has more to say about the second of these two Acts. His comments can be found later in this article. …….
There is a summary, available online, of the clauses in the railways Acts of the 1858 session of Parliament giving powers to the Board of Trade. [7] That Summary may well be of interest here and is reproduced as Appendix 1 to this article (after the References below).
In his article, Caplan goes on to look at a number of specific ‘Local and Personal Acts’, he says: “Some of the Local & Personal Acts of 1858 exemplified the continuing problems of railway development, while others reflected the emergence of new problems, and it is interesting to look at a selection of these Acts.” [1: p833] Those he looked at included:
The Knighton Railway Act – one of the few in 1858 relating to an entirely new railway company. This Act, dated 21st May 1958, incorporated the Knighton Railway Company to construct a 9-mile line from Craven Arms to Bucknell, later extending to Knighton. It was a key component of the Central Wales line development, aiming to connect the industrial Midlands with Welsh border towns, eventually being absorbed by the LNWR. [5][6] The Act stated that:
“a Railway from the Craven Arms Station of the Shrewsbury & Hereford Railway, in the County of Salop, to the Borough of Knighton, in the County of Radnor, would be of great public and local advantage. The cost of construction was modestly estimated at £66,000 to be raised by a capital of 6,600 shares of £10. The Knighton Railway was intended to be be worked in conjunction with the Shrewsbury & Hereford Company, and the Act provided for the latter to work the Knighton line. No doubt largely as a matter of form the Act gave similar sanction for the Knighton Company to work the Shrewsbury & Hereford line.” [1: p833]
It is worth noting the powers reserved to the Board of Trade in respect of this railway which appears in Appendix 1 to this article below. [7][Appendix 1]
Caplan points out that the Knighton Act was full of interesting facets of Parliament’s ideas about the control of railways, such as: the detailed control of maximum passenger and freight charges; and the maximum charge of fivepence per ton per mile “for fish, feathers, canes, cochineal, house-hold furniture, hats, shoes, toys and all other articles, matters, and things.” [1: p833]
Caplan also highlights the delays in completing new lines such as the Salisbury & Yeovil Railway and the need to authorise the sale of that line to the London & South Western Railway:
The Salisbury & Yeovil Railway Act
The Salisbury & Yeovil had a struggle to build its line because of shortage of money. The Salisbury & Yeovil Company was incorporated by an Act of 1854, and was authorised to make a railway from the terminus of the Basingstoke and Salisbury line of the London & South Western Railway at Salisbury to Yeovil, together with a branch to join the Wilts, Somerset & Weymouth Railway near Yeovil. The 1854 Act had laid down that these lines were to be completed in four years, and failure to comply might have involved a penalty of (30,000. The Salisbury & Yeovil had to go back to Parliament in 1855 and again in 1857 for authority for deviations from the original route, and was still desperately short of funds. The company was compelled to turn to the London & South Western for help, and amalgamation was the only real solution of its difficulties.
The Salisbury & Yeovil Act of 28th June 1858, gave the company further time to complete the revised route – two years from the passing of the Act and power to transfer the undertaking of the company to the L.S.W.R. Under the “South-Western Railway (Works and Capital) Act, 1858,” of 12th July 1858, the L.S.W.R. received power to lease or purchase the Salisbury & Yeovil Company and the way was cleared for the L.S.W.R.’s through main line from London to Exeter. [1: p833-834]
Railway Construction Costs
Caplan notes that railway construction costs almost inevitably exceeded estimates made by companies and thus the provision made for financing the construction and operation of a line by Parliament. Troubles arose:
“because of unforeseen engineering problems, … [and/or] the high costs of acquiring land and fighting rival promoters. … It is worth recalling that the costs of railway construction in Britain were strikingly high; it was stated in Parliament in 1858 that the average cost had been ₤33,000 a mile, compared with only £9,000 a mile in the United States, where land was so cheap and built-up areas so few. [1: p834]
Many of the 1858 Acts were designed to deal with money matters. This was true of:
“the Cromford & High Peak Railway Company to raise further Sums of Money; and for other Purposes. This unique railway was incorporated in 1826, and the company was given power in 1855 to raise more money, and to re-organise its capital structure. The 1858 Act referred to the ‘improvement of their railway, and they have laid out considerable sums of money upon that portion of the line which is situate between the junction of the Stockport, Disley & Whaley Bridge Railway and the station near the town of Buxton, and such expenditure has been beneficial to the company and the public and a considerable increase of traffic has arisen upon the railway’. The 1858 Act authorised the Cromford & High Peak to raise another £60,000 capital in the form of 3,000 more 6% preference shares of £20, and to raise £20,000 by mortgage.” [1: p834]
Interestingly, Caplan states, “All of the Acts dealing with financial powers of railway companies contained a clause of great … importance in relation to the Railway Mania of the 1840s, and the chequered career of George Hudson, the ‘Railway King’.“[1: p834] This clause stated:
“It shall not be lawful for the company, out of any money by this Act authorised to be raised by calls in respect of shares or by the exercise of any power of borrowing, to pay to any shareholder interest or dividends on the amount of the calls made in respect of the shares held by him in the capital by this Act authorised.” [1: p834]
Caplan explains that “The Hudson Empire had been built up only at the expense of the integrity of the various companies’ capital, and there had been cases of dividends being paid out of capital instead of out of genuine net earnings. It was these irregular dividend payments which helped to stimulate the public demand for railway shares, and thus led to the fantastic boom of 1845-46 in which railway promoters were offering the public the prospect of even 14 or 15 per cent. interest. The collapse of the boom, and the investigation of company accounts, led Parliament to insist on this standard clause to prohibit dividend payments out of capital.” [1: p834]
George Hudson controlled a significant part of the railway network in the 1840s. He had the title “The Railway King” conferred on him by Sydney Smith in 1844. He played a major role in linking London to Edinburgh by rail. He also formed the first significant merger of railway companies, creating the Midland Railway, and developed his home city of York into a major railway junction. He represented Sunderland in the House of Commons. However, his “success was built on dubious financial practices and he frequently paid shareholders out of capital rather than money the company had earned.” [8]
There were a series of railway mergers over the 1850s. Caplan say that “the process of railway amalgamation continued in 1858, as some of the smaller and financially-weaker companies found it impossible to carry on, and a number of Acts provided for amalgamation by outright purchase or for such close financial and working arrangements that the companies concerned lost all effective independence.” [1: p834] Caplan mentions one in particular:
The Inverury & Old Meldrum Junction Railway
On 11th June 1858, this railway was authorised “to be leased in perpetuity to the Great North of Scotland Railway for a rental of £650 per year, payable half-yearly. … A very modest sum for the lease of a railway but the Inverury & Old Meldrum Junction was a very small railway.” [1: p834]
The route of the Inverury & Old Meldrum Junction Railway. [9]
The authorising Act for the Inverury and Old Meldrum Junction Railway received the Royal Assent on 15th June 1855, a necessary capital of £22,000 was authorised. The line was “5 miles 1194 yards in length, from a junction at Inverurie. The station at that time was some distance south of the present one; the Old Meldrum branch line ran alongside the main line for nearly a mile before diverging. The engineer was John Willet. There were few engineering complications in constructing the line, the biggest work being a 50-foot girder bridge over the River Ury.” [9][10: p7-9][11][12]
The capital was raised mainly locally, and construction was completed quickly and cheaply, being ready by June 1856 at a low cost of about £5,000 per mile. The opening to passengers took place on Thursday 26th June 1856. [9][10: p7-9][13]
In 1866 the Great North of Scotland Railway (GNoSR) set about incorporating several branch line leases into the parent company; the Oldmeldrum company was one of them. The £650 annual lease rental was converted to £13,810 of new GNoSR Old Meldrum preference stock. Parliament authorised the change on 1 August 1866. Ordinary shareholders got £3 of GNoSR stock for their £10 shares. [9][10: p7-9][13]
In 1930 passenger receipts had totalled £243, which represented a loss in working of £718. It was hardly sustainable to continue such an operation, and the LNER closed the passenger service from 2 November 1931. [9][10: p58][18: p315]
The basic goods service to Oldmeldrum continued, but it too became unsupportable in the 1960s, and it was closed on 3 January 1966.[18: p315] It was later used for a while for wagon storage.[9][10: p65]
The Manchester South Junction & Altrincham Railway
This railway was authorised by Parliament in 1845 and was jointly owned by the London & North Western and the Manchester, Sheffield and Lincolnshire railways.
Caplan says that:
“It is not surprising that the railway companies concerned in the operation of joint lines did not always see eye to eye, and one Act of 1858 brings clearly above the surface some of the difficulties which arose. This was the ‘Act to improve the management of the Manchester South Junction & Altrincham Railway’. …. The M.S.J.A.R. …. was managed by a board of six directors, three nominated by each company, and two chairmen, each company appointing one. The chairmen were to preside alternately at board meetings and the presiding chairman had a casting vote in the event of a tie.
“Such an arrangement was bound to cause trouble at times and as the preamble to the 1858 Act said ‘it has been found that in cases where the interests of the London & North Western and the Manchester, Sheffield & Lincolnshire Railway Companies differ the said provisions with respect to the chairman of the board of directors produce great inconvenience and delay, and that resolutions passed by the said board under one chairman are often rescinded by a subsequent board under another chairman.” The preamble went on to refer to the competition between the parent companies: inasmuch as the two companies work over and are competitors for much of the traffic which is or may be conveyed over the South Junction Railway, and the questions therefore between them are likely to be multiplied, it is essential to the public convenience and to the proper use of the South Junction Railway…
“The Act provided that in future the chairman presiding over any board meeting should not have a casting vote. Instead, the parent companies were to appoint each December an arbitrator and, in the event of failure to agree on an arbitrator, the Board of Trade was to make this appointment. The arbitrator’s term of office was fixed at one year, though he could be re-appointed. The arbitrator was given the power to decide disputed matters in cases where there was a tie in voting at the board of the South Junction Railway. [1: p834-835]
A Station near Victoria Street, Pimlico and a Railway to Connect it with the West End of London & Crystal Palace Railway at Battersea
Caplan says that the continued growth of towns and passenger traffic required big changes in station arrangements, and a particularly interesting Act of 1858 concerned London. This was:
“‘An Act to authorise the construction of a station near Victoria Street, Pimlico, in the County of Middle-sex, and of a railway to connect the same with the West End of London & Crystal Palace Railway at Battersea in the County of Surrey, in order to afford improved communication between certain of the railways south of the Thames and the western districts of the Metro-polis; and for other purposes’.
This was indeed a major scheme of passenger traffic improvement – the authorised capital was £675,000. The existing terminus of the West End of London & Crystal Palace Railway was South of the Thames at Battersea – it was, however, called ‘Pimlico’ – and this was not at all convenient for the West End. Pimlico Station was opened in March, 1858, and the new Victoria Station authorised by the 1858 Act was opened in October, 1860, so that the ‘West End Terminus’ south of the River had the shortest of lives.” [1: p835][20]
The Victoria Station and Pimlico Railway (VS&PR) was by the Victoria Station and Pimlico Railway Act 1858 on 23 July 1858. to build Victoria Station, Grosvenor Bridge over the River Thames, and a length of line to Connect with the London & Crystal Palace Railway. The company later leased its lines and stations to the LB&SCR and the London Chatham and Dover Railway (LC&DR) but continued in existence until December 1922 when it was very briefly amalgamated with the South Eastern Railway before becoming part of the Southern Railway as a result of the Railways Act 1921, which created the Big Four on 1 January 1923.
In 1844, ‘Gladstone’s Act’ was passed ‘to attach certain Conditions to the Construction of future Railways’. Although about the general regulation of the railways, Gladstone’s Act was known as the charter of third class passengers who suffered a miserable time travelling on those railways that thought it worthwhile recognising their existence!
Caplan says that:
” Parliament’s aim in Clause VI of the 1844 Act was to ‘secure to the poorer class of travellers the means of travelling by railway at moderate fares, and in carriages in which they may be protected from the weather’ and at least one train a day in each direction on all main, junction and branch lines was to provide such facilities. Parliament specified the fare to be charged: ‘The fare or charge for each third class passenger by such train shall not exceed one penny for each mile travelled’.
“However, there was room here for disagreement about the proper basis of charging for fractions of a mile travelled. Hardened as we are by the course of inflation, we may be tempted to smile at the thought of Parliament moving in all its majesty in 1858 to lay down that fractions of a mile must be charged for at a specific rate, but farthings and halfpennies were real money a hundred years ago. The Victorians-individuals and railway companies were unlikely to dismiss farthings and halfpennies as insignificant quite apart from the question of the principle of the thing.
“So it was that Clause 1 of the Cheap Trains Act, 1858, prescribed the method of charging for fractions of a mile on journeys by the ‘Parliamentary Trains’: ‘When the distance travelled by any third class passenger by any train run in accordance with the provisions [of the 1844 Act] is a portion of a mile, and does not exceed one mile, the fare for such portion of a mile may be one penny, or when such distance amounts to one mile, or two or more miles, and a portion of another mile, the fare or charge for each such portion of a mile, if the same amounts to or exceeds one half mile, may be one halfpenny’.” [1: p835, p860]
The first page of the Act referred to as the ‘Cheap Trains Act’. It is worth noting that the Act sought not only to amend the law relating to Cheap Trains but also to restrain the Exercise of certain powers by Canal Companies being also Railway Companies. [22]
The ‘Cheap Trains Act’ was actually also intended to curb railway companies from monopolizing transport by abusing their control over acquired canal networks. It regulated the leasing of canals by railway companies, ensuring they couldn’t stifle competition, while also addressing railway pricing.
The Act specifically addressed concerns that railway companies, having bought up canals, would allow them to fall into disrepair or charge prohibitive tolls to force traffic onto the rails.
It also restricted any ‘Canal or Navigation Company, being also a Railway Company’ from leasing other canals or railways without parliamentary authority, preventing the massive consolidation of transport networks by a few rail companies.
It sought to maintain the viability of independent canal carriers against ‘Railway and Canal Companies’.
It also sought to strengthen the provisions of the Railway and Canal Traffic Act 1854 which forced canal and rail companies to provide ‘reasonable facilities’ for transport.
The 1858 Act was later made perpetual by the Cheap Trains Act 1860. It acted as a protection mechanism for the waning canal industry against aggressive railway competition during the expansion of the UK’s rail network.
However, the 1860 Act was not Parliament’s last word on the subject of Cheap Trains. A further Act was passed in 1883. It was known as the ‘Cheap Trains Act’. The 1883 spurred the expansion of affordable ‘workmen’s trains’. It abolished or reduced passenger duty (duty not fares) for companies charging less than a penny a mile, requiring them to provide sufficient services for working-class commuters, particularly in urban areas. [23] It obliged the railway companies to operate a larger number of cheap trains. [24]
That 1883 Act also consolidated the Law relating to the conveyance of the Queen’s Forces by Railway. [23]
“Some railways in London were already operating workmen’s trains although they were often overcrowded and inconveniently timed. Although the act was opposed by some railway officers, notably Sir Edward Watkin of the Manchester, Sheffield and Lincolnshire Railway, the number of cheap suburban services increased greatly. During the 20th century, the appearance of competing road services meant that the railways were forced to reduce their fares. So few services eventually attracted duty that the act was abolished in the Finance Act 1929.” [24]
Further Acts of Parliament relating to railways were not considered worth noting by Caplan, some of these are covered in Appendix 2.
Returning to Caplan’s article, he concludes by saying that, “No railway enthusiast should be deterred from the thought of looking into Acts of Parliament by the mistaken impression that they are dry as dust. Many of them bring the ‘Railway Age’ before us in the most vivid way.” [1: p860]
Hopefully this review of his article has further emphasised the value of reading through relevant Acts of Parliament to gain a better understanding of railway history.
References
N. Caplan; Parliament and Railways in 1858; in The Railway Magazine, December 1958; Tothill Press, London, 1958, p833-835 & p860.
Duncan McLeish; Rails to Banff, Macduff and Oldmeldrum: Three Great North of Scotland Railway Branch Lines; Great North of Scotland Railway Association, 2014, p7-9.
Donald J Grant; Directory of the Railway Companies of Great Britain; Matador, Kibworth Beauchamp, 2017, p278.
H A Vallance; The Great North of Scotland Railway; David and Charles, Dawlish, 1965, p59-60.
David Ross; The Great North of Scotland Railway: A New History; Stenlake Publishing, p40, 83, 222 & 223.
The Clauses in the Railways Acts of the 1858 Session of Parliament giving Powers to the Board of Trade are to the following effect:
Construction of Works
Alyth Railway Act, 1858, c. 43. s. 28., &c. —Provides that the junction with the Scottish North-Eastern Railway, in case of difference, is to be made according to a plan approved of by an engineer appointed by the Board of Trade previously to the commencement of such work; and any difference as to the nature or necessity of the signals and other works at the junction, the same to be referred to arbitration or the decision of an engineer, to be appointed by the Board of Trade, at the option of the Scottish North-Eastern Company.
Andover and Redbridge Railway Act, 1858, c. 82. s. 22., &c. — Provides that the Company are not to proceed with any works affecting the Bishopstoke and Salisbury Railway, or any of the works of the London and South-Western Railway Company, until they shall have delivered to that Company a plan, &c. of the proposed works, and obtained the approval thereof of the principal engineer; but if he shall not certify his approval within one calendar month of the delivery of such plan, &c., and shall fail to furnish within such period a plan of executing the works satisfactory to that Company, the Andover Company may submit a plan, &c., to the Board of Trade, and on the same being certified, proceed to the execution of the works, &c.
The Company shall also so make and maintain the Branch Railway as to enable the London and South-Western Company to make a convenient junction between it and the Southampton and Dorchester Railway; and any difference with reference thereto is to be settled by the arbitrator of the Board of Trade, and the Company are not to open the railway between Romsey and Redbridge, or any part thereof, for public traffic, unless they simultaneously open for traffic the branch railway.
Banbridge, Lisburn, and Belfast Railway Act, 1858, c. 46. s. 32. — Provides that in case of difference with respect to any works for effecting the communication with the Ulster Railway and the Banbridge Junction Railway, the same is to be determined by an engineer, to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Caledonian Railway (Branch to Port Carlisle Railway) Act, 1858, c. 66. s. 5. — Provides that all communications between the Branch Railway authorized by this Act and the Port Carlisle Railway, in case of difference, are to be effected by means of connexion rails, and points of such construction, and laid in such manner as shall he determined by an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Devon Valley Railway Act,, 1858, c. 122. s. 26., &c. — Provides that in case of difference, the junctions of the railway with the Tillicoultry Branch of the Stirling and Dunfermline Railway, and with the Fife and Kinross Railway, are to be made according to a plan to be approved of by an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade; and any difference as to the nature or necessity of the works to be constructed at such junctions shall be referred to arbitration, or the decision of an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade, at the option of the Stirling Company or the Fife and Kinross Company respectively. A certain road in the parish of Dollar is to be carried over the railway by a stone bridge, to the satisfaction of the engineers of the Company and the landowners named in the Act, or in case of difference, of an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Dublin and Meath Railway Act, 1858, c. 119. — Provides that communications between the railways authorized by the Act and the railway of any other Company, shall be made to the satisfaction of the engineer of the Company with whose line such communication is to be made: and if such Company shall have no engineer, or the engineers shall differ, then such communications shall be made in the manner directed by an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
East Kent Railway ( Western Extension) Act, 1858, c. 107. s. 7., &c. — Provides that all communications between the railway and the Mid-Kent Railway (Bromley to St. Mary Cray), in case of dispute, shall be made in such manner as shall be directed by an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade. Before the Company open the railway for public traffic, they are to make a station at Sole Street at which all trains are to stop (except on Sundays), for the purpose of taking up and setting down passengers, goods &c., special or express, or mail trains, only excepted.
East Suffolk Railway (Branch and Capital) Act, 1858, c. 47. s. 10. — Provides that in case of difference as to the mode of making the communications with the Lowestoft Railway, or as to the works necessary or convenient for effecting the same, the matter is to be settled by the Board of Trade, or its arbitrator.
Eden Valley Railway Act, 1858, c. 14. s. 28. — Provides that in case of disputes as to the nature or necessity of the works at the junctions of the railway authorized by this Act with the Lancaster and Carlisle Railway, or the South Durham and Lancashire Union Railway, the matter shall be referred to arbitration, or to the decision of an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade, on the application of either of the Companies.
Exeter and Exmouth Railway Act, 1858, c. 56. s. 46. — Provides that if any carriageway be made across the railway on the level for the benefit or convenience of any person interested in the shore or river bank adjoining the railway, the mode of making and watching such crossing shall be subject to the approval of the Board of Trade.
Fife and Kinross and Kinross-shire Railways Junction and Joint Station Aci, 1858, c. 65. s. 5. &c. — Provides that the junction between the railways of the two Companies and the joint station at Kinross, and the bridge for carrying the Great North Road, &c. over the Kinross-shire Railway and the levels of the two railways, are to be made to the satisfaction of the engineers for the time being of the Companies, and in case of difference, of an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade, on the application of either Company.
Either of the Companies, on giving three months’ notice, may construct the joint station at Kinross, and will be entitled to recover from the other Company one moiety of the expense, as the same shall be certified by the engineers, or in case of difference, by an engineer to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Formartine and Buchan Railway Act, 1858, c. 108. s. 45., &c. — Provides that the Branch Railway to Ellon is to be constructed simultaneously with the main line from Dyce to Old Deer, and no part of the main line is to be opened to the public until the branch has been opened, and no part of the railway is to be opened until a double line of rails shall have been laid down upon the Great North of Scotland Railway between the point of junction at Dyce and Kittybrewster. Any difference as to the mode of effecting the communication with the Great North of Scotland Railway is to be determined by a referee, to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Knighton Railway Act, 1858, c. 19. s. 22. — Provides that any difference as to the mode of effecting the communications with the Shrewsbury and Hereford Railway is to be determined by a referee, to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Midland Great Western Railway o f Ireland (Clare Deviation) Act, 1858, r. 94. s. 9. —Provides that in case of difference with reference to any works for effecting the communication between the railway authorized by the Act and the Great Southern and Western Railway, the same is to be determined by an engineer, to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Newport, Abergavenny, and Hereford Railway Act, 1858, r. 126. s. 7., &c. — Provides that a deviation is to be made in the Aberdare Canal, at the expense of the Company, and to be maintained and repaired by them during a period of five years; and if any dispute shall arise between them and the Canal Company touching the said matters, the same is to be determined by an engineer, to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
North British Railway Consolidation Act, 1858, c. 109. s. 49. — Provides that this Act repeals the prohibition against the use of locomotive engines on the Old Leith Branch Railway, and empowers the Company to stop up such of the roads or accesses across the railway in the parish of South Leith as they may think fit, and to make provision for the crossing of the railway, at two or more points, by means of occupation or other roads, and to execute such works as may be necessary for adapting the railway to the use of locomotive engines, and to run the same thereon.
Portsmouth Railway Amendment Act, 1858, c. 101. s, 7., &c. — Provides that if any difference shall arise respecting the communication between the Portsmouth Railway and the railways belonging either jointly or separately to the Brighton and South- Western Companies, or as to the erection of signals at, and other matters connected with such junctions, the same is to be determined by arbitration, in the manner provided by the Railways Clauses Consolidation Act, 1845, section 21. The Company are prohibited from appropriating any part of a certain road, called Blackfriars Road, belonging to the Landport and Southsea Commissioners; but they may and shall, for the purpose of forming a communication between their railway and the line of the Brighton and South-Western Companies at Landport, make sidings, with two lines of rails, within the limit of deviation, across and on the level of the said road, subject to the usual provisions in reference to crossing roads on the level, and to such other reasonable regulations as may be agreed on between them and the surveyor, or, in case of dispute, as shall be settled by an officer to be appointed by the Board of Trade.
Redditch Railway Act, 1858, c. 137. s. 36. — Provides that the bridge for carrying the railway over the Worcester and Birmingham Canal is to be constructed, as to its position, form, and dimensions, to the satisfaction of the engineer of the Railway and Canal Companies, and, in the event of disagreement, to the satisfaction of an engineer to be approved by the Board of Trade.
Symington, Biggar, and Broughton Railway Act, 1858, c. 15. s. c25., &c. —Provides that in case of difference as to the mode of effecting the junction with the Caledonian Railway, the same is to be made according to a plan approved of by an engineer, to be appointed by the Board of Trade previously to the commencement of the works; and any question as to the nature or necessity of works at the junction, in case of dispute, is to be referred to arbitration, or to the decision of the Board of Trade, at the option of the Caledonian Company.
Whitehaven Junction Railway (New Branches) Act, 1858, c. 127. s. 27. — Provides that if the Company shall be required by the Lords of the Admiralty, under the provisions of this Act, to make any carriageway across the railway on the level, for the purpose of affording access to the seashore, then the manner of making and watching such level crossing shall be subject to the approval of the Board of Trade, and the Company shall not be liable for the expenses of watching such level crossing.
Additional Rails
East Suffolk Railway (Branch and Capital) Act, 1858, c. 47. s. 27. — Provides that the main line from the Leiston Junction to Halesworth, and the part from Halesworth to Haddiscoe, are to be completed, so that two lines of railway may be laid down when and as the Company think proper; and if the Company shall not lay down two such lines of rails, then when it shall appear to the Board of Trade that another line of rails, in addition to the single line of rails on such portions, is required for the public accommodation.
Portsmouth Railway Amendment Act, 1858, c. 101. — Provides that if the gross annual proceeds of the traffic on the line between Godalming and Havant for three consecutive years shall average £45,000, the Company, on request of the Board of Trade, shall lay down an additional line of rails, raising such an amount of additional capital as may be necessary for that purpose.
Lease, Sale or Amalgamation
East Suffolk Railway Companies Amalgamation Act, 1858, c. 111. s. 3. and s. 43., &c. — Provides that from the passing of the Act the undertakings of the East Suffolk Company, the Yarmouth and Haddiscoe Company, and the Lowestoft and Beccles Company were united and consolidated into one undertaking.
The Company may grant a lease of their undertaking to Sir M. Peto for any term not exceeding 21 years, determinable on 12 months’ notice, after a resolution by the Company that such lease shall be determined, provided that if within three months after such notice the lessee shall apply to the Board of Trade and object to the determination of such lease, then the resolution and notice shall have no force or effect, unless the Board of Trade shall be of opinion that the lease is injurious to the public interests, and shall confirm such resolution. Any shareholder, voting against such resolution, within three months may require the Company to purchase the shares, in respect of which he voted, at par.
South Devon and Tavistock Railway Act, 1858, c. 102. s. 3. — Provides that lease to the South Devon Company, with consent of Shareholders of both Companies, the Company still remaining liable to the provisions of the 30th section, 17 & 18 Vict. c. 189, as to laying down additional rails on the narrow gauge, if required so to do by the Board of Trade: the terms and conditions of using the same by any Company, in case of dispute, are to be settled and adjusted by the Board of Trade.
Staines, Wokingham, and Woking Railway Act, 1858, c. 58. s. 19., &c. — Provides that the Company may lease all or any part of their undertaking to the South-Western Company, with consent of shareholders of both Companies. The lease, at the expiration of every ten years, to be subject to such modification as the Board of Trade may consider necessary to protect the public interests.
Ulverstone and Lancaster Railway Act, 1858, c. 98. s. 42., &c. — Provides for lease or sale to the Furness Company of all or any part of the undertaking; the terms to be approved of by the Board of Trade.
Vale of Towy Railway (Leasing) Act, 1858, c. 147. s. 3. — Provides that the Company may lease for a period of 10 years their undertaking to the Llanelly Railway and Dock Company, such lease to be approved of by the Board of Trade.
Use of Railway Station, &c.
Fife and Kinross and Kinrosshire Railways Junction and Joint Station Act, 1858, c. 65. s. 17., &c. — Declares that the management and maintenance of the joint station are in the Companies; but in the event of any difference thereon, or on any other questions relating to the use and working of such station, or as to the expense thereof, the same is to be settled by an arbitrator, to be appointed by the Board of Trade. The Companies may agree with the Edinburgh, Perth, and Dundee Company with respect to the use and working of the railways authorized by this Act on the terms of the Fife and Kinross Railway Act, 1855, and the Kinrosshire Railway Act, 1857.
London, Brighton, and South Coast Railway (New Lines) Act, 1858, c. 84. s. 27., Sec. — Provides that the Company and all persons lawfully using their railway, may likewise use the Mid-Sussex Railway Stations, &c.; and in case of dispute as to the time, conditions, and regulations respecting the use thereof, the same shall be determined by the Board of Trade, or its arbitrator.
London and North-Western Railway (Additional Works) Act, 1858, c. 131. s. 12. — Provides that the Company, and the Great Western Company may, if they shall think fit, instead of proceeding with the arbitration under the provisions of 17 & 18 Vict. c. 200., for the separation and allotment of the joint station at Wolverhampton, known as the High Level Station, or in addition thereto, so far as the same shall not extend, make and carry into effect agreements for the appropriation and allotment to and between, or to either of them, of the whole or any part of such station ; and upon such appropriation and allotment being completed and approved of by the Board of Trade, the several portions shall vest in the Stour Valley and Great Western Com panies accordingly. The portion which may be assigned to the Stour Valley Company shall be deemed to be included in the lease to the London and North-Western Company.
Portsmouth Railway Amendment Act, 1858, c. 101. s. 25. — Provides that the Company, and all other companies lawfully using the Portsmouth Railway, may pass over and use so much of the railway of the Brighton Company as will be situated between the point of junction with that railway, in the parish of Havant, and the Portsmouth Railway, and the point at or near Hilsea Redoubt, where the Brighton Railway unites with the line to Portsmouth belonging to the Brighton and South-Western Companies, and also of their line to Portsmouth between the said point at Hilsea Redoubt and the terminus of the said railway at the Landport road, in the parish of Portsea, and also so much of the line of the South-Western Company as will be situate between the point of junction therewith of the intended railway firstly described in this Act, and the before-mentioned point at Hilsea Redoubt. The terms and conditions of such user are to be settled, failing agreement between the Companies, by their principal engineers, or their umpire, or, failing such appointment, by some person to be appointed by the Board of Trade. The right of user of the joint station at Landport is limited to traffic conveyed on the public service, but the Companies may agree for the use thereof for the general traffic.
The Portsmouth Company, in working or using the railway of the Brighton and South-Western Companies, is to observe the regulations and bye-laws of the Companies in force on the railways so used, as far as the same shall be applicable to the Portsmouth Company; and in case of dispute respecting such regulations or bye-laws, or the mode in which the powers or privileges given by the Act shall be exercised, or the regulations to be adopted exclusively for the convenience or accommodation to be afforded to the traffic of the Portsmouth Company, the same shall be settled as before-mentioned, provided that neither such regulations and bye-laws, so far as they affect the Portsmouth Company, nor the award thereon of the engineers, or their umpire, shall have any force unless the same shall have been confirmed by the Board of Trade. Any award of an umpire may be reconsidered by order of the Board of Trade.
Traffic Arrangements.
Alyth Railway Act, 1858, c. 48. s. 47., &c. —Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Scottish North-Eastern, and Edinburgh and Perth, and Dundee Companies, or either of them. Agreement limited to ten years, and to be assented to by the shareholders of the several Companies in special meeting, and to be approved of by the Board of Trade.
Athenry and Tuam Railway Act, 1858, c. 112. s. 44., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Midland Railway of Ireland Company. Agreement limited to ten years, and to be assented to by the shareholders of the Companies in general meeting, and to be approved of by the Board of Trade.
Banbridge, Lisburn, and Belfast Railway Act, 1858, c. 46. s. 44, &c. —Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Ulster, the Dublin and Belfast Junction, and the Banbridge Junction Companies, or either of them. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the shareholders of the Companies parties thereto, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
Caledonian Railway (Branch to Port Carlisle Railway) Act, 1858, r. 66. s. 16., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Port Carlisle Company and the Carlisle and Silloth Bay Company, or either of them. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the shareholders of each Company, and to be approved of by the Board of Trade.
Cleveland Railway Act, 1858, c. 114. s. 40. —Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the West Hartlepool Company. Agreement to be assented to by the shareholders of the Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade. On the expiration of ten years from the commencement of any agreement, the Board of Trade may cause the same to be revised, and the Board is empowered to declare that, if any modification required by it be not agreed to by the Companies, then, at the expiration of twelve months after notice given to the Companies of such modification being required, the said agreement shall determine.
East Kent Railway (Western Extension) Act, 1858, c. 107. s. 17., &c. — Provides for the due transmission of traffic to or from any part of the railways belonging to the South-Eastern Company, to or from any part of the railways belonging to the East Kent Railway Company, and empowers the Board of Trade, in case of dispute as to the nature and extent of the accommodation to be afforded by the latter Company, and the rates of charge at which the several services required of it shall be performed, to settle the terms and conditions. The Company and the West London and Crystal Palace Company may enter into traffic arrangements. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the shareholders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade. Any question or difference which may arise between the Companies with reference to the construction of any such agreement, is to be settled by the Board of Trade, or its arbitrator.
East Suffolk Railway Companies Amalgamation Act, 1858, c. 111. s. 50. &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be entered into with the Eastern Counties Company, the Norfolk Company, and the Eastern Union Company. Agreement to be assented to by the shareholders of the several Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade, and to be liable to revision by that Board at the expiration of every ten years. If the revision proposed by the Board of Trade be not agreed to, the Board may declare that the agreement, at the expiration of twelve months, shall determine.
Eden Valley Railway Act, 1858, c. 14. s. 39., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Stockton and Darlington Company, the Lancaster and Carlisle Company, and the South Durham and Lancashire Union Company, or either of them. Agreement to be assented to by the shareholders of the several Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade, and to be liable to revision by that Board on the expiration of every ten years. If the revision proposed by the Board of Trade be not agreed to, the Board may declare that the agreement, at the expiration of twelve months, shall determine. The South Durham Company are required by the Act to afford all proper facilities for the due transmission of the traffic.
Exeter and Exmonth Railway Act, 1858, c. 56. s. 63., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the South- Western Company. Agreement to be assented to by the share holders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade. At the expiration of ten years after the date of any such agreement, if the Board of Trade is of opinion that the agreement is adverse to the public interests, it may require the Companies to modify the terms and conditions thereof.
Formartine and Buchan Railway Act, 1858, c. 108. s. 52., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Great North of Scotland Company. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the shareholders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
Great Northern and Manchester, Sheffield and Lincolnshire Railway Companies Act, 1858, c. 113. s. 1., &c. — Provides that the Companies from time to time during 50 years, with assent of share holders, and approval of the Board of Trade, may enter into agreement with respect to the conduct of the traffic. The Manchester Company is to afford to the London and North-Western, or any other Company on demand, all reasonable facilities for the forwarding of traffic between Liverpool and the port of Great Grimsby, and between any other station of the London and North-Western Railway and the same port, or between any station of such other Company and the port of Great Grimsby; and any difference as to the facilities to be afforded, or as to the amount of the rates, is to be settled from time to time by an arbitrator, to be appointed by the Board of Trade. It is not incumbent on the Manchester Company to afford any such facilities, unless the Company applying shall afford to them similar facilities between the same places.
Great Northern and Western (of Ireland) Railway Act, c. 96. s. 21., &c. — Provides that agreements which the Companies may enter into under the 20 & 21 Vict. c. 84., may be for such periods as the Companies think fit. Any such agreement, at the expiration of ten years from the date or revision thereof, is liable to the revision of the Board of Trade, if the Board shall be of opinion that the public interests are injuriously affected by it.
Knighton Railway Act, 1858, c. 19. s. 43., &c. —Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Shrewsbury and Hereford Company. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the shareholders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
Liskeard and Looe Railway Act, 1858, c. 1 1 . s. 33., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Liskeard and Caradon Company. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the shareholders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
South-Western Railway (Works and Capital) Act, 1858, c. 89. .v. 33., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Wimbledon and Dorking Company and the Exeter and Exmouth Company, with consent of shareholders, and approval of the Board of Trade, which Board, at the end of every ten years, may call on the Companies to modify the terms and conditions of the agreements if the Board shall be of opinion that the public interests are thereby injuriously affected.
North Yorkshire and Cleveland Railway Act, 1858, c. 134. s. 25., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the North-Eastern Company. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by shareholders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
Redditch Railway Act, 1858, c. 137. s. 26., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Midland Company. Agreement limited to ten years, to be assented to by the share holders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
Stokes Bay Railway and Pier Act, 1858, c. 50. s. 10., &c — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the London and South-Western Company. Agreement limited to 10 years; to be assented to by the shareholders of both Companies, and approved of by the Board of Trade.
Symington, Biggar and Broughton Railway Act, 1858, c. 15. s. 46., &c. — The Act confirms an agreement for ten years, already entered into by the Company with the Caledonian Company, and provides that during the present or any future agreement, the tolls and charges shall be those contained in the Caledonian Railway Act 1845. The agreement may be renewed with assent of shareholders and approval of the Board of Trade.
Ulverstone and Lancaster Bailway Act, 1858, c. 98. s. 42., &c. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Furness Company. Agreement to be assented to by the shareholders of both Companies, and to be approved of by the Board of Trade, and to be subject, at the end of every ten years, to be modified in such manner as the Board may consider necessary for the public interests.
Victoria Station and Pimlico Railway, Act 1858, c. 118. — Provides that a traffic agreement may be made with the Brighton Company, the Crystal Palace Railway Company, and the East Kent Company, or any one or more of them. Agreement to be assented to by the shareholders, and approved of by the Board of Trade, and to be subject, at the end of every ten years, to such revision as the Board of Trade may consider necessary. In the schedule to the Act is set out an agreement between the Company and the East Kent Company. The Act defines the west end traffic of the East Kent Company therein referred to to be traffic for which the Company’s intended station will, as regards its situation, afford convenient accommodation for the western parts of the Metropolis, and the words “West End of the Metropolis,” in the said agreement, to be that portion of the Metropolis which may be conveniently accommodated by the said station. Any dispute with reference to the matters contained in the above provision is to be determined by the Board of Trade, or its arbitrator, or as to the rate of payment per passenger to be made by the East Kent Company being unreasonable, is to be determined by the Board of Trade, or its arbitrator, if the same be not settled by the Companies themselves.
Miscellaneous.
North British Railway Consolidation Act, 1858. — Provides that certain portions of the authorized railway belonging to the Company are to be abandoned, and the Company are to make compensation to the owners of certain private roads, and to the trustees or surveyors of public roads, for the maintenance of bridges or tunnels erected by the Company under or over those roads, except when such bridges or tunnels shall, with the permission of the Board of Trade, be removed by the Company, and the roads restored to the satisfaction of the Board; sect. 48.
Appointment of Arbitrator.
Dublin and Meath Railway Act, 1858. — The Act appoints (section 25) an arbitrator in the case of certain lands required by the Company, and provides in a certain event that the Board of Trade shall appoint an arbitrator in the matter.
Manchester, South Junction, and Altrincham Railway Act, No. 2. — This is an Act to improve the management of the Manchester, South Junction, and Altrincham Railway. It enacts that the chairman of the Company shall not, in the case of an equality of votes at any meeting of the Board, have, in addition to his original vote, a casting vote; and that the London and North-Western Company and the Sheffield Company shall, in the month of December in every year, appoint an arbitrator, whose duty it will be to attend any meeting of the South Junction Board, if required so to do, and to decide upon any matter affecting the undertaking of the South Junction Company, on which there shall be an equality of votes, and which may be referred to him under the provisions of the Act. In case the Companies do not concur in the appointment of the arbitrator, upon the requisition in writing of either of them, the Board of Trade shall appoint the arbitrator.
Appendix 2
Several railway-related acts were passed in 1858 in the UK, focusing on specific company incorporations, extensions, and operational regulations.
Key examples, not referred to by Caplan, include the East Suffolk Railway Act and acts incorporating lines like the Symington, Biggar and Broughton Railway. These acts enabled the expansion of the UK rail network and facilitated improvements in infrastructure.
Numerous other local and private acts were passed, such as the Edinburgh and Glasgow and Stirling and Dunfermline Railways Act 1858 and the Staines, Wokingham and Woking Railway Act 1858.
The East Suffolk Railway Act 1858 provided regulations for connecting with other lines (such as the Lowestoft Railway) and required matters of dispute to be settled by the Board of Trade.
The Severn Valley Railway Extension Act extended the time allowed for completion of the railway.
There were some Indian Railway Acts as well. For example: the Great Southern of India Railway Company was formally established in 1858 to facilitate railway development in India. The Government of India Act 1858, while not exclusively a railway Act, transferred control of Indian territories (and their developing railway systems) from the East India Company to the British Crown.
The featured image for this article is a photograph of the first ,’corridor’ mail train leaving Dar es Salaam in 1922.The locomotive is No. 1098 ex NGSR of India (later a TR NZ Class Locomotive), the carriages are from the former German Tanganjika-Express. The standard consist for the train during the German era was: 1 No. Postwagen (mail); 1 No. Packwagen (van); 1 No. Boy-Wagen (CC? for servants); 1 No. Küchenwagen (kitchen); 1 No. Speisewagen (dining-car); 2 No. Schlafwagen (AA sections, AAB sleeping-compartments). Under German control carriages were of varnished teak. Later Tanganyika Railways, carriages maroon/cream, then East African Railways, then Tanzania Railways. [1: p182][3]
The civil administration after the first world war was set up in Wilhelmstal In the Usambara hills. Wilhlemstal was renamed Lushoto. The location was inconvenient to say the least. “Lushoto was far from the Central Railway, communications were slow and irregular, and supervision of the outlying districts was necessarily sketchy. The sailings of ships between Tanga and Dar es Salaam were so haphazard that it often took six or seven weeks for the civil administration at Lushoto to receive a reply by letter from the military authorities in Dar es Salaam.” [1: p174]
Hill tells us that, “The Administrator had only accepted the extended responsibilities delimited by the Proclamation of 21st January 1918 [and additional areas included on 1st March 1918] on the understanding that the military authorities would release suitable accommodation in Dar es Salaam to the civil government. This agreement was not kept, and the civil administration remained at Lushoto until 12th February 1919, when its headquarters was transferred to Dar es Salaam. On 1st October 1918, the civil administration became responsible for the town of Dar es Salaam, and on 1st January 1919, for the districts of Lindi and Songea. On 31st January 1919, a Royal Commission appointed Sir Horace Byatt to be administrator of that part of German East Africa which was occupied by His Majesty’s Forces.” [1: p174]
Hill continues: “As a result of the Treaty of Peace with Germany, signed on 28th June 1919, Germany renounced, in favour of the Principal Allied and Associated Powers, all her rights over German East Africa. The Allied and Associated Powers then agreed – in conformity with Article 22, Part 1 (Covenant of the League of Nations) of the Treaty of Peace – that His Britannic Majesty should exercise a mandate to administer that part of German East Africa which became known as the Tanganyika Territory. On 22nd July 1920, the Tanganyika Order in Council constituted the office of Governor and Commander-in-Chief, and on 5th August, Sir Horace Byatt was appointed Governor.” [1: p174]
“The Belgians were still administering the Kigoma district, the northern part of the Ufipa district and Biharamulo. These areas were handed over by the Belgians on 22nd March 1921, and there remained to be settled only the delimitation of the Anglo-Belgian boundary on the border of Ruanda-Urundi. The boundary originally drawn by the joint Commissioners provided a corridor for the possible construction of a railway connecting Tanganyika and Uganda, along the West side of the Kagera River. The line so drawn placed a small part of the Kingdom of Ruanda, known as the Lukira sub-district, in British territory. After joint Belgian and British representations to the Permanent Mandates Commission of the League of Nations, the midstream of the Kagera became the boundary between Tanganyika and Ruanda-Urundi. The Lukira sub-district was handed over to the Belgians in the December of 1923.” [1: p174-175]
“At first the administration of occupied enemy territory had to be on a provisional basis. German ordinances and regulations were followed unless they were repugnant to British law. Until the enactment of a Courts Ordinance in 1920 political officers exercised the judicial powers conferred on them by the Commander-in-Chief. The German methods of administration were not greatly changed, and in the coastal districts political officers continued to rule through the Liwalis, [2] Akidas [2] and Jumbes. Unless they had shown anti-British sympathies, the African civil servants of the German administration were retained in the service of the new Government.” [1: p175]
Hill tells us that, “the recruitment of the staff required to administer a huge territory in the aftermath of a terrible war proved exceedingly difficult.” [1: p175] The official report states that “No sweeping measures [were] taken to dispense with the Akidas, [2] but though they remain[ed], their status [had] been radically altered. Their privileges [were] curtailed, their powers of punishment [were] taken away, and they [were] being closely supervised. When vacancies [occurred], the wishes of the people as to a successor [were] ascertained and, if possible, a local man of influence [was] selected in preference to an alien. Every endeavour [was] made to restore the old tribal organisations, and it [was] hoped that in course of time the German conception of the Akida system [2] [would] cease to exist, even though the name may remain.” [1: p175]
“A census-taken in the April of 1921 – returned the population of Tanganyika as 4,107,000 Africans, 2,447 Europeans, 9,411 Indians, 4,782 Arabs and Baluchis and 798 Goans. Of the Europeans, 1,598 were British subjects, including 300 settlers from South Africa, and 300 were Greeks. The rest were Poles, Italians, Czechoslovaks, Swiss, Dutch, Belgians, French and Americans. With one or two exceptions all the Germans formerly resident in German East Africa were repatriated.” [1: p176]
“A Treasury was established at Lushoto towards the end of 1916, and on 1st January 1917, the accounting operations of all political officers in the northern area were transferred from military to civil control. In the March of 1918 the accounts of the political officers in the central area and on 1st January 1919, of the Songea and Lindi districts were also transferred.” [1: p176]
“On 1st February 1919, the civil administration became responsible for the cost of the peacetime garrison of three battalions of the King’s African Rifles and on 1st April, for the cost of maintaining the railway. In the early years the revenue collected was adequate to meet the cost of the limited form of administration, but as its responsibilities expanded expenditure rapidly increased.” [1: p176]
One of the first purchases in 1916 was a series of four locomotives which were later to be known as the NZ Class. These were first purchased for the Nizam’s Guaranteed State Railway (NGSR) in India. They were built by Naysmith Wilson in 1915 and were commandeered to assist in the invasion of German East Africa in March 1916. Initially they carried their original NGSR numbering (NGSR 1095-1098). [9: p40] The numbering was adapted to include the letters ‘TR’ (TR 1095-8) and as such the locomotives were in service for many years. Finally, in the early 1930s, they were re-classified NZ, for Nizam, and renumbered 200-03. These locomotives had a long and distinguished career, remaining in service until after the amalgamation in 1948, when they became EAR 2201-4. [9: p54]
An NZ Class 4-8-0 locomotive in the later EAR livery – after the 1948 amalgamation. These locomotives became Class 22 locomotives under EAR control. This particular locomotive is EAR No. 2217, (c) Public Domain. [8]
Hill provides figures for revenue and expenditure of the administration in the years to 31st March 1920:
Revenue 1916/1917: £128,622
Revenue 1917/1918: £336,446
Revenue 1918/1919: £461,842
Revenue 1919/1920: £669,097
Total Revenue: £1,586,007
Expenditure 1916/1917: £35,116
Expenditure 1917/1918: £157,285
Expenditure 1918/1919: £383,097
Expenditure 1919/1920: £790,026
Total Expenditure: £1,366,524
Surplus balance 31st March 1920: £230,483
As can be seen from the figures, 1919/1920 was the first year in which expenditure exceeded income. Expenditure from this time on was only going to increase.
Hill tells the story of the transition, outlining the move away from the German rupee. In 1921, the East African shilling became the standard coin in Tanganyika territory. He notes particular problems with shipping in the years after the cessation of hostilities. Delays also occurred in liquidation of the various German estates in the territory meaning grievous setbacks in the economic output of the territory.
Hill tells us that, “When the civil administration assumed responsibility for the Tanganyika Railways on 1st April 1919, an immense task of repair and reorganisation had to be tackled and the prospect of the railway system paying its way was dubious and remote. The Northern line [the Usambarabahn ](351.7 kms.), henceforth known as the Tanga Railway, had been severely damaged by the Germans. All ten of the major bridges, with aggregate spans of 260 metres, and 23 minor bridges, with aggregate spans of 160 metres, were blown up: most of the water tanks and pumps were destroyed; 30 miles of track were picked up and thrown into the bush, and 60 sets of points and crossings were damaged.” [1: p179]
“The Voi-Kahe line (149 kms.) lay mainly within Kenya. It was essentially a military railway built for purposes very different from the working of open-line traffic on a commercial basis.
On the Central line (1,244 kms.) most of the damage was between Dar es Salaam and Dodoma. The retreating Germans blew up 92 major bridges with aggregate spans of 2,200 metres and 14 minor bridges; more than 100 sets of points and crossings were destroyed, and most of the watering stations were damaged.
Hill tells us that “The advice of Lieut.-Colonel Hammond and of Mr. Gillman was set aside, and the General Manager, Lieut.-Colonel G. Maxwell, apparently changed his mind. In 1923, a scheme was submitted to the Governor for the construction of a line along the old German formation, from Tabora to Kahama, where it could collect traffic from the Kahama and Shinyanga districts. The contract for the construction of this section was let on 23rd February 1925, and railhead reached Isaka in 1926. Progress had been seriously checked by exceptionally heavy rains – 20 inches of rain fell in the last fortnight of November – but the first half of the eventual Mwanza line was a very cheap addition of 197 kilometres to the railway system. The first 120 kilometres, on the well-built German formation, with all the culverts and nearly all the bridges complete and in a remarkably sound state of repair after ten years of neglect, involved comparatively little work. Moreover, the light track lifted from the Central line between Dar es Salaam and Morogoro was sufficient for 160 kilometres of the Mwanza line. The total cost of the line from Mwanza to Shinyanga was, therefore, only £262,577, or about £1.335 per kilometre.” [1: p207-208]
As Hill recounted previously (recorded in the first of these articles) [4] temporary repairs were soon effected to the Tanga line and it was opened for through traffic by August 1916. The Central Line was working again by February 1917.
Nevertheless, the physical damage done to the lines was by no means made good while they were under military control. “The maintenance of the permanent way and of buildings was only undertaken in so far as it was necessary, The civil administration, therefore, had to repair the deterioration and destruction of the war, to sort out the consequent confusion and to build up an organisation suitable for peace conditions. The task was not aided by the failure to appoint a substantive General Manager until late in 1920, … nor by the fact that the section of the Central Railway from Tabora to Kigoma was not handed over by the Belgians until April 1921.” [1: p180]
Hill continues: “The administration also took over the Sigi narrow-gauge line (23 kms.), the Shume ropeway, both of which fed the Tanga line and had been little damaged by the Germans, and the Lindi narrow-gauge line (60 cms.). During the last two phases of the East African campaign three lines were built to carry supplies to the forces. From the Central line a branch, 25 kilometres long, was built from Dodoma towards the Great Ruaha, but the rails were soon picked up as they were needed elsewhere. A short tramline in-land from Kilwa was also soon picked up. The Lindi line originally ran from Mingoyo to Mtua. It was later extended for about 4 miles down the creek towards Lindi and then from Mtua through Ndanda to Masasi, giving a total length of about 90 miles. The rails varied in weight from 12 lb. to 20 lb. to the lineal yard, and the steepest grade was 1 in 50 up from the coast and 1 in 33 down to the coast. At first neither the Shume ropeway nor the Lindi line was operated. On the Lindi line there were sufficient tractors and wagons to run a service if the track were repaired.” [1: p180]
“On both the Tanga and the Central Railways permanent repairs were started in 1919. On the Tanga line it was possible to postpone the repairs to a few bridges, as the temporary structures were sound enough to last for at least another year. In fact, several lasted for many years. The permanent repairs to both lines, with the exception of several bridges, were completed by the end of 1922. During 1919 and 1920 the permanent way was maintained in fair order, but stretches near the coast still showed signs of the long neglect during the years of war. Fortunately, the good design and construction of much of the permanent way enabled it to withstand the ravages of neglect better than had been expected. A great deal of bush clearing had to be undertaken. During the war, the bush had been allowed to encroach towards the track, thereby threatening the telegraph lines and blocking the line of vision from the footplates of engines.” [1: p180-181]
A significant programme of repairs to station buildings and staff quarters was also required. “These buildings were generally of a high standard of construction, considerably superior to those on the Uganda Railway – but maintenance and repairs had been neglected for years. A lack of funds and technical supervision made it impossible to tackle more than the most urgent repairs. The Germans only provided quarters for the European staff of the railways and left many of the Asian and all the African staff to fend for themselves. An official report for 1920 stated: ‘The state of the quarters for the Asian clerical staff and artisans, as well as for the African permanent labour, is far from satisfactory, although everything possible has been done within the narrow limits of the available funds. The question of permanent structures to take the place of wattle and daub will soon become very urgent‘.” [1: p181]
Early in April 1919 and “again a year later the Buiko-Lembeni section of the Tanga Railway and 48 kilometres of the Voi-Kahe line were damaged by flood water. There were a few major and a large number of minor breaches and wash-aways. An official report stated: ‘These sudden floods are due to cloudbursts in the mountains adjoining the dry and desert-like plains and are likely to occur regularly at the beginning of each rainy season. As the banks are generally low, serious damage or prolonged delay to traffic on the main line need not be anticipated. But if the Voi-Kahe line is to be kept open, a large number of culverts under the high banks will have to be built to avoid long delays to traffic‘.” [1: p181]
“Towards the end of April 1919, a more serious flood occurred west of Kidete station on the Central Railway. Nearly four kilometres of the line were under water and for six weeks not a single vehicle was able to travel over this section of the line. That capricious old lady, Mother Africa, then went from one extreme to another, from flood to drought. Another factor which adversely affected traffic on the Central line during 1919 was a famine which afflicted a large part of central Tanganyika. The removal of foodstuffs from the famine-stricken area, which stretched for about 340 kilometres along the railway, was prohibited for the greater part of the year. The loss of down traffic was largely compensated for by the up traffic of foodstuffs dispatched from Dar es Salaam for the relief of the famine. These factors made it very difficult for the Railway Administration to estimate the probable traffic in a more normal year.” [1: p181]
An official report stated: “Traffic on the Central line is confined to a few stations, the majority not even paying the wages of the staff, and the country for the most part appearing unproductive. As many stations as possible have been closed and only those kept open which are necessary to avoid excessive runs and to provide crossing places. There are 36 stations open and 18 closed. …. The Tanga Railway has had longer to recover from the war than the Central line, and is fortunate in the hinterland as far as Buiko, practically all the stations up to this point showing good results. The principal traffics are sisal, hides, cotton, coffee, fruit and grains, and there is a heavy passenger traffic. Some falling off may appear owing to lack of shipping and the high rate of exchange, although this section of the line is very promising and serves a fertile country. With the exception of Moshi the remainder of the line is unremunerative as it runs through desert country. The Voi-Kahe Railway is also unremunerative, though most of the traffic from Moshi finds its way to Kilindini, and will probably continue to do so, as Kilindini, apart from being slightly nearer to Moshi than Tanga, provides a good wharf, cranage and, most important of all, shipping. A comparison of the receipts for the nine months ended 31st December 1919, for the 175 kilometres, Tanga to Buiko, and the remaining 308 kilometres, is interesting. Tanga to Buiko Rs. 287,995; Buiko to Voi Rs. 77,194, of which Moshi contributed Rs. 49,356 and Voi Rs. 17,508. There are 21 stations on the Tanga line, eight on the Voi-Kahe line, and one on the Sigi line.” [1: p181-182]
“On the Central line the Tanganyika Railways inherited from the Germans 20 German goods engines (2-8-0 type) of which six were derelict; 22 German tank engines (2-8-0 type) of which six were derelict; two German tank engines (0-8-2 type); seven German Mallet engines (0-4-4-0 type), of which two were derelict and five were laid up, and six German shunting tank engines (0-4-0 type). In addition there were nine engines of British manufacture which had been brought over from India during the war. Four of them were G-class (Indian) ABR engines (4-8-0 type); one was an F-class (Indian) (0-6-0 type) and four were G-class (Indian) Nizam engines (4-8-0 type). In 1922 the four G-class ABR engines and the F-class engine were packed for return to India. The German goods engines, with bogie tenders, were capable of pulling a maximum load of 16 four-wheeled vehicles over all sections of the line. The German tank engines had less tractive effort and less boiler capacity, and they were only suitable for use on the plateau to the east and west of Tabora. It was estimated that the locomotive stock was sufficient to work one train each way per day between Dar es Salaam and Tabora. By the end of 1921 one passenger train and one goods train ran once a week in each direction between Dar es Salaam and Kigoma, and a mixed train ran once a week in each direction between Dar es Salaam and Tabora. In addition a water train ran once a week along the length of the line. It was also estimated, with unwarranted optimism, that the German goods engines would last for another twelve years, the tank engines for ten years, and that new engines would not be required until and unless the traffic increased to more than a train a day between Dar es Salaam and Tabora, in addition to fuel and construction trains.” [1: p182]
“On the Tanga line the Tanganyika Railways acquired only seven German engines. Three were German goods engines (2-8-0 type), three were German tank engines (2-8-0 type), of which one was laid up, and one was a German Mallet-class engine which was also laid up. There were also 15 engines of British manufacture brought over from India. Twelve were F-class (Indian) engines (0-6-0 type), of which two were laid up, and three were M-class (Indian) engines (2-6-0 type), of which two were laid up. There was also a B-class (2-6-0 type) engine and a shunting tank engine (2-4-0 type) on loan from the Uganda Railway. The latter was laid up and condemned. There were two small engines on the Sigi line.” [1: p183]
“The F-class (Indian) engines were of an obsolete type and it was estimated that none of them would last for more than three years. The three German goods engines and the three German tank engines were the only engines on the line capable of coping with a full traffic load. The light rail on the coastal section, between Tanga and Mombo, made it necessary to station the lighter engines at Tanga. In consequence the load out of Tanga was limited to eight vehicles.” [1: p183]
“On both the Central and the Tanga lines a deal of money was spent on reconditioning the German engines. None of them was really satisfactory and all were scrapped as soon as money was available to buy new British engines.” [1: p183]
“On the Central line the total numbers of vehicles was 465 and on the Tanga and Voi-Kahe line 365. During 1919 and 1920 an exceptionally heavy burden was carried by the carriage and wagon repair shops at Tabora, Dar es Salaam and Tanga. In all, they dealt with 620 units, of which 30 were completely rebuilt, 400 underwent heavy repairs and 190 light repairs. Particular attention was paid to the repair and maintenance of the vacuum brakes, many units being completely fitted and others fitted with piping only. In the Tabora shops the difficulty of this work was increased by a lack of inspection kits. On the Tanga line there was a shortage of rolling stock and there were no fly-proof trucks for the carriage of livestock through the belts infested by tsetse. The work in the erecting shops at Dar es Salaam, Tabora and Tanga was also very heavy. The number of engines that could be accommodated at the same time was five in the Tabora shops, two in the Dar es Salaam shops and three in the Tanga shops. The engine pits were commodious, but suffered from the use of a girdered screw-jack arrangement to lift the engines, which took a great deal more time than would have been required if overhead cranes had been available.” [1: p183]
The British tariffs, “first started on the Tanga line in 1916, was completed during 1920. The regulations were much the same as those of the Uganda Railway and the rates were similar to those charged by the Germans.” [1: p183]
The official report stated: “The German tariff was a well-thought-out book and appears to be suited to the country. Owing to the existing unsettled state of the Territory, the shortage of shipping and the fluctuating state of the market, it did not, and does not yet, appear advisable to make any change. For instance, it would be impossible to apply the usual theory for the formation of rates and follow, through all the phases of a changeable market, the price of sisal, cotton, mica, etc., raising the rates as the prices go up and lowering them when the price falls. … Although not easily of comparison owing to the fact that a telescopic scale exists on the Tanganyika Railways, and a flat rate on the Uganda Railway, rates here are higher than those on the Uganda Railway. The Uganda Railway has over thirty special rates applicable to various commodities between certain stations or groups of stations. The railways in Tanganyika have no special rates, but reduce by one class for certain heavy loading traffics in wagon loads.” [1: p183-184]
Hill continues: “The passenger fares on the Tanganyika Railways were generally lower than on the Uganda Railway, but coaching stock was so short in Tanganyika that there was often only one vehicle of a certain class on a train. There was no prospect of raising fares until a better and more comfortable service could be provided to the public. The German passenger stock was not divided into compartments. The seating was sometimes arranged with a centre gangway and sometimes with a side corridor. Lighting was generally by acetylene or oil-burning lamps. These coaches were renovated, divided into compartments and fitted with electric light.” [1: p184]
“The dockyard at Dar es Salaam was the only one of its kind on the east coast of Africa between Suez and Durban and capable of undertaking any ordinary floating repairs to ships. In 1920, a marine boiler from the ‘Fifi’, now [in 1957] a launch on Lake Tanganyika, was completely rebuilt; a 120-ton lighter was replated and redecked; all the pontoons and cargo landing stages at Dar es Salaam were renovated; steam-tugs and motor-launches were reconditioned; cranes and winches were overhauled, and much work was done on the Government’s coastal steamer, ‘Lord Milner’, and the Lake tug ‘Mwanza‘.” [1: p184]
During the year ended 31st March 1920, imports into Tanganyika were valued at Rs. 17,376,045, of which nearly half were cotton-piece goods. Domestic exports were valued at Rs. 19,940,156 and re-exports at Rs. 1,445,912. Of the domestic exports 16,744 tons of sisal accounted for Rs. 6,543,372; 3,944 tons of hides for Rs. 3,407,010; 3,926 tons of coffee for Rs. 2,807,605; 5,330 tons of copra for Rs. 1,581,461, and 741 tons of cotton for Rs. 935,009. In common with Kenya and Uganda, Tanganyika was hard hit by the post-war slump. In the following year the value of the import trade decreased by £308,000 and the value of the export trade by £784,000.” [1: p184]
“The financial results of the Tanganyika Railways for the first three years of working under British civil administration were stated to be a loss of nearly £175,000 in 1920, of nearly £189,000 in 1921 and of over £191,000 in 1922. The real loss was considerably greater for those figures were struck without any provision for interest or renewals charges.” [1: p184]
It is small wonder that the General Manager wrote of the Central line: “This railway was undoubtedly built for reasons other than purely trade and, now that it has been built, the best has to be made of a line passing through largely undeveloped country …” [1: p184-185]
Officially published results were:
1919 to 1920
Working expenses £278,591
Gross receipts £103,778
Operating Loss. £174,813
1920 to 1921
Working expenses £346,300
Gross receipts £157,393
Operating Loss. £188,907
1921 to 1922
Working expenses £387,819
Gross receipts £196,682
Operating Loss. £191,137
Towards the end of 1920, the Secretary of State for the Colonies appointed Lieutenant Colonel F.D. Hammond to:
(1) report on the possibility of improvement in all departments of the railway systems of Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika.
(2) preside at the meetings of an inter-Colonial Council to consider the relations of Kenya and Uganda in regard to railway work.
(3) advise on railway rates ‘on the understanding that in future net receipts from the systems are to be regarded as available for betterment purposes and new construction only, and that rates are therefore to be kept as low as possible’.
(4) investigate the position with regard to the Voi-Kahe Military Railway, and to advise (a) whether the track should be bought from the War Office, and, if so, (b) whether the line should be maintained as the route from Moshi to Mombasa, the upper section of the Tanga-Kahe line being abandoned; or (c) whether the track should be used for improving the Tanga-Moshi Railway, Tanga still being regarded as the port for the Moshi area.
(5) advise on railway extension generally regarding Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika as a single whole from the point of view of railway and harbour development.
Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s report was published in the November of 1921 [5] and, in so far as the Central Railway was concerned, it was a depressing document. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond wrote:
“The present state of the accounts and the uncertainty of the amount which will have to be paid to the Military Administration make it impossible close review of the financial situation. to enter into any
“The outstanding feature is that the revenue falls far short of what is required to meet actual working expenses exclusive of renewals or loan charges.
“The loan charges on the railways are fortunately very light, because the only ones which will have to be met are those on the equipment and stores handed over by the Military Administration, and none will have to be paid on the cost of original construction. The railways may also be called on to pay interest on the funds provided to cover the deficit on working.
“The deficit on working for 1921-1922 is estimated to be at least £200,000; it is not possible to expect that such a sum can be covered by the economies or recommendations proposed in this Report. The cause of this heavy loss is to be found in the very poor traffic which the two railways are carrying, while the expenses of maintaining a system of 1,747 kilometres (1,092 miles) long are bound to remain high, however reduced the service may be. Although the present depression, of course, is responsible to a certain extent, a return of normal markets could not be expected to right matters.
“In the case of the Central Railway, the German Administration showed a profit on working prior to the war, but this was due solely to the heavy construction traffic which was being carried. The construction of the main line was only completed in 1914, and by that time the construction of the branch northwards from Tabora had already been begun, and platelaying had commenced. Full credit was given to open lines for the carriage of the large quantities of construction material required, and the revenue thus obtained was the only reason why the Administration was able to show a profit on working the main line. Without this revenue there would have been a heavy loss, though how far it is impossible in the absence of accurate figures to state.
“The reason for the poor traffic return is not difficult to find; leaving aside the first 280 kilometres of the coastal zone, where the traffic prospects are good, the Central Railway, for the remaining 960 kilometres of its length, passes through country of which, excluding the salt works at Usoki, only 120 kilometres, or approximately one-eighth, can be considered as possible of producing a paying traffic. It is impossible to expect any railway to pay under such geographical conditions, and the prospect of deficits for many years to come will have to be faced.
“The chief hope of turning those deficits into profits, or at any rate of reducing them, lies in the development of the basin of Lake Tanganyika and the trade with the Congo.
“The opening up of the mineral deposits which are known to exist would have the same effect, but until some more definite information as regards the extent and quality of the latter is obtainable, it would be unwise to indulge in any anticipations regarding the traffic.” [1: p186]
When Hammond turns his attention to the Tanga Line, he is less pessimistic:
“The prospects on the Tanga line are brighter; this railway has already carried a paying traffic over the first 130 kilometres to Mombo. Over the next 45 kilometres to Buiko, development had been commenced by the Germans, and this section would probably have already reached the remunerative stage had it not been for the war. Unfortunately, as a result of the war, and the delay in the liquidation of enemy properties, the cultivated areas have reverted to a condition where it is probably harder to clear and replant than in the case of virgin land. It is estimated locally that this section of 175 kilometres will take five to seven years to reach its pre-war output, but there is no doubt that it will eventually once again be a paying proposition throughout its length.” [1: p187]
The British authorities had been negotiating with the Belgian Government to allow a Belgian enclave at each of Dar es Salaam and Kigoma. It was the Belgian authority’s intention to export significant goods along the Central Railway in Tanganyika and they had agreed a right to use their own wagons on the line, provided they met the Railway Administration’s regulations regarding weight, dimensions and brakes. Hammond noted the Belgian Government’s intention to spend £20,000,000 on infrastructure project in the Congo. He considered that it would not be to the advantage of the Central Railway to have foreign trucks on its line. He then wrote:
“The best course for the Tanganyika Railways to pursue would be to get into touch with the Belgian authorities and to obtain from them a definite guarantee of a certain tonnage, if possible covering the whole period of the Belgian development programme. On the strength of this the General Manager can calculate what additional trucks and locomotives he will require. If the programme only extends over a short period, such as three or four years, it might be found that the net profits accruing would not profit the railway for the purchase of the stock.” [1: p187]
Hammond also noted that “when the Tabora-Kigoma section of the Central Railway was handed over by the Belgians in the April of 1921, both the track and the equipment were in bad condition. Of the 13 engines taken over from the Belgians, five were only fit for scrap and the rest were in need of extensive heavy repairs. In some of the engines there were 12 inches of sediment in the water space.” [1: p187]
Hill continues: “Of the 40 engines on the Central line which were in the possession of the Railway Administration before taking over the Tabora-Kigoma section, 29 were in fair running condition at the time of Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s inspection, eight were under repair and three were waiting repair. He recommended that the 24 engines which were in the best condition and of the most suitable type should be selected for the current work of the railway; and that the remaining engines should be laid up and not repaired until a prospect of increasing traffic warranted the use of more than 24 engines. In this way the expense of repairing the engines surplus to the traffic would be deferred until there was some prospect of them being used. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond recommended that the same policy be applied to the repair of wagons.” [1: p188]
“Although the bulk of the skilled labour employed both in the running and the workshop departments of the Locomotive Department was Asian, there had been a marked decrease due to the difficulty of obtaining suitable drivers and artisans from India. This was partly due to the bad reputation which the climate of East Africa, particularly of Dar es Salaam, had earned in India during the war, and also to the bad quarters provided in Dar es Salaam. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond urged that £22,000 be spent on the provision of suitable housing for 124 Asian employees at Dar es Salaam. He considered that the Indian staff were distinctly inferior in quality and that, in consequence, the problem of training Africans was urgent. ‘The Tanganyika Railways,’ he wrote, ‘have been assisted in this by the legacy of the German policy, under which considerable progress had been made in training the natives, although no definite scheme appears to have been in force‘.” [1: p188]
Hill continues: ,”Already a good proportion of the engine-drivers on the Tanganyika Railways were Africans. The whole of the skilled labour in the moulding shops at Dar es Salaam, including the charge-hands, were Africans. The tools in the saw-mills were practically all run by Africans. The carriage fitting was done entirely by Africans, under the supervision of a European. At Tanga, the whole of the new carpentry work, some of it requiring a high standard of skill, was done by Africans under the supervision of a Japanese charge-hand. With the full support of the General Manager, Lieut.-Colonel Hammond recommended that the training of Africans be put on a proper basis as soon as possible and that the establishment of foremen and charge-hands be increased to 15 in order to provide for instructors of African trainees.” [1: p188]
“Many of the typists employed in the head offices were also Africans, and Lieut.-Colonel Hammond noted that in any scheme for the training of Africans for a career on the railways it was essential that “undue importance should not be attached to clerical as opposed to manual skill.” He considered that the wage of eight florins per month, plus rations, paid to unskilled native labour was higher than was warranted either by the cost of living or by the general state of the labour market, and that a reduction of at least three florins a month was possible and should be extended to all Government Departments.” [1: p188-189]
Hill tells us that, “during the military administration of the railways, stores were obtained through the agency of the War Office. Whereas accurate quantity ledgers were kept by the Stores Department, no attempt was made to keep priced ledgers. A stock of German stores also remained. Departments held large stocks at places like Tabora which they had obtained from the Stores Department, but for which they kept no ledgers, and also stocks of German stores. Scattered up and down the line were stores, such as rails and girders, the surplus of the materials required to repair the damage done by the Germans which had never been collected. After the civil administration had taken over the railways, representatives of the War Office made lists of the stores remaining on the system and drew up a valuation of £595,000, including the Voi-Kahe military railway which was valued at £161,000. The General Manager disputed these valuations and submitted his own figure of £283,000 for all the stores, exclusive of the Voi-Kahe line, which the War Office representatives valued at £434,000. This was one of several long and prolonged arguments concerning the finances of the Tanganyika Railways. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond stated that it was not clear whether the railways were definitely committed to take over all the stores left by the military administration or not. He considered that if they were so committed allowance should be made in the price for taking over in bulk and for stores of no use or surplus to present needs. If there were no commitment, he considered that the railways should only accept such stores as could eventually be used and the price paid for any stores surplus to requirements should take into consideration the interest charges which would accrue until the stores were used.” [1: p189]
Hill continues: “The most controversial item of Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s terms of reference was that concerning the Voi-Kahe Railway. He pointed out that it had been built as a military line and had been badly aligned and graded. If it were to be retained, he considered that it should be realigned direct from Taveta to Moshi, in order to tap the southern slopes of Kilimanjaro, at an estimated cost of £360,000. On the coastal section of the Tanga line there were 57 miles of 31-lb. rail which could only carry the lighter engines and limited the load out of Tanga. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond estimated that it would cost £300,000 to relay the coastal section with heavier track. If the Voi-Kahe line were picked up and the materials used to relay the coastal section the cost would be about £100,000. A third alternative was to pick up the 57 miles of the Moshi-Buiko section of the Tanga line and use it to relay the coastal section, at an estimated cost of £55,000. On Lieut,-Colonel Hammond’s figures, which later proved to be far too high, the cost of retaining the Voi-Kahe line and of relaying the coastal section of the Tanga line would be £415,000 apart from the sum required to buy the Voi- Kahe line from the War Office. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s recommendations were largely influenced by the expenditure of £1,000,000 on the deep-water wharves at Kilindini. To use the Tanga route as the outlet for the Kilimanjaro traffic, he wrote, would entail the development of two deep-water ports within 70 miles of each other, and the chief purpose of the second port, Tanga, would be merely to tap an area which could be equally well served by Kilindini. In fact, to pull up the Voi-Kahe line might suit the immediate need of the Tanganyika treasury, but it would be detrimental to wider interests. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond was not impressed by the argument that as Tanganyika was a mandated territory it would be wrong to pull up any railway within its borders and so cause a divergence of traffic through a British Colony. The upper section of the Tanga line was unlikely to produce a remunerative traffic for ten years or more and, due to a lack of water, it might never do so. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond recommended that the last 94 kilometres of the Tanga line, between Same and Moshi, be picked up and used for the betterment of the coastal section and that the Voi-Kahe line be retained, re-graded and realigned. He considered that the cost of the reconstruction of the Voi-Kahe line should fall upon Tanganyika as the chief benefactor, and he devised a financial arrangement whereby the Territory would bear all loss and collect all profit derived from the line.” [1: p189-190]
Hill continues: “Early in 1923 the Colonial Office decided to reject Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s advice and to accept the view of Sir Horace Byatt, the Governor of Tanganyika, that to subordinate the interests of the port of Tanga to the interests of Kilindini would be contrary to the spirit of the Mandate. In consequence Sir Horace argued that Tanga should be developed into a modern and well-equipped port. Mr. C. L. N. Felling-later Sir Christian Felling-who had just been appointed General Manager of the Uganda Railway at once lodged an emphatic protest against a policy of developing three major ports, Kilindini, Tanga and Dar es Salaam, on the East African coast. He maintained that the sound policy was to concentrate on the development of Kilindini and Dar es Salaam. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond had made precisely the same point. ‘This necessity for concentrating on a few ports,’ he wrote, ‘and spending all the money available on them is the principal reason for my recommendation that the area around Moshi and Arusha and their hinterland should evacuate its products via Kilindini instead of via Tanga.’ It was ridiculous, Mr. Felling argued, to regard Kenya and Tanganyika as rivals. They should be regarded as partners, and the sound policy was to establish a joint control of the two railway systems under a Governor-General. Mr. Felling was one of the first civil servants to realise the grave disadvantage of the lack of an East African authority to co-ordinate the economic policy of Taganyika, Kenya and Uganda. Mr Felling’s protest was of no avail, and the Voi-Kahe line was closed to traffic on 19th April 1923, by Order of the Colonial Office. [1: p190-191]
This was not the last word on the matter. Hill describes the political manoeuvres which eventually saw the line retained. The Government of Kenya bought the line for £70,000 and in the end reconditioning was undertaken for only £30,000 and the line was open to traffic once again by 4th February 1924. It soon paid its way!
Hill comments that there could be no doubt that “the decision to maintain the Voi-Kahe line was right, certainly from wide and long-range points of view. Nevertheless, the fact that the Uganda Railway owned and worked the line proved a persistent source of irritation to the Tanganyika Railways until the two systems were amalgamated in 1948 and any question of competition was thereby eliminated. Meanwhile, in 1925 the Traffic Manager of the Tanganyika Railways complained that the Uganda Railway took about 75 per cent. of the outward traffic from Moshi and about 30 per cent. of the inward traffic.” [1: p191]
Hill tells us that in the same year the General Manager of the Tanganyika Railways wrote that “the Uganda Railway working into Moshi has resulted in this railway having to keep open and work 178 kilometres of line (Buiko-Moshi) to share in a traffic which would be small for one railway and which is insignificant for two.” [1: p191]
Hill says that “there were many such complaints during the twenty-five years (1923-1948) needed to bring about the amalgamation of the two systems, which was the only sound solution of this and of several other economic problems.” [1: p191]
Hill was, of course writing from the perspective of the British Colonial authorities. Had he been able to look forward to the probable arrangements made as countries were granted independence, his reflections might have been different. The EAR struggled to continue as an effective organisation working for three different governments and eventually closed in the late 1970s.
Hammond also had something to say about freight charges. As far as low value products were concerned, such as groundnuts from Tabora, he recommended that lower rates in accord with those that The Uganda Railway was charging would be appropriate. He also advised the reclassification of certain imported goods – notably agricultural and industrial machinery, paints and petrol, which should be lowered, and rice, tea, tobacco, cotton-piece goods and matches which should be raised to a higher classification. He reviewed rates across the network recommending that where alternative routes existed, parity in charges was important. He wrote:
“The Uganda and the Tanganyika Railways at the present time both serve the area lying between Mwanza and Tabora, and in the future, if a steamer service on Lake Tanganyika is developed, the central regions of Urundi may quite possibly be able to export either via Victoria Nyanza or Lake Tanganyika. Any attempt at competition between the two systems for such traffic could not be permitted; the managements must arrange to balance their rates at these points in such a manner that the traffic will go to whichever of the two systems is most conveniently placed to the point of production, and so give the produce the easiest and cheapest route to the sea. In the case of Mwanza this would affect indirectly the rates from other ports on Victoria Nyanza, and in the case of Tabora any intermediate stations to Dar es Salaam which handle the same commodities. It is, therefore, of great importance that the two General Managers should consult each other and come to a mutual agreement before the introduction of any rates affecting these particular areas.’” [1: p192]
Hill continues: “Turning to the future development of the Tanganyika Railways, Lieut.-Colonel Hammond considered that an extension of the Moshi-Voi branch towards Arusha must wait until the Tanganyika Government was in a position to bear the initial losses. He did, however, recommend that the extension to the Sanya river, laid and picked up during the war, be relaid on the grounds that trade from the Arusha area was handicapped by having to pass through a narrow belt of tsetse-fly between Moshi and the Sanya. In consequence the cost of animal-drawn transport was as high as Florins 4.50 per 50 lb. It was a strange argument, as it presupposed that a railway was the only alternative to ox- or mule-drawn wagons. Lorries are no less immune to tsetse than a train.” [1: p192]
“Lieut.-Colonel Hammond estimated that the cost of reconstruction of the Sanya river extension would be £7,600, including the carriage of materials. He pointed out that the quantity of spare permanent-way material left by the military authorities on the Tanga line was far in excess of maintenance needs and that the surplus was sufficient to relay the 25 kilometres that had been picked up. Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s advice was accepted and, in this instance, it was unfortunate. The Sanya branch which took off the Tanga line 10 kilometres south of Moshi and climbed a lava ridge at the foot of Kilimanjaro to reach the Sanya plain, was built at a cost of £26,000. Construction started towards the end of 1923, and the line was open to traffic by the following December. It was badly aligned, built of indifferent materials, and it brought very little traffic to the main line. Only a year later it was decided to build another line from Moshi to Arusha. The survey, which started in the April of 1926 and was completed October, only needed to re-establish on the ground the good alignment staked out by the Germans in 1912. It was obvious that the first part of the Sanya extension could not be retained. It was scrapped and the new line branched off at Moshi and joined the Sanya line at Km. 13. Construction started in the November of 1927, and it did not progress as rapidly as had been expected largely due to the contractors’ inability to recruit sufficient satisfactory labour. Tengeru, the main station for the coffee estates on the lower slopes of Mount Meru, was opened for traffic in the November of 1928, and the whole line was formally opened by the Governor, Sir Donald Cameron, in the December of 1930. This extension of the Tanga line by 86 kilometres from Moshi to Arusha cost £316,000, or approximately £3,700 per kilometre. The track laid weighed 45 lb. per lineal yard, and the main difficulty was the bridging of several deep gorges along the skirts of Mount Kilimanjaro and Mount Meru.” [1: p192-193]
“In common with the Germans, Lieut.-Colonel Hammond was convinced that the chief hope of the Central Railway must be centred on Lake Tanganyika and the Congo traffic. He pointed out that if supplemented by a service on the Lake the Central Railway was the natural and shortest route to the north-eastern part of Rhodesia and that Abercorn was only 15 miles from the Lake. He urged that the Graf von Goetzen be salved and refitted for passenger and cargo work at an estimated cost of £35,000, and that the Marine Service be amalgamated with the railways. In the absence of any proper motive for competition with the Uganda Railway, Lieut.-Colonel Hammond noted that there was no good reason for building the Ruanda Railway, started by the Germans in 1914, from Tabora to the elbow of the Kagera river. In 1915 the Germans planned to build a branch from Isaka, on the Ruanda Railway, to Mwanza. The object of these lines was to tap the rich districts of Ruanda and Urundi and to divert this traffic and the traffic of the Mwanza district from the Marine Department of the Uganda Railways.” [1: p193]
Hammond also made a considerable number of recommendations for the improvement of the efficiency of the several departments of the Tanganyika Railways. The General Manager’s Annual Report for the year 1922 stated that “practically all the local suggestions made by Lieut.-Colonel F. D. Hammond have been adopted with considerable benefit.” [1: p193]
Deficits and Profits
Hill turns to the matter of the viability of the Tangayika Railways. He first focussed on the matter of what should be the liability of the Tanganyika Government for the capital cost of the the network. On 1st April 1919, Hill notes that the lines in Tanganyika were valued at:
Central Railway: £4,015,000
Tanga Railway: £880,000
Lindi Railway: £11,400 (this proved to be a bad investment)
Sigi Railway: NIL (no appreciable value)
He notes that the issues surrounding the northern line (Tanga Railway) were clear – that it was covered by the Treaty of Versailles and was the property of the Tanganyika Government. It was not as simple as this for the Central Railway.
Hill notes that for a payment of £33,994, Tanganyika Railways acquired assets with a capital value of (£4,015,000 + £880,000 =) £4,895,000. He comments, however, that “on paper this was an advantageous position, but in practice it proved exceedingly difficult to set the railways on a sound financial basis.” [1: p195]
The Lindi Tramway
“The Lindi tramway, acquired for £11,400, in poor state of repair, proved a bad bargain. A great disadvantage was that the terminus at the coast was not at Lindi but high up the creek. In consequence, goods had to travel by dhow or lighter between the terminus and Lindi port, whereas produce carried by porters went straight to Lindi. Inevitably, the existence of the tramway provoked demands, by commercial interests and administrators alike, that it be used for the evacuation of the produce from a hinterland of which the potential output was exaggerated. In 1922 the line was opened from May until October. The ‘tractors’ used were, in fact, Ford cars on railway wheels and they had been hard worked during the war. The traffic was disappointing and operating costs were not met. It was again opened during the harvest season of 1923 with no better result. Between the September of 1924 and the February of 1925 the tramway made a profit of £1,450, but there was still a net loss of £3,000 on these seasons. At this stage there was a long investigation on the advisability of reconditioning the tramway at an estimated cost of £100,000, but the plan was eventually set aside. From September 1926 until 1929 the tramway was run by the District Commissioner with manpower. At the high transport rate of 80 cents for the ton-kilometre, the tramway made a profit of about £1,000 for the first two years, but thereafter, even on a basis of manpower and high rates, further losses were incurred. The tramway was not operated in 1930 and in 1932 the track was sold cheaply to sisal planters.” [1: p195] It is possible that the prior existence of this tramway provoked interest in replacing it with a metre-gauge line after WW2. At the very least there must have been something in the collective memory of traders and Government officials which resulted in a later metre-gauge line being proposed.
The Sigi Tramway
“The Sigi tramway, which was mainly used to transport timber from the Sigi Saw-mills to Tengeni on the Tanga line was operated until the July of 1923 when it was closed down. This tramway could not be made to pay unless it carried a quantity of timber greater than the railway’s need, and there was no other market available. The track was also sold to sisal planters, and much of the well-graded formation was later converted into the main road to the East African Agricultural Station at Amani.” [1: p195]
The Wider Network
During the first four years of British rule there were serious deficits on the budgets of the Territory and the railways. For the year ended 31st March 1920, the revenue of Tanganyika was £669,097; for the following year it was £946,844, and for the year ended 31st March 1922, it was £978,192. Expenditure increased far more rapidly than the revenue. For the year ended 31st March 1920, expenditure was £790,026. In the following year it was £1,389,354, and for the year ended 31st March 1922, it was £1,807,890. Then the rise of expenditure was checked.
“For the year ended 31st March 1923, it was £1,811,872 and in the following year £1,901,158. Revenue amounted to £1,228,586 for the year ended 31st March 1923, and to £1,315,188 in the following year. Apart from free grants amounting to £408,169 in 1921 and 1922, the financial assistance received from the Imperial Exchequer was in the form of repayable loans. By 31st March 1924, the total of loans received was £2,385,891, of which £1,726,653 had been spent. It was arranged that interest should only be paid on that part of the loan expenditure devoted to revenue-earning works, such as capital expenditure on the railways and the electric power station at Dar es Salaam.” [1: p196]
Hill tells us that as “the ravage of war was repaired, the Territory’s exports increased year by year. In 1913, 20,834 tons of sisal were exported from German East Africa. In 1921 the exports of sisal from Tanganyika were 7,923 tons; by 1924 they had risen to 18,428 tons worth £644,835, and by 1926 to 25,022 tons worth £911,293. In 1913 the Germans exported 8,961 tons of groundnuts. The export of groundnuts from Tanganyika in 1921 was 8,448 tons; in 1924 it was 18,684 tons valued at £359,918, and in 1926 it was 15,867 tons valued at £254,903. Other exports in 1924 were 2,541 tons of cotton worth £373,753 and 5,261 tons of coffee worth £352,529. In 1926, 6,539 tons of cotton worth £427,437 and 6,539 tons of coffee worth £495,199 were exported.” [1: p195]
“In 1922, approval was given for a loan of £250,000 for capital expenditure on the railways. From now on there was a considerable investment in the two railways, mainly directed to reducing the deficits which were the main feature of the railways accounts until an operating profit of £3,261 was made during the year ended 31st March 1926. By then capital expenditure amounted to £610,107 on the Central Railway and to £184,905 on the Tanga Railway, a total of £795,012. At the same date the Deficiency Account stood at £786,498, of which £475,689 was debited to the Central Railway and £310,809 to the Tanga Railway. From the Imperial Treasury the railways had received free grants of £478,158, of which £126,462 was for capital expenditure and £351,696 was to meet the deficits for the years 1919-1920 and 1920-1921. In addition, the railways had raised repayable loans of £1,342,534 involving an interest burden of £46,446 a year. Of this sum £893,028 had been borrowed for capital expenditure and £449,506 to meet the deficiency in working.” [1: p196]
As well as the manifest difficulties associated with a railway built primarily through very scarcely populated territory which would not support revenue raising activity, the railway was contending, firstly, with “the poor condition of the locomotives, rolling stock and equipment which made operating costs unduly high in relation to the volume of traffic. Secondly, the deterioration during and immediately after the war of most of the German plantations took longer to repair than had been expected; it was several years before the output of plantation crops was restored to the pre-war level. Thirdly, the available traffic lacked balance: in the post-war years the down-traffic far exceeded the up-traffic and there was a lot of light and empty running up the line.” [1: p197]
“The fact that the capital of the territory, Dar es Salaam, was at the coast, that it was the hub of commerce as well as the centre of Government, tended to increase the disbalance of traffic. There was no town of any size in the hinterland to which imports flowed from the coast-nothing comparable, for instance, with Nairobi or Kampala, which provided the Uganda Railway with a considerable up-traffic. The fourth reason was that the German tariff at first regarded as ‘a well thought-out book’ and ‘suited to the country’ with the few amendments made to it after the war was unsatisfactory and out of accord with operating costs. A new tariff was devised during 1922, but its introduction was delayed, as it had to be sent to England for printing, and it was not introduced until the January of 1924. By the end of that year it was clear that the new tariff had brought satisfactory results, although the rate for sisal had proved to be too low and it had to be raised. In 1924 there was also an increase of the up-traffic, more especially in respect of machinery and cement, which suggested that development would bring greater traffic to the railways in later years.” [1: p197]
The deficits of the early years, coupled with the age-old tendency to over-estimate the potential output from Africa colonies, set the pattern of railway policy. In general terms the policy was:
(a) To increase traffic by building branch lines into potentially productive areas. The outlook is well illustrated by an extract from a ‘Memorandum on Railways’ written by the Governor, Sir Donald Cameron, in the October of 1925: “If a railway may not be built in tropical Africa because there is doubt whether it will pay, the whole of its working expenses and debt charges within such a brief period as five years, little, if any, railway expansion can take place in this Territory … and it is reasonably certain that if additional railway facilities are provided, considerable development may be expected with consequent benefit to the revenue indirectly.” [1: p197]
(b) To reduce working expenses as far as possible.
(c) To re-equip the two railways with satisfactory locomotives and rolling stock and to relay the sections of the line which were in need of heavier track so that an increase of traffic could be carried at less working cost.
Hill continues “The first 38 miles of the Central line out of Dar es Salaam were relaid with new 55-lb. British standard track in 1923 and the relaying of the line from Dar es Salaam to Morogoro was completed in 1926. In 1929 and 1930, a considerable length of the Tanga line was relaid with new 45-lb. British standard track. The onset of the world slump then checked progress, but a further length of the light German track was strengthened by the insertion of two additional sleepers in each length of rail. Due to the mistakes of the German surveyors and engineers, it seemed probable that the line from Mombo to Tanga would always be the most unsatisfactory section of the Tanganyika Railways.” [1: p198]
The DL Class 4-8-0 locomotives were the first British locomotives to be built for the Tanganyika Railways They went into service in 1923. The DL class locos were later known as the EAR 23 class. Their design was derived from the Nigerian Railways Emir class. The six members of the class were built by Beyer, Peacock & Co. in Gorton, Manchester. (c) EAR&H. [1:p297][6]
In 1923, six new 4-8-0 tender, super-heated engines of the DL class were imported from Great Britain and put into service on the Central line, together with 21 bogie wagons of 25 tons. New brake vans and passenger coaches were near completion in the workshops. Shortly afterwards four German tank engines were transferred from the Central to the Tanga line. In his annual report for the year 1923, Mr. K. C. Strahan, the Chief Mechanical Engineer, wrote:
“The arrival of the new engines has meant redistribution of the engine power: two of the DL engines are working on the Dar es Salaam section and four on the Dodoma section. … The position on the Tanga line is as before, except that the engines are twelve months older. The situation will be improved by the transfer of the four G.T. engines, and some relief on this account is in sight. During the year, unceasing attention has been necessary to keep the obsolete F-class 0-6-0 tender engines on the active list, and it is again pointed out that in running these engines with bearings below condemning size in several cases, considerable responsibility has been taken. The excessive repairs have resulted in proportionately heavy expenditure, for whereas on the Central line the maintenance of the stock costs 79 cents per kilometre, on the Tanga line the figure is Sh. 1.05 per kilometre.
“The supply of power on the Central line during the harvest season of the past year was equal to demands, and with the increased loads taken by the DL class (37.5 per cent. greater than the other 4-8-0 engines), there is now a small reserve. The average number of engines in traffic will probably be 32 after redistribution has taken place, but the average hauling capacity is increased.
“On the Tanga line there was unavoidable difficulty in dealing with rushes of traffic, as power is largely dependent on the unreliable F-class engines, but the trial mileage run shows a decrease. The necessity of putting two engines on every train out of Tanga with more than seven vehicles on it is most wasteful, but could not be avoided owing to the condition of the engines.” [1: p198-199]
Hill says that “The new 4-8-0 engines were the first locomotives in Tanganyika to use superheated steam and they proved very reliable and economical in service. As traffic increased, it proved more and more difficult, and finally impossible, to obtain reliable service from the old German engines. In 1926, eleven new Mikado engines (2-8-2) were imported from Great Britain. Two new shunting engines were imported in 1927 and seven more in 1929.” [1: p199]
An MK Class 2-8-2 Locomotive. These ‘Mikado’ locos went into service in circa 1926. The eleven members of the class were built by Vulcan Foundry, in Newton-le-Willows, Lancashire, (c) EAR&H. [1: p299][7]Hill describes this loco as a G Class 4-8-0 Locomotive. These locos were purchased for service on the Tanga Line and the Mwanza branch of the Central Line in 1928, (c) EAR&H. [1: p299]
R. Ramaer says that the four locomotives known as the NZ Class (Nizam) locomotives from India acted “as the prototype for the TR’s own G class, a very similar unsuperheated, slide-valve engine, thirteen of which were supplied by Stephenson and Nasmyth Wilson and put in service in 1928-31. They were again closely similar to the original BESA-designed 4-8-0s for India and thus provide, as the last 4-8-0s built for the TR, a direct link with the first engines of this wheel arrangement to see service in this part of the world. The first eight were supplied to the Tanga Line in 1928 and released F class engines 96 and 720, which had become very expensive to maintain. One of the new Gs, unassisted, could handle the mail trains, a marked improvement over the old and obsolete six-coupled engines. The G had an axle load of only 8-8½ tons, a necessity on the light track of the Tanga Line. The reason for their obsolete concept is not quite clear, however, if we remember that these engines were built at the same time as the KUR EA class Mikados. Their original running numbers 20-32 were later changed to 204-16, as the locomotives were considered to be direct descendants of the NZ class locomotives 200-3. After the amalgamation in 1948 the G class engines were renumbered 2205-17 and gradually taken out of service.” [9: p58]
“In 1929, two Sentinel rail cars were put into service between Moshi and Arusha. Although they were appreciated by the travelling public, they failed to attract sufficient traffic to make them an economic proposition on this section of the line. At the same time a Sentinel shunting engine was also acquired. This was a small unit incorporating a high-speed steam engine and geared drive. It was so successful that a further seven Sentinel shunting engines were ordered, and put into service in 1931. They proved satisfactory and economical shunting engines at smaller stations on both the Tanga and the Central lines. In the February of 1930 two Sentinel coaches were put into service between Tanga and Korogwe to carry passengers and a limited amount of luggage. In the July of 1931 these coaches had to be withdrawn, as it was suspected that the axle-load was proving too heavy for the light track.” [1: p199]
A Sentinel Railcar at work on the Tanga Railway. [1: p198]
Hill continues: “In German times, and during the first five years of the British Administration, firewood was the only fuel used on both the Central and the Tanga lines. By 1923, along several sections of the railways, the timber conveniently close to the line had been cut down, and the fuel contractors were forced to work farther and farther afield at ever-increasing cost. In 1923, it was decided to experiment with the use of coal, and trial consignments were ordered from South Africa and the Belgian Congo, the experiments were carried out in 1924. The South African coal was satisfactory but the dirt content of the Congo coal was too high. By 1925, coal was being used by all engines running near the coast where a supply of wood fuel was most difficult to obtain. By 1930, coal was used by all engines on the Tanga line and by engines on the Central line running between Dar es Salaam and Dodoma. Around Tabora, firewood was still comparatively plentiful, and it was used as fuel between Dodoma and Kigoma for several years to come.” [1: p199]
A Garratt Locomotive being refuelled at Tanga. Note the narrow gauge cauldrons carrying coal in the foreground which were crained up over the locomotive tender for emptying. [1: p198]
On 1st June 1923, the Railways Administration became responsible for the marine service on Lake Tanganyika. Hill spends a few pages describing the salvage operations and the return to service of the Graf von Goetzen which was still lying on the Lake bed in shallow water, it was renamed Liemba when recommissioned. The tug Mwanza was still out of commission in 1923 but also returned to revenue-earning service. Hill notes that by 1929 receipts were greater than working costs for the services on Lake Tanganyika. This improvement was short-lived.
Early in British rule, the sea-ports of Tanganyika were run by a separate department if the Colonial Government. Hill says that, ” This arrangement did not prove satisfactory, and on 1st November 1925, the Port and Marine Department was absorbed by the railways, which then became known as The Tanganyika Railways and Marine. “All the shore working of the ports was taken over by the Traffic Department and the Railway’s Marine Department was responsible for the handling of ships in port, for the operation and maintenance of navigational aids along the coast of Tanganyika and for the dockyard at Dar es Salaam.” [1: p205]
£32,000 was spent on heavy repairs to the wharf at Tanga and £302,000 on the expansion of facilities at Dar es Salaam.
“In 1925, the total number of ships calling at Tanganyika ports was 975, with an aggregate of 1,853,140 tons. By 1930, the number of ships calling had risen to 1,318, with an aggregate of 2,892,145 tons. In the year ended 31st March 1930, Dar es Salaam port handled 157,356 tons of imports and 81,186 tons of exports. In that year Tanga port handled 56,182 tons of imports and 71,434 tons of exports. As the finances of the ports were not separated from those of the railways until 1939, there is no means of telling how the ports fared financially during the first twenty years of British administration. The lack of comment in official reports on the finances of the ports during the years when the railways were in a bad way suggests that the ports at least paid their way.” [1: p205]
“Towards the end of 1923 the Government’s steamship ‘Lord Milner’ was found to be unseaworthy. In order to maintain the navigational aids along the coast, the railways acquired the steamship ‘Azania’, built by Ferguson Bros. of Glasgow for £27,000. She was a vessel of 375 gross tons, with a draft of 9 feet, a cruising speed of 8 knots and a cargo capacity of 180 tons. The ‘Azania’, which was also equipped for the use of the Governor on journeys up and down the coast, was successfully employed on the maintenance of the navigational aids of the coast until after the Second World War.” [1: p205]
“In pursuit of the policy to increase the railways’ traffic by building branch lines to potentially productive areas, one of the first projects to be examined was the German design for a line from Tabora to Mwanza on Lake Victoria. This was the project that Lieut.-Colonel Hammond had opposed. In 1922, Mr. C. Gillman, then a District Engineer, wrote a most interesting report on railway development in Tanganyika. Mr. Gillman joined the staff of Philip Holzmann & Co., the contractors for the construction of the Central Railway, in 1905 as an Assistant Engineer. At the outbreak of war he was interned by the Germans, but in 1916 he was released and received a commission in the Railways Corps of the British expeditionary force. In 1919, Mr. Gillman joined the Railways’ Administration as a District Engineer. In 1928, he became Chief Engineer; for a year – in 1935 and 1936, between the terms of office of Lieut.-Colonel G. Maxwell and Mr. R. E. Robins – he acted as General Manager and he retired towards the end of 1937. Thereafter, for three years, he was Water Consultant to the Government of Tanganyika. For more than thirty-two years Mr. Gillman was closely concerned with the vicissitudes of the railways in Tanganyika and he was appointed a C.B.E. in recognition of his services. A man of strong opinions, he was often at logger-heads with the policy of his superiors and, at times, he was prone to overstate his case. Nevertheless, he was a remarkable character, although his writings suggest that he was not always an easy character to deal with or to work with. Be that as it may, on several important issues the march of events proved that Mr. Gillman’s judgement was sometimes sounder than that of others who had a greater say in the moulding of railway policy in Tanganyika. Nevertheless, he was not always right, and some of his writings also suggest that he made good use of the advantage of hindsight.” [1: p206]
For Tanganyika Notes and Records of June 1942, Mr. Gillman wrote a brief history of the Tanganyika Railways, in the course of which he referred to Lieut.-Colonel Hammond’s recommendations for the future extension of the railways. Mr. Gillman wrote:
“I had been asked to give my own views on railway extensions which I did in a lengthy report submitted early in 1922 and based on intensive studies of all the accumulated material left by the Germans, as well as on such personal knowledge of the country as I possessed. Full of youthful enthusiasm, backed – perhaps unavoidably – by my chief’s pushful energy; without, as was inevitable at the time, any realisation of the great advances to be made during the next ten to fifteen years with efficient motor transport; and, above all, lacking an intimate appreciation of large parts of the Territory and, therefore, considerably misled by the optimism of our predecessors, I was no doubt optimistic myself – though not entirely void of guarded cautiousness when I drew up the following ‘likely programme for railway development during the next thirty to fifty years’:
“(1) A southern railway from Ngerengere to Amelia Bay (Manda) on Lake Nyasa, to be built with as little delay as possible to the upper reaches of the Kilombero plain, the upper division to follow as need arises.
“(2) Simultaneously, a ‘Rift Valley Railway’ as a physical link between the two existing separate systems, should be taken in hand, the Moshi-Arusha section at once and further sections in yearly instalments, construction being pushed in both directions from Arusha and Dodoma.
“(3) Then the following feeder lines, as the future development of the country may require, in what looked like a reasonable order of urgency: Upper Kilombero to Ubena, Dodoma to Iringa, Kimamba to Tuliani, Mwanza to Kahama (note the place in the order and the insistence on building south from Mwanza) eventually to be continued to Tabora; and Ruiga Bay, a little south of Bukoba, to the Kagera river.
“The report wound up by strongly pleading for a far-seeing policy of extensive railway reconnaissance surveys in order ‘to make the choice of the most economical alignments possible when the time arrives for construction, and thus to avoid the usual gross mistakes, the inevitable consequences of decisions based on hurried surveys, and entailing not only wasteful construction but also, and much more serious, because accumulating, waste in working.’
“These recommendations found the full approval of the General Manager who, more particularly, re-emphasised the fact that the Tanganyika Territory part of the Lake Victoria basin was already served by the Uganda Railway.” [1: p206-207]
Meanwhile, the East Africa Commission, consisting of the Hon. W. Ormsby-Gore, M.P. (Conservative), Major A. G. Church, D.S.O., M.C., M.P. (Labour), and Mr. F. C. Linfield, J.P., M.P. (Liberal), had visited Tanganyika from September 22nd to October sth. They travelled up the Central line to Tabora and thence by car to Mwanza: in November they returned for five days and visited Arusha, Moshi and Tanga.
In so far as the railways were concerned, the main conclusion of the Commission’s report to the Secretary of State for the Colonies, published on 17th April 1925, was that:
“The further economic development of both native and non-native production in East Africa is dependent on the early provision of increased transport facilities and, in particular, on new railway construction.” [1: p208]
The Commission expressed these views on the development of the railway system of Tanganyika:
“The Central line was completed to Lake Tanganyika just before the war, and it is clear that the principal considerations before the German Government in pushing for-ward this single line without feeders were:
“(1) Strategic;
“(2) In order to secure at the earliest possible moment a share of the important mineral traffic from the eastern Congo.
“It was clearly their expectation that, once the Central line had been completed, its commercial value would depend on the further construction of the necessary feeder railways and roads. The German Government had already nearly completed the earth-work of the first branch line northwards from Tabora into the populous areas to the north, and had intended to extend this northern spur:
“(1) In the direction of Bukoba-Ruanda;
“(2) To Mwanza.
“This last project had been decided upon after very careful surveys had been made by the Germans as to the possibilities of extending the Tanga line from Moshi to Lake Victoria, but the extreme difficulty from an engineering point of view of crossing the Great Rift Valley and traversing a rocky volcanic crater country immediately to the west of it, as well as the practically uninhabited area through which such a railway would have to run, decided them to abandon such a project in favour of making Tabora the most important collecting junction on the Central line for the populous north-west.
“With regard to the great undeveloped southern area of the Territory, the Germans had considered possible lines from Lake Nyasa to the subsidiary port of Kilwa, but these, too, appear to have been abandoned in favour of the wiser policy of concentrating at the port of Dar es Salaam. The Germans had undertaken preliminary investigations for routes from Lake Nyasa to a point on the Central line. In our opinion, the whole question of the development of the south-western highlands, as well as the basin of Lake Nyasa, depends on the construction of such a line.
“The General Manager of the railways has gone into this question very carefully and has investigated possible alternative routes. We discussed this question very fully and considered all the data that [was] put before us, and our recommendation is that the line should be commenced at Ngerengere (Km. 145 of the Central Railway) and should proceed via Kisaki to Kidatu on the Great Ruaha river. This river, the only formidable one on the route, should be bridged at this point, and thence the railway should follow the left bank of the Kilombero river and thence by the Pitu Valley (a tributary of the Kilombero) to the Rutukira Valley, and thence from the confluence of the Rutukira and Ruhuhu to Manda (Wiedhafen) situated in the Amelia Bay on Lake Nyasa. This is the route recommended by the General Manager.
“The Kilombero Valley may be described as a great alluvial plain which could be turned into one of the finest cotton, sugar and rice producing areas in the world, and which by drainage and irrigation could eventually cover approximately 1,000 square miles.
“The Pitu Valley was described to us as very fertile and fairly well populated, and the centre of one of the richest potential grain districts of the country.
“The maximum elevation which such a railway would have to cross is on the divide between the Indian Ocean (Pitu Valley) and Lake Nyasa (Rutukira Valley), at an eleva-tion of 2,940 fect above sea-level. When one remembers that the Mau summit of the old Uganda line is over 8,000 feet above sea-level, and the summit of the new through line to Uganda (Uasin Gishu) is over 9,000 feet, the difficulties and consequently the cost of the proposed Lake Nyasa trunk line should be materially less than any other similar line hitherto constructed in East Africa.
“The total length from Ngerengere to Manda by the proposed route is just over 400 miles. It is the most considerable new construction which we recommend to you, and it would do more to open up and develop a vast new area of Africa than any other line which we can suggest. We recommend that you should invite the consent of the Treasury to an immediate survey and estimate of the cost of this line. We consider that this survey should be undertaken not merely from an engineering point of view, but also from an economic and administrative point of view, and that the survey party should be accompanied by a qualified agricultural officer who should report on the possible agricultural development of the different areas which the line would traverse, and on the means of access to it from the Iringa district.
“We advise this route, not only in the interests of the development of Tanganyika Territory, but also because it would provide the cheapest and quickest route and outlet for the northern half of Nyasaland and the eastern parts of North-eastern Rhodesia.
“We are satisfied that the other alternative route to Lake Nyasa via Dodoma, Iringa, Tukuyu to Mwaya (the port at the extreme north end of Lake Nyasa), although giving a more direct route to the south-western highlands of Tanganyika Territory, would be more expensive and more difficult. The eastern portions of these highlands could be connected by means of roads with our proposed line at different points in the Kilombero Valley, while the western portions in the neighbourhood of Tukuyu could use the excellent existing road from Tukuyu to Mwaya and lake transport from Mwaya to Manda. We wish this new trunk line to Lake Nyasa to be regarded as of primary importance.
“In our opinion the most urgent new railway construction is the completion of the Tabora-Kahama line (which will be open this year) to Mwanza. This line should, in our opinion, proceed from Kahama to Shinyanga and thence via Kuru (to the east of the existing Shinyanga-Mwanza road) to Mwanza. We are glad to learn that the portion from Kahama to Shinyanga has been sanctioned in principle. It should be pushed for-ward without delay.
“Shinyanga district is one of the richest, most densely populated and progressive native areas in the whole territory, while between Shinyanga and Mwanza lies a promising cotton area. Animal transport between Shinyanga and Tabora is out of the question on account of tsetse-fly. Fly again appears north of Shinyanga and between Shinyanga and the frontier of the Mwanza district. Motor transport is out of the question between either Shinyanga and Tabora or Shinyanga and Mwanza except during the dry months of the year.
“The total distance from Tabora to Mwanza by the route we propose is approximately 260 miles. Thus, leaving out the already sanctioned branch to Shinyanga, approximately 140 miles of new construction will have to be undertaken.
“A study of the map of East Africa makes it clear that sooner or later all the railway systems should be linked in physical connection in order to secure the maximum of economy in management and control. Instead of a series of separate managements, survey staffs and railway workshops, a single organisation would enable great economy to be effected in these matters, and salaries could be afforded that should enable the East African railway service to attract first-class men.
“We therefore considered how best such physical connection between the various railway systems could be effected, due regard being had to the need of opening up the greatest possible profitable area. We have come to the conclusion that these two desiderata would best be attained by a line connecting Moshi at the foot of Mount Kilimanjaro with Dodoma on the Tanganyika Central Railway, such a line passing through Arusha, Gwanzave (Ufiome district), Kondoa Irangi, to Dodoma. This would involve some 280 miles of new construction which could be begun from both ends simultaneously.
“In view of the existing physical connection between the Tanga line and the Uganda Railway by the existence of the Voi-Kahe branch, constructed as a military railway during the war, we recommend that the management and operation of the Tanga line should be transferred forthwith to the Uganda Railway. The Tanga line would remain in the ownership of the Tanganyika Government, and the terms on which the operation of the line would be taken over by the Uganda Railway should be the subject of joint recommendations to you by the High Commissioner for the Uganda Railway system and the Governor of Tanganyika Territory.
“We should like to suggest, however, that, in addition to the arrangements regarding finance, service and rates in connection with the proposed transfer of the Tanga line, the Government of Tanganyika Territory and the unofficial residents in Tanga district should have some representation on the new Inter-Colonial Board recently established in connection with the Uganda Railway, in order that the interests of Tanga shall be represented.
“We recommend that the extension from Sanya river, the present terminus to the west of Moshi, to Arusha should be approved and commenced as soon as possible.
“The three new railways which we recommend in this territory have an importance from a political and administrative point of view in addition to their economic value. Tanganyika Territory is geographically the centre of the group of British East African Dependencies, and if any advance is to be made in the direction of better co-ordination, effective means of communication with Nyasaland and Northern Rhodesia on the one hand and Uganda and Kenya on the other are essential. The railway programme we suggest takes this consideration into account.
“But, apart from external communication, the proposed development of the railway system is urgently required from an internal point of view. In our opinion, there has been a tendency to concentrate expenditure and interest in Dar es Salaam and the places which can be easily reached from Dar es Salaam by means of the Central Railway, with the result that both the northern and the southern areas of the territory have been comparatively neglected. In particular, Mwanza and Bukoba have suffered from shortage of staff in all departments and from lack of attention by the headquarter officers in Dar es Salaam, the main cause having been the difficulty of communications.
“The absence of railway or road communication between the Tanga-Moshi-Arusha area and the capital has led to an agitation started in the Arusha district for the transfer of the northern area of the territory to Kenya, with which it is linked by the Voi-Kahe railway and by means of the motor road from Nairobi to Arusha. In our opinion insufficient attention has been given to the important northern districts, and the feelings of the settlers in the northern areas are not without some cause. To this feeling have been added the fears and misunderstandings regarding Great Britain’s position as Mandatory. Arusha planters took the lead in this matter and they definitely urged annexation of their district by Kenya. They were at first supported by their colleagues in the Moshi district, but we gathered when at Moshi that opinions in this district had undergone considerable change. The non-native communities in Tanga expressed no desire for the proposed annexation. The natives were strongly opposed to it.
“We pointed out that annexation was out of the question without a revision of the terms of the Treaty of Versailles, and that, even if the administration of the northeastern highlands by the Government of Kenya were thought desirable on its merits, the area would remain mandated territory, subject to the conditions of the mandate. In that case an annual report would have to be rendered by the Governor of Kenya in the same manner as in the case of the British Mandated Territory of Togoland which is administered as part of the Gold Coast Colony. This would confer upon the Permanent Mandates Commission, and the Council of the League of Nations, the right to review and comment on all Kenya legislative or administrative action applied to the mandated area.
“We are, however, satisfied that the desire for the suggested transfer would disappear if the Arusha district were rendered more accessible from Dar es Salaam by the construction of further road and rail communications, and if greater attention and encouragement were given in future to the special needs of the district in such matters as coffee development and European education.
“The plains round Mount Kilimanjaro and Mount Meru are capable of considerable development by means of irrigation, the rainfall on the two mountains being high, and at present running very largely to waste. Such development would require considerable capital and non-native enterprise, but, if it were undertaken, large crops of irrigated cotton both native and non-native could be produced, and the most valuable and suitable arabica coffee area in the whole of East Africa considerably extended. On the actual mountains of Kilimanjaro and Meru there is already a large, in some places a congested, native population, and no further land can be alienated. But in the plains round the mountains, provided irrigation is carried out, further non-native settlement can safely be encouraged.
“To return to the question of communications, the Director of Public Works informed us that he regarded the country as being ‘starved for roads’. It is essential that in a country like Tanganyika Territory there should be a definite road policy. The department responsible should have the duty, not only of constructing and maintaining existing public roads and bridges, but also of drawing up, in consultation with the General Manager of Railways, the Agricultural Department and the Native Affairs Department, a programme of main and feeder roads to be carried out as and when money is available, either from loan funds or from current revenue. There should also be an annual report on roads.” [1: p208-212]
Hill tells us that of the lines recommended by the Commission two were quickly built – the Tanga line was extended to Arusha and the Tabora-Kahema line was extended to Mwanza. Both opened towards the end of the 1920s.
Hill says that “From 1925 onwards, the proposal to build a railway to the southern part of Tanganyika led to a long and complex controversy, notable for a welter of conflicting ideas. In 1925, a reconnaissance survey was carried out from Ngerengere, on the Central Railway, down to Tukuyu. In 1926, a further preliminary survey was run from Dodoma to the Ruaha river and thence to llongo, Kasale and Fife. In 1927, tacheometric surveys were run between Dodoma and Iringa and Unyika and the border. In the same year, a further reconnaissance survey was carried out between Unyika and Iringa and thence to Msagali. In 1928, a report and estimate on the line from Dodoma to Fife was submitted and, in 1929, the Chief Engineer, Mr. C. Gillman, prepared a comprehensive report on the project for a railway to the south. This report was strongly criticised by the European settlers who were concerned with the development of the southern highlands, an enterprise greatly encouraged by the support of Lord Delamere. Several of the lines surveyed ran along alignments which suited the interests of the European farming community, but they passed through very difficult country and would have been very expensive to construct and to operate. Mr. Gillman bluntly stated that a line from Dodoma to Fife could only be regarded, technically and economically, as an impossible proposition which could in no circumstances be recommended.” [1: p213]
“Shortly before the publication of Mr. Gillman’s report the committee appointed to submit proposals under the Imperial Colonial Development Act had unanimously recommended the immediate construction of a line from Kilosa to Ifakara on the Kilombero plain and of another line from Dodoma to Iringa. This committee also recommended a detailed survey from Iringa to llongo with a view to an early extension.” [1: p213-214]
In the autumn of 1929, Brigadier-General F. D. Hammond was again commissioned by the Secretary of State to report on the Tanganyika Railways. He arrived in Dar es Salaam on 1st September and left on 5th November. While he was in the Territory, the Governor, Sir Donald Cameron, asked him to express his views on Mr. Gillman’s report. In the summary of the conclusions of his report, Brigadier-General Hammond wrote:
“The question as to which route should be chosen for the Southern line has been clouded by the demand for a so-called ‘Imperial Link’ between the Tanganyika and Rhodesian Railway systems. No adequate justification, economic, administrative or strategic, for this ‘Link’ has been advanced. The phrase has not, however, been without its influence on the recommendations of the local Colonial Development Fund Committee. What is required in the interests of the Territory is the route which will open up best the huge undeveloped area lying to the south of the Central line, bearing in mind that some day it may be sound to extend it to join the neighbouring system. It is not disputed that the Dodoma-Iringa section will not be a paying proposition as a separate line, whereas the Kilosa-Ifakara section is one of the most promising in the country. To choose the Dodoma-Iringa-Fife route would mean giving to this, one of the least promising propositions, priority in capital and labour over all the other schemes and delaying all of them by four years. For these reasons I recommend the Kilosa-Ifakara-Mpanga-Fife route for the Southern line.” [1: p214]
In the July of 1930 Sir Donald Cameron appointed a Railway Commission under the chairmanship of Sir Sidney Henn. The Commission, which fairly represented all interests and travelled widely through the country, submitted its report in September 1930. The Commission recommended:
(1) The immediate construction of a railway from Kilosa to Ifakara.
(2) The construction of a railway from Dodoma to Ubena, “on the assumption that His Majesty’s Government will provide the capital free of interest for at least twenty years, as it is not anticipated that the railway will meet its expenses within that period or that Tanganyika Territory could undertake the burden of this development without serious detriment to other interests.” Sir Sidney Henn and Mr. M. P. Chitale dissented from the recommendation to build this line.
(3) The construction of a line from Kilosa or Kimamba to the neighbourhood of Korogwe or Mombo. The General Manager, Lieut.-Colonel G. Maxwell, dissented from this recommendation. [1: p214]
The Commission also recommended: the survey and construction of feeder roads as an essential part of railway construction; the building of better roads in the areas not served by railways; that careful attention be paid to the progress if experiments on road-trains; and that there be an early investigation of the problems of progress and irrigation in the Kilombero Valley.
The despatch to the UK of this report was written by Sir Donald Cameron. He supported the proposed line from Kilosa to Ifakara provided it could be demonstrated that it would be profitable within 5 years. He disappointed those arguing for a line into the southern highlands and closed down the possibility of a railway South from the Central line. In so doing, he brought an end to speculation about a possible link line into Northern Rhodesia.
However, it was clear that should a link be made with lines in Northern Rhodesia, then the question of gauge compatibility would become important. “Experiments were set in train to determine whether some adaptable form of track could be used in all future track laying. In 1928, trials of a new type of sleeper, known as the F type, which was adaptable to either of the gauges, were started. These experiments proved successful, and in 1929 it was decided to standardise the F type of sleeper for all new purchases of track. … A further tacheometric survey was run from Kilosa to Ifakara, but the onset of the Great Depression soon put an end to any further steps towards the building of the line. In 1933, a tacheometric survey between Kilosa and Korogwe closed the extensive series of surveys which had occupied the railways’ surveyors since 1924.” [1: p215]
Hill tells us that, “The extension of the Tanga Railway to Arusha inspired the settlers in the Upper Sanya and Ngare-Nairobi areas to press for a short branch line to their farms. The preliminary survey was not satisfactory, but a later tacheometric survey led to a strong recommendation that the branch be constructed. The proposal was supported by the Development Committee and by Brigadier-General Hammond. Construction of the line was approved and bridging and other materials were imported from England and carted to the site. In the February of 1931 construction started, but after some £10,000 had been spent the work was stopped, again due to the world depression.” [1: p215]
He continues: “In 1926 a preliminary survey for a branch line from Itigi, via Singida, to Mkalama was completed. It was not a good job, and early in the following year a second survey established that Manyoni was a more suitable junction for a line to the north. Also in 1927, a tacheometric survey from Manyoni to Mkalama was completed, and a rough reconnaissance was done on a line from Manyoni via Kondoa Irangi to Arusha. In 1928, the location survey started from Manyoni, and it was completed as far as Singida in 1929 and to Kinyangiri in 1930. It was estimated that the line would cost £557,000. In 1930, there was also a reconnaissance for lines from Singida to Arusha and from Dodoma to Arusha.” [1: p215-216]
“The General Manager wrote a most optimistic report of the economic prospect of the Manyoni-Kinyangiri branch which was also strongly supported by the Develop-ment Committee and by Brigadier-General Hammond. The General Manager predicted that the line would produce a revenue of from £50,000 to £70,000 a year after five years. The Governor was more cautious. He thought it preferable to postpone the scheme ‘if there is a prospect of a suitable road-unit being produced in a reasonable time’. Nevertheless, approval was given for the construction of the line. Work started in the September of 1931 and the rates quoted by the contractor, Mr. Yelitch, were a good deal less than those which had previously been paid. This was mainly due to the amount of cheap labour available as a consequence of the world depression which pressed hardly on Africans. The line was opened to Singida by the Governor, Sir Stewart Symes, on 31st July 1932, and railhead reached Kinyangiri early in 1933. Due to very heavy rains the last section of the line was not sufficiently consolidated to open for public traffic until 1st April 1934. It was a suitable day of the year, for the line was to prove an expensive and disastrous folly. The line was laid with new 45-lb. track, and the actual cost of the 150 kilometres was £537,000 or £3,700 per kilometre. No interest was payable on the capital for the first two years.” [1: p216]
Hill explains: “The Kinyangiri branch was built on the assumption that it would stimulate export traffic from the districts of Singida and Mkalama and thereby encourage imports of consumer goods. The pressure of population on the land of these districts was fairly heavy and the people owned large herds of cattle. Apart from the fact that any increase of exports required a change in the way of life of the people – away from a pastoral existence to the growing of crops – it was apparently overlooked that the climate, the soil and the lack of water supplies made any move towards more intensive agriculture virtually impossible. In fact, without a large investment in the better distribution of water supplies, there was no real prospect that the land could do more than provide a subsistence economy for the people.”
Against a predicted value of £50,000, the annual receipts of the Kinyangiri branch, were £5,000 in the first year, rising to £13,000 in 1935. The receipts for the next four years were:
1936 £15,000
1937 £19,500
1938 £10,200
1939 £13,100
The costs of maintaining and operating the branch were:
1935 £34,600
1939 £45,100
Hill says: “By then the operation of the Kinyangiri branch had resulted in a total deficit of £262,500, taking into account interest and renewals and allowing for the value of additional traffic brought to the main line. In fact, no payments to a renewals fund were made, so the actual loss to the railways, after payment of interest charges, was £205,500 by the end of 1939. Small wonder that the General Manager wrote in 1937: ‘It seems practically certain that the branch will remain a burden to the Territory until the debt has been amortised’.” [1: p217]
The branch line from Moshi to Arusha was also a disappointing venture from a financial point of view. “Taking into account all charges, including interest and renewals, and all receipts, including the value of additional traffic brought to the Tanga line, and compensation in respect of additional traffic carried by the Kenya and Uganda Railways, the deficit for 1931 was £22,900. This deficit fell, steadily but slowly, to £17,000 for 1939. By then the aggregate deficit was £194,200. As no contributions were, in fact, made to the renewals fund, the actual loss to the railways was £143,200.” [1: p217]
Hill says that, “It is clear that the building of these two branches was largely responsible for the financial difficulties of the Tanganyika Railways in the ‘thirties. It was unfortunate that no heed was paid to Brigadier-General Hammond’s contention that ‘when a new railway is built which it is estimated will not pay its way within five years, the Territory should bear all losses until it reaches the paying stage.’ This point was persistently stressed by Mr. R. E. Robins, who succeeded Lieut.-Colonel G. A. P. Maxwell as General Manager of the Tanganyika Railways on 15th May 1936.” [1: p217]
Hill provides a table showing profit and loss for the Tanganyika Railways in the late 1920s and early 1930s. …
In this table, the profit and loss is struck before making any contribution to a renewals fund for the replacement of wasting assets. The figures are gross, and they include such activities as electric power stations and the Nyanza Salt Works during the years when they were run by the railways. [1: p218]
Hill notes that, “The rapid increase of the railways’ gross receipts and operating profits during the years 1926-1930, the buoyancy of world markets and confidence in the expansion of Tanganyika’s economy, inspired a general spirit of optimism. Expansion was the mood of the day, and it was often based on premises which were inadequately examined. The railways’ policy of building branch lines, and of investing large sums in the equipment of the lines to carry the expected increase of traffic, was bound to lead to serious trouble if the upward trend of the economy were checked. Admittedly, none could have foreseen the plague of locusts which afflicted East Africa from 1938 to 1931, nor the years of drought which exacerbated the ravage of locusts, nor the sudden collapse of the New York stock market, in the autumn of 1929, which heralded the Great Depression. On the other hand, sounder judgement might well have avoided the major blunder of the Kinyangiri branch and the excessive reliance placed on the traffic of copper concentrate from the Belgian Congo.” [1: p 218-219]
In terms of weight, sisal provided the railways with the greatest volume of traffic, but as the plantations were nearly all in the coastal districts, the haul was short and the revenue proportionately less than the total tonnage suggested. From the point of view of revenue, the most valuable traffic to the railways was the copper concentrate, mined at Katanga in the Belgian Congo and exported via Kigoma and Dar es Salaam. It travelled the length of the Central line, and it contributed far more to the railways’ revenue than any other commodity. From 1923 to 1931 the rise in the copper traffic was spectacular:
Year ending 31st March 1924. …………. 4,434 tons
Year ending 31st March 1925. ………….. 8,739 tons
Year ending 31st March 1926. …………. 18,817 tons
Year ending 31st March 1927. …………. 16,632 tons
Year ending 31st March 1928. ………… 26,565 tons
Year ending 31st March 1929. ………… 29,997 tons
Year ending 31st March 1930. …………. 18,538 tons
Year ending 31st March 1931. ………….. 34,137 tons
Hill says that the Railways’ Administration “seem to have taken it for granted that the copper traffic would continue and to have overlooked two considerations. First, the ores of Katanga were low grade and, secondly, they were mined in the middle of Africa which meant high freight charges on the way to European markets. Whereas the Katanga mines could compete in the good years, they were amongst the first enterprises to feel the effect of the depression.” [1: p219]
For the year to 31st March 1932, the copper traffic was only 7,166 tons and by the October of 1931 it had ceased. The Belgian Congo then diverted almost all traffic to its own outlets on the West coast of Africa – Stanleyville and Matadi in preference to the Tanganyika Railways. There was also some reason to suspect that a more lenient method of assessing customs duty was applied to the west coast route. Hill comments that: “The disadvantage of the copper traffic had been that, except in the years 1925 to 1927 – when the Congo imported heavy railway material via the East Coast to hasten the completion of lines which would eventually compete with the Tanganyika Railways the down-traffic to Dar es Salaam was far greater than the up-traffic to Kigoma, In fact, the copper traffic involved a lot of light running and empty trains into Kigoma. Even so, the sudden and complete cessation of traffic was a severe setback to the Tanganyika Railways.” [1: p 219-220]
Flood water persistently assailed various sections of the permanent way in the rainy seasons. There was a severe shortage of water for locomotives during long seasons of dry weather. Hill’s own view, expressed in the late 1950s, was that these problems had still not been resolved.
Serious flooding problems required the raising of embankment levels across the Usinge swamp and the provision of culverts through the embankment. However, the most troublesome section of the line was between Kilosa and Dodoma, through the Mukondokwa Valley. In January 1930, major problems with flooding required a diversion of the line between Kms. 319 and 323 to the North and the continued repair of breeches to embankments elsewhere. A bridge, at Km. 342 was also washed away and proved difficult to repair. In March 1930, another washout occurred between Kms. 281 and 287 and the bridge at Km. 342 was again washed away. Further problems were experienced at the beginning of April 1930.
A major realignment project saw £257,000 spent on a new route higher up the valley slopes and when further flooding affected the Mukondokwa Valley in 1936, the railway was not affected. However, in 1937, the river rose once again and washed away the main railway bridge, with traffic stopped for a month.
Extensive minor wash-aways occurred annually throughout the whole system, including the Tanga line and the newly constructed Mwanza branch. “As early as 1926, it was clear that the cause of many of the wash-aways was that the bush covering of the slopes had been cleared and the land brought under cultivation.” [1: p222] Whilst not an example of climate change, this was an example of the way human action could be responsible for adverse effects on a local environment.
Hill continues: “The greater part of the country traversed by the Central line is arid and dries out almost completely for several months of the year. Most of the water points established by the Germans were derived from surface sources and there was barely enough water to suffice in the average year. In years of less than average rainfall there was a serious shortage. The depots at Dodoma and Tabora, where water was required for wash-outs and for shunting locomotives in addition to running trains, were in a particularly bad position and water had frequently to be railed in by train to supplement the meagre supply. The heavy draw-off of water from the stations with a fair supply to supplement those with a poor supply resulted in a shortage of water at all stations. In some years the overall position became extremely serious.” [1: p222-223]
“At Tabora an additional well was sunk in 1923, in the hope that more water would be found and in 1924 the well was deepened and lined. This was not successful and complaints of water shortage at Tabora were made each year. It was necessary to send Tabora locomotives to Malagarasi or Itigi for their wash-outs in the dry season. A plant was installed at Tabora to enable water used for washing out engines to be collected, purified and returned to circulation. This was a useful expedient but, in spite of it, the shortage continued. Eventually a deep boring plant was purchased and, in 1930, two deep boreholes were sunk at Tabora.” [1: p223]
“The situation at Dodoma was almost as difficult and from there locomotives had to be sent to Morogoro or to Kilosa for their wash-outs. The Germans had found insufficient surface water at Dodoma and had sunk a number of boreholes at the station which produced a barely sufficient quantity of water for railway purposes. The township at Dodoma was faced with an even more serious shortage of water than the railways, so the Public Works Department decided to construct a dam to impound and store flood water. In order to pay for this scheme, it was decided that the railway supply should be closed and the P.W.D. should supply both the railways and the township from their new dam. The dam was completed and brought into operation in 1930. In subsequent years the water in the dam proved insufficient to meet all requirements, and the railway boreholes were re-opened to supplement the supply.” [1: p223]
We have already noted that Brigadier-General Hammond compiled a second report for the Secretary of State for the Colonies in March 1930. Hill says that he found more to comment than to criticise. His recommendations covered a wide field. Hammond noticed the way the growth in road transport had brought the growth of passenger traffic on the Tanga line to a standstill, so he suggested the use of railcars to meet this competition. He noted too, that with the Railway Company not permitted to own land, it was not really a business, just a semi-independent arm of the state. He was also unimpressed by the quality of the Annual Report of the General Manager.
In relation to the Tanga line, Hammond, made these recommendations:
“The maintenance of both rail connections with Moshi has meant the division of traffic between the two railways to the detriment of both. Despite a good increase in receipts on the Tanga line and low capital charges, there was still a loss on working in 1928/29 of £22,095. The Kenya and Uganda Railways are handling the majority of the high-priced imports and the Tanganyika Railways the bulk of the low-priced exports.
“Great economies can be effected if the Kenya and Uganda Railways work the Tanga line and port as agents on behalf of the Tanganyika Railways. There are no great legislative or administrative difficulties, and my recommendation to this effect has the support of the East Africa Commission of 1924 and of the Closer Union Commission of 1928. The two General Managers are working out a scheme for this purpose, and it is hoped that one acceptable to both parties can thus be solved. Failing this, the matter should be subjected to arbitration. When a proper solution has been reached, the Tanga line should soon show good working results.
“Motor competition has already made its presence felt on the Tanga line and will soon do so on the Central line. I recommend that this should be met by a system of tolls, which will encourage the man who tries to open up services in new areas or on roads radiating from the railway, but definitely discourage the man who chooses to enter into competition with the railways and is using up energy and capital in wasteful competition. [1: p223-224]
Hammond dealt with several controversies which had arisen between the Tanganyika Treasury and the railways, but on the financial side his most important recommendation dealt with the urgent need to establish a renewals fund. In a summary of his report he wrote:
“It is recommended that, instead of applying surpluses to the redemption of two items for which the railways acknowledge indebtedness to the Tanganyika Treasury, they should be applied to the reduction of the arrears of renewals and the items should figure as ‘Advances from Treasury.’
“It is recommended that future surpluses should be applied first to reducing arrears of renewals and that the railways should not pay interest on these special advances and on cash advanced prior to 31st March 1927, until the arrears have been wiped out. If the railways become part of an organisation separate from the Government, the advances should be repaid or interest paid on them.
“A Renewals Fund should be started. The necessary data has been prepared and payments should start as from 1st April 1930. An Arrears of Renewals Account should also be started.
“After deducting Sinking Fund contributions, the contribution to the Renewals Fund for the year 1930-1931 will be £152,860, as against a credit balance on Revenue Account for the year 1928-1929 of £122,692. It is hoped that this gap will be made good by an increase of net revenue but, if not, any shortfall in the contribution must be added to the arrears of renewals. These arrears will amount on 1st April, 1930, to £1,271,119, which emphasises the need for generous treatment of the railways by the Territory.
“An item of approximately £1,270,000 for ‘Arrears of Renewals’ will have to appear in the Balance Sheet with a corresponding increase of the Deficiency Account.” [1: p224-225]
Hammond also stated that the cause of the weak financial position of the Tanganyika Railways was the small volume of business handled compared with the mileage maintained. “It is, therefore,” he wrote, “even more necessary for the Tanganyika Railways than for the ordinary railway to increase their gross receipts and to expend capital in doing so.” [1: p225]
In other words, Hammond advised a continuation of the policy of expansion. Events were soon to show that such advice was of no value and quite impossible to follow.
He noted that in order to provide for the development of the whole system the General Manager estimated that the normal capital requirements during the next three years would be:
Hill says that, “The largest items were £650,000 for locomotives and rolling stock and £153,000 for housing for the Asian and African staff. Brigadier-General Hammond considered proposed capital expenditure was reasonable and justifiable. He also approved the expenditure of £176,000 on the wharf frontage and facilities at Dar es Salaam, £40,000 on fixed moorings and a tug and £125,000 to improve and enlarge the wharf accommodation at Tanga. He did not approve a proposal to spend £85,000 on a new single-ended traffic yard at Dar es Salaam.”
Hammond pointed out that the improvement in the railways’ financial position was due to the increased earnings on the Central line, which had showed a surplus of £140,280 for the year ended 31st March 1929, after allowance for interest had been made. On the other hand the Tanga line still showed a loss on revenue account alone before allowing for loan charges.
“This is in marked contrast,” he wrote, “with the situation as it appeared when I reported on these railways in 1921. Then, although both lines were working at a loss, the prospects of the Tanga line were, according to the opinions of all whom I consulted, considered by far the brighter both on account of the possibilities of the Moshi-Arusha area and because development had already begun along the lower section before the war. The change in the relative positions is well shown in the coaching and goods earnings of the two lines. In the year 1922 these totalled £196 per mile for the Central line and £162 per mile for the Tanga line; in the year 1928/29 they were £583 and £321 per mile respectively. The growth in the former has been due principally to the development of the transit trade with the Congo, and in a lesser degree to the good agricultural development in the area between Kilosa and Kidugallo.
“Although overshadowed by the results on the Central line, there has also been excellent development on the Tanga line, but the retention of two outlets for the Moshi and Arusha traffic has meant a division of the receipts coupled with expenditure in operating and maintaining two lines instead of one, while the upper section of the Tanga line, apart from Moshi itself, has produced up to date insignificant receipts,
“Although the financial results have thus shown a welcome improvement, the traffic on both lines still remains light. On the Dodoma-Morogoro section the average number of trains per week is 14 each way, on the Morogoro-Tabora section nine to ten, and on the Tabora-Kigoma and Tabora-Mwanza section four per week each way. On the Tanga line there is an average of 15 trains a week each way as far as Korogwe; beyond that the average does not exceed six a week each way.” [1: 225-226]
Dealing with the prospects of the Central line, Brigadier-General Hammond wrote:
“To a person like myself, revisiting the country after eight years, the increase in cultivated land along the railway is striking. The development has obviously not reached its limit by any means; new acreages are being planted and, though the increase may not be so rapid as in the past, there should be a steady progress. The only important commodity which has been disappointing is groundnuts; the tonnage of these, which was 10,845 in 1924/25, fell to 3,853 in 1925/26 and only reached 9,224 in 1928/29. This is attributed partly to a series of bad seasons and partly to the fact that some of the natives in the Mwanza area have turned from groundnuts to cotton. For the latter reason a large increase cannot be expected except at the expense of cotton, but development in agriculture has already taken place amongst the tribes along the main line and, with a steady growth in this and with the return of a few good seaons, it would not be unreasonable to anticipate a moderate increase on the 1924/25 figures.” [1: p226]
An RV Class 4-8-2 Locomotive no. 252 ‘Rufiji’ – The Tanganyika Railways RV class, later known as the EAR 21 class, were designed and built for the Tanganyika Railway (TR) as a 4-8-2 development of the 2-8-2 TR MK class. The eight members of the RV class were built by Vulcan Foundry, in Newton-le-Willows, Lancashire. The “RV” class designation was short for “River”, as each RV class locomotive was named after a river in the Tanganyika Territory. The Class entered service on the Tanganyika Railways between 1928 and 1930, and its members were later operated by the TR’s successor, the East African Railways (EAR), (c) Public Domain. [1: p303]A GA Class Garratt 4-8-2+2-8-4 – the three members of the Class were built in 1930 by Beyer, Peacock & Co. in Manchester. They entered service in 1931, and, with one exception, were later operated by the Tanganyika Railway’s successor, the East African Railways (EAR). These locomotives were first given TR numbers (TR 300-302) and were later numbered TR 700-702 and under EAR control were EAR 5301-5302. One of the Class (TR 702) was scrapped after a derailment. These locos were predominantly used on the Dar-es-Salaam to Morogoro section, the heaviest part of the Central Line. [1: p303][10]
As the 1930s unfolded, there was significant debate in Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika regarding the need to provide some protection for the railways from road competition. “In 1935 committees were appointed in Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika to consider the control and co-ordination of all forms of transport. The Uganda and Tanganyika committees generally supported the need for regulation and the Kenya committee strongly supported the regulation of all forms of transport. In the July of 1936 Brigadier-General Sir Osborne Mance visited East Africa to advise the three Governments on the problem. His report, which was not published until 1937, generally endorsed the proposals to regulate all forms of transport on the lines recommended by the Kenya Committee. General Mance pointed out that if motor transport were under the same obligation as the railways to carry traffic tendered at the same rates as the railways for all commodities, viz. an average of 12-68 cents (Kenya and Uganda Railways) and 18-29 cents (Tanganyika Railways) per ton-mile, it would have to go out of business and leave the railways alone in the field. If, however, road transport were allowed to pick and choose and limit itself to the highest classes of traffic in one direction and the best return load available in the other, it could easily undercut the high railway import rates and earn a profit. The railways would then lose the revenue necessary to balance the low export rates and, as any attempt to raise the latter rates beyond the amount determined by world competitive prices would result in the cessation of exports and hence of imports, a heavy railway deficit would occur which would have to be made good by the Government at the expense of the taxpayer, including the importer, who would in this way lose any temporary advantage obtained by the reduction of rates for the carriage of imports by road. The only beneficiary would be the motor transporter, until he was also ruined by cut-throat competition for the diminishing traffic.” [1: p229]
General Mance concluded that some form of regulation of transport was inevitable, and that the railway system was essential as the cheapest form of transport for imports and exports. He recommended a continuation of the policy of protecting the railways from uneconomic competition by road transport.
He considered that all forms of transport should be controlled by licensing. He saw no need to restrict the operation of dhows on Lake Victoria and he advised a monopoly of air services in East Africa with railway participation.
In regard to roads, he suggested that East Africa should concentrate on the construction of real, all-weather roads for vehicles of moderate size and, only later on, improve the principal trunk roads for heavier vehicles. Priority should be given to feeder roads rather than those parallel to the railways. Ultimately it would probably be the demands for passenger transport which would require the development of long distance road because the railways would always be best suited to freight!
Hill reports on the performance and enhancement of the railways in the 1930s: “For the year ended 31st March 1930, the Tanganyika Railways made a profit of £57,830, after meeting interest charges of £183,551. During the year both lines received a considerable reinforcement of rolling stock. From England, the Central line received 50 covered goods wagons; 14 bogie covered goods wagons; 2 bogie first-class coaches, a second-class coach and a dining car, and 8 brake vans and 6 fuel trucks. In addition, 5 bogie third-class coaches, an inspection coach, 2 travelling workshops and a pay coach were built locally for the Central line. From England, the Tanga line received a first- and second-class bogie coach and a dining car; 8 bogie covered-goods wagons, and 24 covered-goods wagons and 4 brake vans. An inspection coach and 2 motor vans were built locally for use on the Tanga line.” [1: p230]
“In the June of 1931 three new Garratt-type engines (4-8-2-2-8-4) were added to the stock on the Central line. These engines weighed 131.35 tons, and had a tractive effort of 40,260 lb. at 85% boiler pressure. Due to the disastrous fall in traffic, the first of these engines was not put into service until the March of 1932. The Garratts were far more economical and efficient than any engines previously owned by the railways. Their arrival enabled all the old German engines, except four shunting engines, two on the Central and two on the Tanga line to be laid up in 1932. The old German engines had always been very expensive to run and the Garratts made possible a considerable reduction of running costs.” [1: p230]
An unidentified Beyer Garratt locomotive on the Central Line in 1931. [1: p230]
“Although the revenue of the Kenya and Uganda Railways was £255.589 less in 1930 than in the previous year, and there was a deficit of £83,210 on the year after meeting loan charges of £690,181 and a contribution of £324,784 to the Renewals Fund – the Tanganyika Railways did not feel the full adverse effect of the Great Depression until the following year. When the blow fell it was extremely hard. The Territory’s revenue, which was £1,992,675 for the year ended 31st March 1930, fell to £1,749,478 for the following year and to £1,552,368 for the year ended 31st March 1932, when it was necessary to raise a loan of £500,000 to strengthen the Territory’s working balance which had shrunk too small. Exports, which exceeded £4 millions in 1928, declined to £1,890,722 in 1931. In so far as the railways were concerned, the effects of the depression were exacerbated by three factors: (a) the loss of the Congo traffic-partly due to the depression and partly to the Belgian policy of diverting traffic to the West coast route via Stanleyville and Matadi; (b) the failure of the crops along the Central line, (During the year ended 31st March 1931, the railways moved 17,486 tons of groundnuts, but in the following year only 2,908 tons were moved); (c) a large increase of interest charges, which rose from £115,674 for the year ended 31st March 1929, to £252,072 for the year ended 31st March 1932. In 1933, the railways’ accounts were changed to coincide with the calendar year, and interest charges were £291,399. In 1934 they reached a peak of £323,919.” [1: p230-231]
In his annual report for the year ended 31st March 1932, the General Manager wrote that it was not until the March of 1931 that
“that the seriousness of the situation was fully realised and that no ordinary measures to curtail expenditure would meet the case.”
He then stated:
“Accordingly, drastic proposals were put in hand to cut down expenditure in every possible direction. These proposals necesitated very heavy retrenchments of staff; heavy repairs in the workshops were cut down; labour wages were considerably reduced; artisans on agreements were put on daily rates of pay; workshops staff were put on short time and their wages reduced. Travelling allowances were stopped and heavy cuts were made in mileage and other railway allowances.
“The Workshops and Stores Depot at Tabora were closed down, and from the 1st January, 1932, a levy on salaries was introduced.
“The result of these proposals as finally approved amounted to a decrease in working expenditure of some £245,000 out of a total estimated working expenditure of ap-proximately £700,000, a decrease of 35 per cent. for the year under review.
“The following reductions in staff were made during the year:
European 106 Asiatics 451 Africans 2,507
In total 3,064
“Though the reductions made this year have been considerable, their full effect will not be evident until 1932-1933 owing to the heavy expenditure on account of leave pay, gratuities, passages, etc., which follow retrenchments. At the date of writing the reduction in the number of European staff amounts to 156.
“Every possible avenue for reducing expenditure is being explored during 1932 and considerable further reductions will be reflected during 1932 and 1933.
“The difficulties of such a complete change of policy and the consequent retrenchment will, I hope, be appreciated.”
Hill tells us that, “In addition to the failure of the groundnuts crop, the export traffic on the Central line declined by 2,535 tons of cotton and 2,785 tons of grains. On the Tanga line the export traffic of coffee was down by 1,338 tons, of sisal by 3,511 tons and of timber by 1,782 tons. The only bright spot was an increase of sisal exports down the Central line from 8,507 tons to 15,100 tons. In aggregate the goods traffic carried declined by 101,729 tons. The worst blow was that only 7,166 tons of copper were carried during the year ended 31st March 1932 as compared with 34,127 tons in the previous year. When the copper traffic ceased entirely in the October of 1931, the loss of revenue was about £90,000 a year. In the upshot the railways’ revenue fell from £900,708 to £557,792. Expenditure was £514,600, giving an operating surplus of £43,193. After loan charges of £252,072 had been met, there was a loss of £208,880 without making any provision for renewals.”[1: p231-232]
“As a result of the new and enforced policy of economy, the curtailment of services, the reduction of staff and working expenses, the ratio of expenditure to revenue on the railways, exclusive of debt charges, fell steadily from 66.40% in 1933 to 49.31% in 1937.” [1: p232]
Hill reports that “the weather was favourable during 1932 and the Government’s efforts to increase the output of African-grown crops were very successful. The output of crops and products, exclusive of coffee and beeswax, was 80 per cent. greater than in 1931. In view of the low export prices for such products as groundnuts, cotton, copra and grains, the response of African growers to the Government’s plea for greater pro-duction was remarkable. Although the production of exportable crops nearly doubled, the value increased only from £1,890,722 to £2,356,942. As the Territory’s imports had declined from £4,285,952 in 1929 to £1,872,012 in 1932, there was still a favourable balance of visible trade.” [1: p237]
He continues: “The sisal industry was particularly hard hit by the slump. On the plantations, salaries and wages were drastically reduced, cultivating and re-planting were reduced to a minimum and development was at a standstill. Nevertheless, production was maintained, and in 1932 a total of 39,500 tons, valued at approximately £500,000, was exported. From Bukoba, 7,107 tons of native-grown coffee were exported and the European-owned plantations in the Northern and Tanga provinces produced about 4,000 tons of Arabica coffee, of which 3,600 tons were exported. On Kilimanjaro, about 12,500 native growers produced over 800 tons of Arabica coffee. The Kilimanjaro Native Co-operative Union, Ltd., was formed, under the guidance of a European manager, and was showing highly satisfactory results. The total value of minerals exported was £194,102, of which gold accounted for £150,166 and salt for £32,639. Of the exports of bullion, 30,881 ozs., the Lupa goldfields in the Mbeya district produced 15,843 ozs., practically all from alluvial, although reefs were being developed in this field. The Sekenke mine in the Mkalama district produced 10,843 ozs., and 4,100 ozs. came from the Musoma district.” [1: p237]
“As the closing date of the railways’ financial year had been altered to December 31st, in accord with the Territory’s accounts, the General Manager’s report covered the period April 1st, 1932, to December 31st, 1932. For that period the gross receipts exceeded working expenditure by £111,738, but interest charges of £161,816 resulted in a loss of £51,078.” [1: p237]
The General Manager wrote that “to place the Tanganyika Railways and Port Services in a satisfactory position, the revenue from all services should be £1,000,000 per annum. In the year ended 31st March 1931, it had reached the £900,000 mark, but one-third of this sum was earned from the Congolese traffic. The task is a difficult but not an impossible one, and a good start has been made by all classes of producers in Tanganyika in 1932….” [1: p238] In fact, ten years were to pass before the railways achieved a revenue in excess of £1 million.
Hill tells us that “by the end of 1932 good progress had been made in training Africans to drive the super-heated engines working main-line passenger and goods trains, 14 African engine men had been certified as competent, although all but two or three were illiterate and dependent on station-masters, guards and shed staff for information on the working of trains and on shed clerks for the booking of repairs to engines. The engine-drivers on the Tanga line, with one exception, were Africans.” [1: p238]
In 1932, Mr Roger Gibb came to East Africa to undertake an enquiry into railway rates required by the Joint Select Committee of Parliament on ‘Closer Union. He visited Uganda and Kenya before arriving in Tanganyika in July 1932. In his report published early in 1933, “he advised against the amalgamation of the Tanganyika Railways and the Kenya and Uganda Railways on the grounds that the economies which would result would not be sufficient to out-weigh the political disadvantages arising from a clash of interests. Mr. Gibb thought that the Tanganyika Railways would benefit from adopting the rate charges which he had proposed for the Kenya and Uganda Railways, but that the greater gain would emerge from the Government’s policy of stimulating native production with a consequent greater density of traffic.
“Inevitably Mr. Gibb turned his mind to the old controversy about the Tanga line. The statistics showed that the traffic to and from the Kilimanjaro district was no more than a train-load a week in each direction, which did not justify two ways to the coast. As the traffic was clearly Tanganyika traffic, Mr. Gibb thought that the Tanganyika Government should be entitled to break the link with Mombasa in order to reduce these losses. On the other hand, there was more to be said for the closing of the line between Buiko and Kahe, so Mr. Gibb proposed that the Kenya and Uganda Railways should carry all the Kilimanjaro traffic to Mombasa under an arrangement whereby the Tanganyika Railway would fix the rates to Voi and Mombasa and receive any profit. Mr. Gibb suggested that the track between Kahe and Buiko should be lifted and the earthworks used as a roadway, and the line between Buiko and Tanga sold, if possible, to a private company. He did not improve the prospect of any such sale by stating ‘if after the Tanga-Buiko line is disposed of, the section becomes prosperous, as it is suggested that it may, no great harm will be done to the Government by its sale. A government can get back in taxation much of its lost profits from abandoned ownership’.” [1: p239] Gibb’s proposals were not adopted and “within a few years the long controversy which the Tanga line had provoked lost much of its importance. The rates from Moshi to the coast by either route were assimilated, and in 1936 Sir Osborne Mance suggested that a pooling arrangement on the principle suggested for Lake Victoria would be likely to give the Tanganyika Railways a fair share of traffic and profit.” [1: p239-240]
During WW2, the lack of a link between the Kenya & Uganda Railways and the Central Tanganyika Railways was significant .Transport problems would have been even greater if the link from Kenya with the line between Tanga and Moshi had been broken!
Hill continues:
“The extension of the Central line to Mwanza … brought it into competition with the Kenya and Uganda Railways for the trade of the southern part of the Lake Victoria basin, The Secretary of State had ruled in 1928 that non-competitive rates should be arranged, leaving trade to take its normal course, a decision implemented by an agreement permitting the Kenya and Uganda Railways to retain its Lake traffic at all points except Mwanza; the rates from Mwanza to either Dar es Salaam or Mombasa were equalised and the rates from Tanganyika ports across the Lake were made higher via the Tanganyika route than via Kenya by the cost of transport across the Lake. It was contended by Tanganyika interests that this arrangement still left certain advantages with the Kenya and Uganda Railways, derived, among other causes, from their ownership of the steamers on the Lake. Mr. Gibb now suggested that the traffic arising at, or destined for, Tanganyika ports on the Lake should be pooled to prevent undue competition, and that as regards new traffic, a contribution should be made by the Kenya and Uganda Railways to the Tanganyika Railways for tonnage in excess of an agreed proportion. In 1934 the Secretary of State decided against a change in the previous arrangement until the total traffic to the Tanganyika Lake ports reached the tonnage handled by the Kenya and Uganda Railways prior to the building of the Mwanza line; this figure was exceeded in 1935, but Sir Osborne Mance, who reported on the matter in 1936, expressed the view that it would be preferable to revert to the decision of 1928, and allow the routes to function in accordance with their relative advantages; he considered that the present rates on the Kenya-Uganda Railways to Mombasa should apply equally to to Dar es Salaam for all Tanganyika ports, the revenue from traffic being pooled and divided on a percentage basis.
By 1936, the Kenya and Uganda Railways had overcome the worst of the effects of the slump and were once more working at a profit. As a result there was considerable pressure in Kenya and Uganda on the railways to reduce several rates in their tariff. When this was done in 1936, the Tanganyika Railways were in no position to take similar action, so the agreements between the two railways regarding equalisation of costs over the two routes had to be abandoned. This action led to an even greater diversion of traffic away from the Tanganyika Railways to the Kenya and Uganda Railways. Indeed, it was stated that traffic was being consigned from stations on the Mwanza branch via the Lake to Mombasa rather than to Dar es Salaam. The settlement finally reached in 1937 provided for equality of rates, freedom of choice by trader, payment to the transport system for services rendered and a division of profits between the two railways.
Although this agreement helped the Tanganyika Railways, there still remained the problem of the traffic which was carried across the border to the Kenya and Uganda system by road or by dhows on Lake Victoria which did not fall within the scope of the agreement. The 1934 Ordinance could not prevent this movement of traffic, as it only applied to traffic being carried between two places on the Tanganyika system. In 1939, the 1934 Ordinance was amended to enable the prohibition of the movement of goods by road on any route. It provided that before movement was prohibited, a public enquiry should be held. A second Ordinance to control, in a similar manner, the movement of goods by inland-water transport was also brought into operation in 1939. In that year the General Manager stated that the amended Ordinance, and the Ordinance to control Lake transport, had met reasonably well the threat of competition. However, he did not accept these Ordinances as being a complete solution of the problem, and he continued to press for the application of the more general Ordinance of 1937. [1:p240-241]
The years 1933 and 1934 saw a significant reduction in rainfall in the second shorter rainy season which also arrived late, meaning that the planting season was greatly shortened. Drought conditions saw food shortages. In places, the longer rains also failed. Locusts also proved to be a serious problem.
However, Hill says:
“Despite the poor rainfall, the exports of sisal, coffee and cotton were all greater than in any previous year. The output of sisal was 72,510 tons valued at 1.847.562; 14,766 tons of coffee valued at 6495,237 were exported, and the exports of cotton amounted to 31,612 bales valued at £326,613. The exports of gold were valued at £295,690. … From all this the railways derived little benefit. In 1933, gross receipts were only £532,092, and in 1934, only £565,842. After paying interest charges the losses on the two years were £112,635 and £125,254 respectively.” [1: p242]
GSL Class Sentinel Shunter of which eight were obtained in 1930. These locomotives were withdrawn and scrapped in the early 1950s, (c) EAR&H. [1: p300]
For the first eight months of 1934, Sentinel cars maintained a service between Moshi and Arusha, “but it was not a financial success. It was clear that the coastal section of the Tanga line offered the best opportunity for the railcars, once the difficulties arising from the axle-loading on the light track had been overcome. The cars were withdrawn in August for a general overhaul while the track was strengthened. Just before Christmas the new service was started. It was a good service, with reduced fares and daily early morning departures from Tanga and Korogwe (50 miles), with a return service from both ends in the afternoon. Twice a week the service was extended to Mombo (81 miles). From the outset the service proved a success, and receipts increased steadily week by week. Along this section of the line the fiercest competition from motor transport was met and passenger receipts had fallen consistently since 1930, until traffic was only 30 per cent. of that carried formerly. The Sentinel cars arrested the decline, and in the January of 1935 there was a substantial increase of passenger traffic for the first time since 1930. In view of the great success of the Sentinel rail-cars on the Tanga line, it was decided in 1936 to alter the gear ratio of two of the Sentinel shunting engines and run them on the Mwanza line between Shinyanga and Mwanza, hauling a single coach, and thereby providing a service similar to that given by the railcars on the Tanga line. Unfortunately, the traffic was not sufficient to pay for the service, which was withdrawn at the end of October 1937.” [1: p242-243]
Hill continues:
“By 1935 the drastic measures taken to deal with the financial difficulties of the railways were showing their full effect, Earnings rose to £662,296, while working expenditure was only £350,893, that is 52-98 per cent. of earnings. After meeting interest charges of £322,435, there was a small loss of £11,059, a great improvement on the results of the four previous years.” [1: p243]
Further efforts were made to cope with motor competition. A 15-ton road-train unit was acquired to initiate a branch service to the Kahama goldfields. However, this venture was not a success. In 1937 the road-train played a useful part in a campaign to deal with sleeping sickness around Urambo. In 1938 it was used for famine relief on the Tabora-Uyowa run, and it was laid up in the February of 1939. (During WW2 the road-train was taken over by the military authorities.)
Hill tells us that “the recovery of the railways’ finances in 1935 and 1936 was assisted by the general move away from the Great Depression. The gross volume of Tanganyika’s external trade in 1935 exceeded that of the previous year by £1.5 million. Exports rose by 30 per cent, to £3,445,143, and imports were valued at nearly £3 million. The most welcome feature was the recovery of sisal, for the price rose to £29 a ton, nearly double the price during the years of depression. During the year, 82,676 tons of sisal were exported and valued at £1,134.732; 18,558 tons of coffee exports were valued at £486,843; cotton exports were valued at £569,547, and gold exports at £369,742.” [1: p243]
“The economic recovery which started early in 1935 continued in 1936, when the Territory’s revenue was nearly £2 million and expenditure £1,739,009. The value of exports rose to £4.516,284, more than £1 million greater than in 1935. After paying debt charges of £315,254, the railways made a profit of £52,875.” [1: p244]
Throughout the first half of the 1930s, no provision was made for a renewals fund. “With a profit again earned after meeting interest charges, a Renewals Fund was started. Unfortunately, the railways owed the Territory £402,131 at the end of 1936, Of this total, £151,416 represented the value of floating assets taken over in 1927; £223,066 had been advanced to meet the losses of 1933 and 1934; and £27,649 was the value of stores taken over from the Public Works Department in 1935. In that year, in the interests of economy, the Railway Stores Department was combined with the Government Stores in Dar es Salaam. The railways took over all stores held by the Government and continued to act as storekeepers for the Government until 1948. … The Government pressed for a reduction of the loan of £402,131 and demanded that any profits earned by the railways should be allocated for this purpose. In consequence a peculiar arrangement was made whereby the railways repaid their debt to the Government annually, and the Government advanced to the railways, annually as a loan, a sum of £50,000 for the Renewals Fund. By this queer device the profit of £52,875 earned in 1936 was reduced by £50,000 to £2,875 and the debt due by the railways to the Government of Tanganyika was increased to £452,131. On 1st January 1936, the accounts of the railways showed an excess of liabilities over assets of £211,185. At 31st December 1936, this figure was reduced to £208,310 after providing for the liability of £50,000 to the Renewals Fund. At a later date it was decided that essential renewals should be financed from a Railway Renewals Reserve which was maintained within the accounts of the Territory. The accounts of the railways and ports services were charged with the expenditure when it occurred, the expenditure was met by repayable borrowings from the Territory’s reserve, bearing interest at 4 per cent. per annum. It was estimated that at the end of December 1939, the total arrears of renewals contributions on assets provided from British capital was £1,256,225.” [1: p244]
Hill continues:
“In the year 1937 Tanganyika’s revenue and exports were greater than ever before. The total value of exports, including re-exports of £342,012, was £5,311,464. This achievement was in no way due to favourable climatic conditions. It would be true to say that it was accomplished in spite of adverse factors, particularly in the case of native crops. Except in the Eastern Province, the rains were not favourable. They were heavy and prolonged in the Lake, Western and Northern Provinces, and caused serious losses in coffee, cotton, groundnuts and maize, whereas in the Southern Province they were deficient, and low yields of grain were the result. In spite of these discouragements, the efforts of African cultivators resulted in ample supplies of food for their own consumption and of produce for sale.
Their efforts were helped by the good fortune that no extensive outbreak of plant pests or disease occurred and that the Territory remained, throughout the year, almost entirely free from locust infestation. The owners of livestock were not so fortunate. Rinderpest swept southward during the year, being finally held up in the Central Province, and there was an extensive outbreak of contagious bovine pleuro-pneumonia in the Lake Province.
Agricultural products sold for good prices during the greater part of the year. Sisal stood at from £28 to £30 per ton; the world price of American cotton was 7d. to 8d. per lb. of lint; coffee prices had risen appreciably over the past five years, and the prices of maize, groundnuts, copra and sesame were high. The outlook seemed good enough, but in the latter part of the year there came a serious slump in the prices of all agricultural produce except grains and tea.
Sisal attained record figures both in quantity (90,000 tons) and value (over £2,000,000), and coffee, cotton and rice established new records in quantity. The value of the cotton crop was below that of 1929, owing to a particularly rapid price decline. Gold made another advance both in quantity and value.
The railways’ revenue increased to £780,565, and after meeting debt charges of £312,454 the profit was £83,198. The percentage of revenue to earnings fell to the extremely low figure of 49:31 per cent.” [1: p244-245]
1938 was a year of disappointing setbacks for Tanganyika: “The weather was generally unfavourable and there was a decline in the prices realisable for Tanganyika’s products on the world’s markets. The value of the Territory’s exports fell by over £1 million to £4,050,734. The railways’ revenues fell to £662,556, and after paying debt charges there was a loss of £20,780. A striking example of how severely the railways’ revenue could be hit by a bad season was was provided by the groundnuts crop, always liable to marked fluctuation. In 1937, the railways carried 20,895 tons of groundnuts. In 1938 the railways carried 2,783 tons of groundnuts. This meant a direct loss of revenue of £37,000, apart from the indirect loss caused by a consequent reduction of imports. There was also a large fall in the traffic of grains, which produced £27,476 in 1937 and only £17,246 in 1938. Further loss to the Tanganyika Railways, estimated at £20,000, was caused by the infiltration of traffic carried initially by the Kenya and Uganda Railways and then into Tanganyika by road or waterway.” [1: p245]
“Moreover, 1938 was the year of Munich. Uncertainty about the future of Tanganyika, caused by demands for the return of the Territory to Germany, had a most adverse effect on the economy. There was a reluctance to invest capital in the country, many development projects were set aside and a large number of commercial firms reduced their stocks to a minimum. In 1937, the European population of Tanganyika was 9,107, of whom 5,642 were males and 3,465 were females. The British, including South Africans, numbered 4.145. The number of Government officials, including the European staff of the Tanganyika Railways, was 1,035. The number of British subjects in Tanganyika who were not in the public service was, therefore, about 2,150. The number of Germans was nearer 1,000, and many of them had been infected with the political outlook of Nazism.” [1: p246]
The Munich crisis, in the September of 1938, brought home to the Government the need to set all defence plans in readiness, more especially to ensure internal security against possible action by the German inhabitants whose propaganda had been active and whose organisation could not be underestimated. (For more about the political machinations of the later months of 1938 – see F. S. Joelson’s book, Germany’s Claim to Colonies (Hurst & Blackett), 1939.)
Hill comments: “The vacillations of certain statesmen, and the reservations of statements in the House of Commons and elsewhere, over several years, did great hurt to the economy of Tanganyika. The uncertainty of the prospect set a check on settlement and investment and a brake on economic development. Immense progress had been made in the face of great difficulties the very nature of a vast country, drought and flood and the Great Depression. Much more would have been achieved without the threat that Germany might regain the sovereignty of Tanganyika. From now on men’s minds were depressed by the increasing realisation that a Second World War was inevitable.” [1: p247]
From the start of 1939, all ports in Tanganyika were administered by the railways. Hitherto the railways had only been concerned with Dar es Salaam and Tanga. Hence-forward they were also responsible for Pangani, Bagamayo, Kwale, Tirene Bay, Kilwa Kivingee, Lindi and Mikindani. In his Annual Report for 1939 the General Manager wrote:
“The ports and railways are operated under different forms of legislation, provide different types of transport services, and moreover, only four ports are at present connected to the railway system. The finances of the two services have therefore been separated. This is essential, as it is generally desirable that the port users should meet the cost of the port services and that railway users should bear the cost of railway services. Should, however, it be necessary for either to assist the other, it is desirable that the amount of such assistance should be recorded. For services rendered by the railways to the ports debits have been shown in the ports’ accounts and credits in the railways accounts and vice versa.” [1: p247]
1939 was another disappointing year. The gross receipts of the railways and the ports amounted to £712,642 and expenditure to £426,947. The excess of receipts over expenditure was £285,695, but debt charges of £311,585 resulted in a loss of £25,890.
At the end of 1932 the staff of the Tanganyika Railways consisted of 174 Europeans, 495 Asians and 7,741 Africans. At the end of 1939 the staff consisted of 120 Europeans, 475 Asians and 7,600 Africans.
In the Annual Report, it was noted that two surveys had been made of the ‘transit’ traffic between the east coast of Africa and those parts of Tanganyika which were served by the Kenya and Uganda Railways as well as by the Tanganyika Railways. The two areas surveyed were the Tanganyika coast of Lake Victoria and the Moshi-Arusha area near Kilimanjaro. Hill provides a table which is produced below and which covers only the traffic from those areas to the Indian Ocean ports.
Hills table shows that earnings on the routes through Tanzania amount to about 31% of the total income from the traffic. A complex formula determined how that detriment was addressed in payments between the to networks. [1: p248]
That formula produced payments in favour of Tanganyika Railways:
For running rights on the Kahe-Moshi section;
For the ‘feeder value’ of the Arusha branch line; and
Through the Lake Victoria pooling arrangement.
Against these payments the Kenya-Uganda administration received payment:
For the carrying of goods on the Lake part of the journey in respect of traffic between Tanganyika Lake ports and Dar-es-Salaam; and
Through the Lake Victoria pooling agreement.
The net effect of the calculation saw £9,460 paid to Tanganyika Railways. This figure did not fairly represent the actual loss of revenue income for the Tanganyika Railways.
Hill asks us to remember that despite all efforts “the Tanganyika Railways … had a deficit of approximately £25,000 in 1939, and that no provision [had] yet been made for depreciation which has been assessed at not less than £100,000 per annum. As the transport administration [had] been unable to make this provision, the taxpayers of the Territory … [were] called upon to set aside £50,000 per annum to ensure that funds [would] be available when required … for essential renewals. The Territory as a whole [was], through taxation, making an annual provision at present of £75,000 (ultimately to be increased to £125,000) which, …[would] be required by the railway to meet its costs, while at the same time net payments exceeding £90,000 per annum are being made to the transport services of another colony. In effect, the taxpayers of Tanganyika … [were] being asked to pay this amount to the railway users of Kenya and Uganda. … This arrangement result[ed] in the Kenya and Uganda Railways users obtaining a lower-rate level than they would otherwise have enjoy[ed].” [1: p249]
“Despite this unsatisfactory position, … the Tanganyika Railways … acknowledged the sympathetic consideration received from the Kenya and Uganda Railways. Every effort was being made … to adopt common standards on many aspects of railway working, and the close touch maintained by the two administrations [was] probably not fully realised. The difficulties which exist[ed] on the northern frontier arise from historical accidents and [were] no reflection on the management of the Kenya and Uganda system.” [1: p249]
Mr. Robins, the General Manager in his 1939 annual report, wrote about the problems which would be faced by Tanganyika Railways on the outbreak of war between Great Britain and Germany:
“A careful study of this and previous Annual Reports will reveal that the policy of the administration is to maintain the present rate level and, by constant examination, to reduce the working expenditure to the lowest level compatible with the maintenance of the assets in as healthy a condition as is possible from revenue sources in order to defer the day when heavy expenditure on renewals will be required. At the same time the administration is endeavouring to apply a sound staff policy which will enable its operation of a public service to be carried on with efficiency and economy. It is for these reasons that in several cases savings which have been achieved and which are disclosed by an examination of the detailed heads of expenditure have been utilised for the better maintenance of assets such as buildings in order to prolong their life. At the same time, by constant attention to actual and potential flows of traffic, details of the former now being made available by the use of mechanical accounting machines, the administration is always seeking to increase its net revenue.
“This, however, is not sufficient to ensure a satisfactory future for the railways and ports services. Additional traffic must be transported if they are to be self-supporting. As has been pointed out in previous reports, whilst the policy of endeavouring to foster traffic from other territories must not be neglected, it is the opinion of the present management that the possibilities in that direction are limited, mainly because the transport administrations of other territories do likewise, and the Tanganyika system is in a very vulnerable position in that respect. It is also very natural that the policy of other transport authorities will be directed to the retention of their own traffic at almost any cost. The solution must, therefore, be sought within the boundaries of this large territory, Tanganyika. It should be able to support its own modest transport system.
“There is no doubt that in the past the Mandate, under which the country is administered, has been imperfectly understood; it has engendered a feeling, rightly or wrongly, that the future is insecure, that there is a serious risk attaching to private investment in the country. Production and industry were, so to speak, also marking time in the hope that some day the future would be clearer. This sense of insecurity was a serious factor in peacetime, but the repercussion of it left the country in such a position that the shock of war dealt the railway system a serious blow against which no reserves were available upon which to draw. In consequence, the possibility of a very serious deficit has to be faced in the forthcoming year.
“Every effort is being made by the Government and the public to meet this situation in such a manner as to avoid Tanganyika being a burden to the Empire and, in fact, to go further and enable it to render aid to the Empire, but the accumulated effect of the long-standing feeling of insecurity makes the country start off with a handicap. It is sincerely to be hoped that whatever settlement is reached after this conflict, it will be one in which there is no room for uncertainty. If, then, the methods employed in war-time are employed in peace-time, there will be no doubt that this country can produce within its boundaries sufficient traffic to support its transport system. That, combined with a prudent financial policy, will overcome most of the difficulties which the management has had to face for some time.” [1: p249-250]
Hill explains: “For twenty years, from 1919 to 1939, the basic problem of the Tanganyika Railways remained the same. The fixed costs of railways are commonly high, although the Tanganyika Railways derived advantage from the cheap acquisition of the German capital assets. The costs of moving traffic on railways are comparatively low, but in the case of the Tanganyika Railways they were increased by several factors, including the state and type of much of the German equipment and the unsatisfactory alignment of several sections of the Tanga and Central lines. During the first twenty years of British administration of the Tanganyika Railways good progress was made in solving what may be termed the technical problems. The basic trouble was that the traffic offering was insufficient to enable the railways to earn sufficient revenue to meet running costs, interest charges, and to provide for renewals and for betterment. The goods traffic density, in terms of ton-miles per route mile, was too low.” [1: p250-251]
Hills point is clearly made in the next table that he supplies which compares the Tanganyika network with other Africa networks:
This table shows that the revenue from goods in Tanganyika was significantly less than in other areas of the continent. [1: p251]
For the year 1939, the goods traffic density of the first-class railways of the United States of America was 1,365,000 ton-miles per route mile; in the United Kingdom it was 868,000. The only means whereby the Tanganyika Railways could achieve a sound financial state was by carrying a considerably greater volume of traffic, which could only be provided by the economic development of the Territory. [1: p251]
References
M.F. Hill; Permanent Way Volume II: The Story of the Tanganyika Railways; East African Railways and Habours, Nairobi, Kenya; Watson & Viney, Aylesbury & Slough, 1957.
The German Akida system in Tanganyika (German East Africa) was an administrative strategy replacing indigenous leaders with appointed agents—often coastal Arabs or Swahili—to enforce colonial rule, collect taxes, and maintain order. These agents managed “Akidates,” serving as a brutal, intermediary authority between German district officers and local populations. The term Akida predated the arrival of German Empire to the region. Prior to the arrival of German Empire, the Akida served the coastal towns in a special function. The individual was a prominent member of the younger generation and was a prominent war leader in the region. His responsibilities were to keep order and control public festivities. The Akida answered to Liwali (an Arab or African governor of a town, usually a district headquarters) in the region. He was appointed or recognized by the Sayyid of Zanzibar. The concept was adopted by the German Empire, but it altered the roles of the Akida. Few of the Akida’s were indigenous to their region. Most were literate men from different regions. Their purpose was the representation of the German Empire’s bureaucratic tradition of administration. For more information about the German System of Administration please see https://avim.org.tr/en/Analiz/GERMAN-COLONIAL-LEGACY-TANZANIA-AND-THE-HUMBOLDT-FORUM, accessed on 17th March 2026.
Report on the Railway Systems of Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika,’ by Lieut.-Colonel F. D. Hammond, C.B.E., D.S.O., Royal Engineers, Special Commissioner for Railways, Eastern Africa. The greater part of this report, including the recommendations in respect of the Voi-Kahe line is dealt with at length in M. F. Hill; Permanent Way, Vol. I, The Story of the Kenya and Uganda Railways; chapter XIV, p 422ff. The report is also covered in an article about the Uganda Railway on this blog: https://rogerfarnworth.com/2021/01/08/the-uganda-railway-in-the-first-5-years-after-world-war-1
The Railway Magazine of April 1959 carried an article by Anthony A. Vickers about a short branch in Worcester of about 29 chains in length. [1] 29 chains is 638 yards (583.4 metres). The line served Worcester’s Vinegar Works.
After a time operating at their Vinegar Works in Lowesmoor, Worcester, Hill, Evans & Co. decided that a connection to the national railway network was required via the nearby joint Worcester Shrub Hill railway station which at the time served both the Oxford, Worcester and Wolverhampton Railway and the Midland Railway.
“The resultant Worcester Railways Act 1870 allowed Hill, Evans and Co to extend the existing branchline that had served the Worcester Engine Works, from where it crossed the Virgin’s Tavern Road (later Rainbow Hill Road and now Tolladine Road) by a further 632 yards (578 m) to terminate in … the vinegar works. This route required a level crossing at Shrub Hill Road, a bridge over the Worcester and Birmingham Canal, and a second level crossing at Pheasant Street.[3] The Act also permitted a second siding to be constructed that was wholly within the parish of St.Martin, which enabled the branchline to connect to both the local flour mill, and the Vulcan Works of engineers McKenzie & Holland.” [6]
“One of the provisions of the Act, was that signals must be provided at the public crossings to warn the public when trains required to cross. The speed of the latter was also to be limited to 4 m.p.h.” [1: p238]
A.A. Vickers notes that a few years prior to his article, “a Land-Rover was in collision with a train on Shrub Hill Road level crossing. It is understood that legal opinion of the question of liability was sought, and was to the effect that the semaphore signals fulfilled the obligations of the railway to give adequate warning of the approach of a train, and that the attendance of a shunter with red flags was unnecessary. Be that as it may, road traffic pa[id]no heed to the semaphores, being mostly unaware of their significance.” [1: p238]
“The branch was completed in 1872 and was known as the Vinegar Works branch or the Lowesmoor Tramway. As an engineering company, McKenzie & Holland supplied the required shunting locomotive. From 1903, engineering company Heenan & Froude also built a works in Worcester, which was served by an additional extension. After the closure of the flour mill in 1915, post-World War I that part of the branchline was lifted, and the flour mill and original part of the Vulcan Works redeveloped in the mid-1920s as a bus depot. In 1936, Heenan & Froude took over McKenzie & Holland, and hence responsibility for the supply of the private shunting locomotive.” [6]
Post World War II, the Great Western Railway and then British Railways took over supply of the shunting locomotive to the branchline. Supplies to the vinegar works switched to road transport in 1958. The last train on the branchline ran on 5th June 1964, hauled by GWR Pannier Tank engine 0-6-0PT No.1639. The branchline was taken up in the late 1970s.
Although the line was short it had a number of interesting features!
The line crossed the south loop of the junction, and then by a bridge over what A.A. Vickers tells us was, at the end of the 1950s, Rainbow Hill Road (now Tolladine Road). The line then ran through Shrub Hill Engineering Work, curving gradually round towards the Southwest.
Vickers tells us that, “As the time for the daily (weekdays except Saturdays) trip approache[d], a shunter walk[ed] down from Shrub Hill Station, unfasten[ed] the padlocks, and open[ed] the gates at each side of the crossing over Shrub Hill. These protect[ed] the railway track when closed, but [did] not project onto the roadway when opened. When the engine with its train dr[ew] up to a signal protecting a catch point about fifty yards away from the road, the shunter pull[ed] on the road semaphores, which [were] of standard main-line pattern and operated from their posts, and, at a small ground frame beside the track. While the train close[d] the catch point and pull[ed] off the signal protecting it [and ran] slowly down the incline towards the road the shunter flag[ged] the traffic along Shrub Hill to a stand still, and when he ha[d] achieved this he signal[led] to the train to cross. Then, after allowing the road traffic to proceed, the shunter return[ed] the signals to their original position. He then walk[ed] down the track, across a bascule lift bridge, and over a canal bridge, on which the train ha[d] stopped.” [1: p236]
Vickers continues: “The bascule bridge [was] at a factory gate. and the headroom below it [was] about 6 ft. 6 in. [By 1959], only private cars and foot and cycle traffic [used] this entrance. The bridge was last operated many years [before], and one of the basic movements at its fulcrum [had, in 1955,] been immobilised by a concrete wedge which [bore] the date 6th February 1955. The span [was] partly counterweighted, but required a chain and capstan haulage to raise it. The fulcrum contained a complicated arrangement to allow sufficient free space for movement at rail level to occur. First a padlock was unfastened to free a pivoted sleeper which blocked rotation of the fulcrum of a small 18 in. length of rail which was in effect a subsidiary bascule section. When this was raised there was thus an 18 in. gap which allowed the fulcrum of the main span to roll back as the span was raised. The free end of the subsidiary and main span was in each case allowed to slide into an open fish-plate end, the bottom bulge of the rail section having been cut away flush at the end of the span for this purpose. At the main span end the junction [was] fixed by insertion of the fish-bolts.” [1: p236-237]
Adjacent to the railway bridge over the canal there was a road bridge carrying Cromwell Street which by 1959 was unsafe for vehicular use. The red line denotes the route of the branch. The road bridge was replaced by a footbridge. [5]
The view North from George Street, Worcester along the Birmingham & Worcester Canal. The bridge furthest from the camera is the footbridge that replaced Cromwell Road Bridge. The railway bridge beyond it was removed some time ago. [Google Streetview, July 2025]
The level-crossing to the immediate West of the canal only crossed a road of very minor importance (Padmore Street), leading only to a private car park and yard.
The corner of Padmore Street and Cromwell Street in 2025. The blue line shows what was once a through road over the canal. Work was being undertaken on the pedestrian bridge over the canal in July 2025. The red line on the image is the line of the old railway. The building at the left was the Midland Red Bus Depot on Padmore Street. In the 21st century it is the depot for First Bus. [Google Streetview, July 2025]
“While the shunter [was] opening the crossing gate, the engine [was] uncoupled from the train. To allow for this the train, which usually consist[ed] of about eight wagons, [was] marshalled with a brake van at each end. The brakes of the leading van [were] applied and the engine [ran] forwards onto a short spur, on which [was] the remainder of a trailing point which once gave access to a factory on the site [which is 1959 was] occupied by the Midland Red Omnibus Company’s depot. The point leading to this spur [was] sprung to act as a catch point protecting the third level crossing, at Pheasant Street, which is the lowest point on the line.” [1: p237]
The Midland Red Depot was once the site of City Flour Mills. The site was later redeveloped and used by McKenzie, Clunes & Holland, renamed McKenzie & Holland from 1875, then McKenzie & Holland Limited from 1901, for the manufacturing of railway signalling equipment. Worcester operations of that company closed in 1921. A number of railway branch-lines were used to access the site. The site was acquired in 1927 by the Birmingham and Midland Motor Omnibus Company Limited (BMMO—Midland “Red” Motor Services) in preparation for the expansion required to operate the new Worcester City local bus area network due to start the following year. The purchase included an eight-bay, steel-framed corrugated-iron factory sited between the canal and Padmore Street which was converted for use as a bus depot, and part of former railway sidings from the Vinegar Works branch line to be used for outdoor parking. Work to convert the building included removing the wall that faced onto Padmore Street and replacing it with a series of sliding doors to allow vehicle access. ‘MIDLAND “RED” MOTOR SERVICES.’ was painted in large letters above the doors. The new depot opened on 1st June 1928. The garage was extended in 1930 with the addition of two extra bays built over the former railway sidings at the south end of the main building. The new bays were notably wider and, unlike the original building, could accommodate full-height enclosed double-deck buses. [11]
Pheasant Street had a gated crossing, while the locomotive and its short train were negotiating the crossing on Padmore Street, “a shunter from Hill, Evans & Company, for the benefit of whose vinegar factory the whole operation[was] carried out, … unfastened the padlocks and opened the gates at Pheasant Street level crossing.” [1: p237]
At the Pheasant Street level-crossing, the signals were on one post. small somersault arms control road traffic, with central spectacles, and coupled together directly so that one inclines in the wrong direction when ‘off’. They are provided with a central lamp. “When both shunters [were] satisfied that road traffic at the second and third crossings [was] responding to their flags, the guard in the leading brake van release[d] his brakes and allow[ed] the train to run forward down the slope. … The approach to Pheasant Street [was] quite blind, and the train appear[ed] through the gap in the high walls at the side of the road without audible warning at some 20 m.p.h., and [was] gone as quickly through the gap on the other side of the road. The engine follow[ed] at its leisure, to do any necessary shunting before pulling a train back up to Shrub Hill.” [1: p238]
“Hill, Evans & Co was founded in the centre of Worcester in 1830 by two chemists, William Hill and Edward Evans. The pair started producing vinegar, but later the company also produced: wines from raisin, gooseberry, orange, cherry, cowslip, elderberry; ginger beer; fortified wines including port and sherry; as well as Robert Waters branded original quinine which was drunk to combat malaria.” [6]
“As the company quickly expanded, they purchased a 6 acres (2.4 ha) site at Lowesmoor. In 1850 the company built the Great Filling Hall, containing the world’s largest vat, which at 12 metres (39 ft) high could hold 521,287 litres (114,667 imp gal; 137,709 US gal) of liquid. For a century this made the works the biggest vinegar works in the world, capable of producing 9,000,000 litres … of malt vinegar every year.” [6]
“Movement of wagons within the factory [was] carried out by a small road tractor equipped with a cast-iron buffer beam and a hook for towing with the aid of a rope. For this reason the rails in the factory [were] mostly laid in tramway fashion, flush with the surface.” [1: p238]
One of the provisions of the Worcester Railways Act of 1870, under which the line was built, was that signals must be provided at the public crossings to warn the public when trains required to cross the speed of the latter was also to be limited to 4 m.p.h. A few years ago a Land-Rover was in collision with a train on Shrub Hill Road level crossing. It is understood that legal opinion of the question of liability was sought, and was to the effect that the semaphore signals fulfilled the obligations of the railway to give adequate warning of the approach of a train, and that the attend-ance of a shunter with red flags was unnecessary. Be that as it may, road traffic pays no heed to the semaphores, being mostly unaware of their significance.
References
A.A. Vickers; An Unusual Branch at Worcester; in The Railway Magazine, April 1959; London, 1958, p236-238.
I was asked to do a talk for the Association of Shrewsbury Railway Modellers in November 2025. These are the notes and images pulled together for that talk. In many cases, the images included have been used in other articles and rather than creating new image files a link to the original image has been provided in these notes. ………
The featured image above is a view of the NCB-built engine shed near Granville Colliery. After the NCB took over the collieries owned by the Lilleshall Company, Granville Colliery supplied coal to Buildwas Power Station and the coal trains were worked by a range of locos down the 1.5 miles to Donnington. Granville Colliery had a decent sized shed and in later years used Austerity 0-6-0ST tanks but in Lilleshall Company days the bigger engines were the ex-TVR and Barry railway engines. This image and the accompanying text were shared by Marcus Keane on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 15th September 2015. [38]
The Lilleshall Company
Sir John Leveson became Earl Gower in 1746. His son Granville Leveson Gower became the second Earl in 1754. They owned limestone quarries and coal mines in Shropshire and had significant land holdings across the country.
Granville Leveson Gower was elected to Parliament in 1744. With the death of his elder brother in 1746, he became known by the courtesy title of Viscount Trentham until he succeeded his father as Earl Gower in 1754. He built the earlier Lilleshall Hall, converting a 17th-century house located in the village of Lilleshall into a country residence around the late 1750s. [1]
He remained active in politics until his retirement later in 1794. In 1786, he was created Marquess of Stafford as a reward for his services. He dies in 1803. [1] He took an active interest in the efficient running of his local estates, including those at Sherrifhales, Lilleshall, Donnington Wood, St Georges, Priorslee, Wombridge and Snedshill. [2]
The second Earl’s brother-in-law was Francis, 3rd Duke of Bridgewater, who was the originator of the Bridgewater Canal which carried coal out of his mines in the Manchester area. Earl Gower was introduced to the brothers Thomas and John Gilbert John Gilbert was instrumental in the construction of the Bridgewater Canal. Along with the Gilbert brothers, the second Earl formed the Lilleshall Partnership in 1764. Initially, it focused on improving the extraction and supply of lime for use in agriculture and as a flux in iron-making. [2]
The Earl had a vested interest in producing and delivering limestone as cheaply as possible. The Lilleshall Partnership recognised that a better communication system was required between its widely dispersed sites and in 1765 began the construction of a 5.5 mile long canal. It ran from the Earl’s holdings in Donnington Wood to wharves at Pave Lane and was known as the Donnington Wood Tug Boat Canal.
Large scale iron making began in the parish of Lilleshall in 1785 when a blast furnace was operating at Donnington Wood. The works was started by William Reynolds and Joseph Rathbone. By 1802 there were two furnaces and a third was added in that year.
By 1802, the partnership and its associated companies were dissolved and replaced by The Lilleshall Company which over time developed interests in mechanical engineering, coal mining, iron and steel making and brickworks. The company was noted for its winding, pumping and blast engines and operated a private railway network. It also constructed railway locomotives from 1862 to 1888. [2]
In 1880, the Lilleshall Company became a Public company. After the Second World War its mines were nationalised as was the Lilleshall Iron and Steel Co under the Iron and Steel Act but then denationalised in 1954 and sold back to Lilleshall Company. The company’s railways were closed in 1969. [2]
The Mines
The Friends of Granville Country Park tell us that the Lilleshall Company “sank its first deep mine at Waxhill Barracks in 1818 and another the Freehold pit, at about the same time. The Muxton Bridge pit was opened by 1840. There were over 400 acres of coalpits and waste tips in the area in the 1840s. Their production was running at some 100,000 tons of coal a year with 50,000 tons of iron ore. ” [2]
Map of Muxton Bridge, Waxhill Barracks and Barnyard Collieries. This image was shared by Brian Edwards on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 29th September 2022. It shows the rail network prior to the installation of the cutoff line, Granville Colliery sits off the bottom of this image, (c) Unknown. [14]
Granville Colliery
“By 1860, the Granville pit had been sunk and sinking of the Grange (originally the Albert and Alexander) pit began in 1864. Grange Colliery, Granville Colliery, The Muxton Bridge, Woodhouse and Stafford Collieries were known as the Deepside Mines.” [2]
Granville Colliery was nationalised after the Second World War. It remained under National Coal Board control until closure in 1979. At the time of closure it was employing 560 people. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Sharon Bradburn on 10th July 2018, (c) Unknown. [4]
“From the late 19th century, coal mining gradually declined. The Waxhill barracks colliery ceased production in 1900 and Muxton Bridge soon after. The Freehold colliery closed in 1928 and only the Grange and Granville collieries survived until nationalisation in 1947. In 1951 the two were connected underground and from 1952 the Grange served mainly to ventilate the Granville. In 1979 the Granville colliery, which employed 560 men, was closed. It was the last coal mine in Shropshire.” [2]
Bob Yate tells us that, “The most prolific of the collieries, [Granville Colliery] supplied the LNWR, GWR and Cambrian Railways with locomotive coal, and latterly also to Ironbridge ‘B’ Power Station. In 1896, there were 177 underground and 67 surface workers. Later the pit had a fairly consistent workforce of around 300 men, but after the closure of the nearby Kemberton colliery in 1967, this grew to 900 men, but shrank again to around 600 in the early 1970s. Meanwhile, the annual output had grown from around 300-350,000 tons to 600,000 tons in the late 1960s.” [25: p16]
An early photograph of Granville Pit, taken from the West in around 1900. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Ray Robinson on 20th May 2024, (c) Unknown. [6]
This extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1881/1882 shows the full length of the Mineral Railway branch from the East side of the map extracts above which show Old Lodge Furnaces. It is worth noting the loop which allowed locomotives to run round their trains just to the West of the Colliery site. [26]
An extract from the ERSI satellite imagery provided by the National Library of Scotland. The two lanes which appear on the map extract above can easily be seen on this satellite image. The line of the old Mineral Railway is also easy to make out. Nothing remains of the old colliery buildings. [27]
A similar extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1901/1902. In 20 years some changes have occurred. The more southerly of the two colliery buildings has been enlarged and the new tramway/tramroad has been provided onto the spoil heap North of the standard-gauge mineral railway terminus, [28]
This map extract comes from the 1925/1927 edition of the 25″ Ordnance Survey. The screens have been built and some modifications to the internal tramway layout have occurred. [19]
The Colliery site on the 1:10,000 Ordnance Survey published in 1954. The tramway to the spoil heap has been relocated and the buildings on site have been altered. [30]
The colliery site on the 1:10,000 Ordnance Survey published in 1967. A complete refurbishment of the buildings above ground has taken place. The screens building is different and the area to the East of the railway has seen significant reconstruction. An internal tramway can now be seen to the South and East of the standard gauge line. [31]
This extract from the same Ordnance Survey sheet of 1967 shows the wider area close to Granville Colliery and the rationalisation which had by then taken place. The line North off this extract heads for the site of Muxtonbridge Colliery where trains to the Donnington Sidings would once have reversed. The line leaving the extract to the West runs on to the rest of the Lilleshall Company’s network. [31]
By 1970, this was the layout of the lines between the mainline at Donnington and the Colliery. This hand-drawn image appears in Bob Yate’s book. [25: p119]
Having looked at maps showing the Granville Colliery site at different points in its history, some photographs will help us better to envisage the site.
The picture referred to by Cliff Hewitt in his notes above. The image was shared by Cliff Hewitt on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 1st October 2017. [44]
What appears to be a train of empties at the screens at Granville Colliery. [11]
The same location but after the rail link was severed. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Linda Howard on 9th March 2014. [18]
A view of the screens from behind. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 30th January 2015. [43]
Granville Colliery had its own 2ft 3in narrow gauge railway/tramway underground and close to the main shafts, battery powered locomotives were used below ground. …
Under the head gear at Granville Colliery. Coal was lifted up the shaft and run off to left to what appears to be a tippler. From there the coal went down to the screens. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 1st March 2014 by Marcus Keane. [20]
The same lines seen from the opposite direction and from above. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 1st March 2014 by Marcus Keane. [21]
Two of the tubs/wagons used underground are seen in this image which was shared by John Wood on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 30th January 2015. [23]
Underground, there was an extensive network of 2ft 3in gauge lines which were initially served by horse power but which were later to see a number of dedicated battery-powered locomotives in use.
The underground workshop/garage at Granville Colliery in 1958. Granville had three English Electric battery locos and the garage had battery charging benches on either side of the rails. This image was shared by Cliff Hewitt on 22nd November 2015 on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group. [24]
Granville Colliery had English Electric battery locos, picture is of the loco garage with the 3.3kv battery chargers to the left of frame switchgear to the right & a loco in the background ready for a battery change. This image was shared by Cliff Hewitt as a comment under a post by Ray Pascal, dated 18th November 2015, on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group. [24]
A loco battery changeout. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 18th November 2015 by Cliff Hewitt. [24]
Old Lodge Furnaces
In 1824 the company commissioned two new blast furnaces. They were named the Old Lodge furnaces because of their proximity to the site of an old hunting lodge which was demolished in 1820. In March 1825 the Lilleshall Company paid the Coalbrookdale Company £2,392 for the works. George Roden, a stonemason from the Nabb, was paid £425 in 1825 and just over £777 in 1826 for erecting loading ramps and the retaining walls. In 1830 the Donnington Wood and the Old Lodge ironworks together produced 15,110 tons. A third furnace was added in 1846 and two more in 1859. New blast beam engines, manufactured by the Lilleshall Company, were installed in 1862 and the height of the furnaces was increased from 50 to 71 feet at about the same time.
Limestone came, via the canal, from the Lilleshall quarries and the coal (coke) and iron stone from the local pits via an extensive system of tramways, some of which, were later converted to standard gauge railways.
The Old Lodge Furnaces produced cold-blast pig iron of the finest quality, but eventually it could not compete with cheaper iron made elsewhere and in 1888 the last of the Old Lodge furnaces was blown out. The furnaces were demolished in 1905 by Thomas Molineaux Jnr, including a tall chimney 140 feet high by 13 feet diameter, known locally as “The Lodge Stack”. In 1956 the stone was reused for St Mathew’s Church. Thereafter the company concentrated all its iron and steel making at Priorslee.
An artist’s impression of what the Old Lodge Furnaces site would have looked like in its heyday. The view is from the Northeast. The canal arm which served the furnaces can be seen entering the sketch from the bottom-right (the North). The image is a little misleading as it shows narrow-boats on the canal when in fact tub-boats would have been used. The tub-boats would have been drawn by horses. The rails shown as a schematic representation of the rails on the site throughout its history and show an engine shed on the North end of the fun of furnaces. [My photograph, 27th July 2023]
This map extract is taken from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1881/1882. The canal arm enters from the top of the extract and railways/tramways are shown in preponderance, with the furnaces themselves in a row running North-South just above the centre of the extract. The line running off the extract to the East heads towards Granville Colliery. The line running off the extract to the South runs to Dawes Bower and Grange Colliery. Of the lines exiting the extract to the West, one, running Northwest (at the top corner of the lower image) is the old tramway link to Lubstree Wharf. There are also two lines leaving the bottom-left corner of the lower image, the lower line runs towards collieries/shafts local to the furnaces and is probably a tramway at a higher level than the upper of the two lines which is in cutting and is the connection from Old Lodge Furnaces into the wider Mineral Railway network belonging to the Lilleshall Company. [46]
This extract from RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery shows the area of the furnaces in the 21st century, a little more of the area immediately to the North than appears on the OS map extract above and less on the East-West axis. The turquoise lines are symbolic representations of the tramway network which preceded the mineral railway which is represented by the purple lines. The two tramway routes leading North out of this and the map extract served, from the left: Meadow Colliery (which appears in the first map extract below); Barn Colliery; Waxhill Barracks and Barracks Colliery; and Muxton Bridge Colliery. (That line, from Muxton Bridge Colliery to the site of Old Lodge Furnaces is illustrated on the map extracts which follow the one covering Meadow Colliery). [47]
A view of Old Lodge Furnaces from the East. [4] (This image was first produced in the ‘London Trade Exchange’ of 2nd January 1875. Some of the tramways are visible, as are the coke ovens in the distance, and the engine house on the right, although the engraver has omitted the chimney beside the engine house.) [25: p11]
The site of the furnaces became the main marshalling are for coal wagons from a number of the collieries, but particularly Granville Colliery
The Lilleshall Company Tramway and Railway Networks
A significant network of tramways and later railways served the Lilleshall Company’s interests in East Shropshire.
Bob Yate provides a sketch of the whole of the Lilleshall Company’s network of railways. This extract from the sketch map shows the length of their railways between the Humber Arm and Granville Colliery. The locations shown on this extract are: 3. Old Lodge Furnaces; 8. The Humber Arm Railway; 9. Lubstree Wharf; 10. The Donnington (LNWR) exchange sidings and the Midland Ironworks; 13. Lodge Trip; 19. Granville Colliery; 20. Barn Pits Colliery; 21. Waxhill Barracks Colliery; 22. Muxton Bridge Colliery; 23. Freehold Colliery; and 24. Shepherd Slag Crushing Plant. Yaye does not record Meadow Colliery which was close to the Donnington Wood Canal to the Southwest of Muxton Bridge Colliery and apparently tramway served until its closure. [2: p38]
The northernmost point on the network of tramways/tramroads was a wharf on the Humber Arm of the Newport Branch of the Shropshire Union Canal. That short branch canal ran from Kynnersley to Lubstree close to The Humbers, a hamlet located to the North of the old LNWR mainline through Donnington and on the North side of Venning Barracks, the present base of the 11th Signal Brigade and Headquarters West Midlands, part of the British Army’s 3rd UK Division. The early tramroad North of the old LNWR line was later replaced by a standard-gauge line. The length of tramroad to the South of the LNWR line was eventually abandoned in favour of a standard gauge line to the East.
Approximately the same area as shown on the map extract above, as it appears on the RailMapOnline.com satellite imagery. The purple lines are the approximate line of the Mineral Railway that replaced the tramway we will following first. Satellite imagery shows nothing of the Canal Arm to the North of this image. Heading to the North from here, the line of the canal traverses open fields and then Aqueduct plantation. The trees in the plantation obscure any direct evidence of the old canal arm from above and, similarly, the location of its junction with the Shropshire Union Canal Newport Branch. Significant work has taken place at this location to convert derelict buildings to housing. [47]
The modern home created from the goods shed at Lubstree. [48]
As shown on Yate’s sketch plan above, the line ran South towards the LNWR main line, passing under it by means of the bridge. The LNWR line has been replaced by the A518.
This extract from the 1882 25″ Ordnance Survey shows the point at which the LNWR bridged the Lilleshall Company’s tramway/railway. It also shows the old tramway route continuing to the South-southeast and the later standard-gauge mineral railway curving round to the Northeast to run parallel to the LNWR main line. [49]
This RailMapOnline satellite image shows the features noted on map extract above and shows the dramatic changes which have occurred in the immediate vicinity of the old tramway. The tramway route is not followed by RailMapOnline South-southeast of Wellington Road. It runs Southeast towards Old Lodge Furnaces. [47]
After passing under the LNWR main line, the Lilleshall Company’s Mineral Railway turned Northeast to run alongside the LNWR for a short distance.
This map extract shows the mineral railway curving away from the LNWR mainline. There were exchange sidings at this location and lines which accessed a Timber Yard and the Midland Ironworks, both on the East side of the LNWR mainline. [50]
On the curve on Donnington Sidings looking East. This is the same train as shown on the next picture. This image was shared by Carole Anne Huselbee on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 14th September 2014. [51]
Donnington Sidings looking Northwest. A rake of empties setting off for Granville Colliery behind an 0-6-0ST locomotive. Wellington Road Crossing is a short distance ahead of the locomotive. This photograph was shared by Carole Anne Huselbee on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 5th October 2014. [52]
This next extract from the 25″Ordnance Survey of 1882 shows the mineral railway heading Southeast and crossing, first, what is now Wellington Road, and then running parallel to the modern Donnington Wood Way and crossing School Road. [49]
The route of the old mineral railway runs parallel to Donnington Wood Way, approximately on the line of the footpath shown on this Google Maps extract. The red flag marker highlights its route. [Google Maps, July 2023]
A closer view of the point where the mineral railway crossed the old Wellington Road. The photograph below shows a locomotive approaching the level-crossing from the Southeast. [47]
Wellington Road Crossing. The photograph below shows a locomotive entering the level-crossing from the Southeast. This picture was shared by Carole Anne Huselbee on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 5th October 2014. [53]This crossing was located at what was called the Coal Wharf on the old Wellington Road just over & up from the now Ladbrokes Bookies. The line ran from the pit and approached it via what is now a footpath between “The Fields” (a lane to the houses at the bottom of bell rec.) and Donnington Wood Way then across the first gated crossing at the bottom of School Road and on past the end of what is now Van Beeks Motor Spares to the second crossing. The road was wide so gates with supporting heavy caster type wheels allowed them to open seperately. The photograph shows NCB loco No 10 crossing the main Telford to Newport road (A518) at Donnington in 1975 with a trip working from Granville Colliery to the exchange sidings which were just the other side of the road. The MGR hopper wagons would then be moved by a Class 47 to Ironbridge, with run rounds at both Wellington and Madeley Junction. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Peter Bushell on 21st August 2023, The gates in this image are now in use by Telford Steam Railway. (c) Unknown. [7]
Possibly the same locomotive, definitely at the same location as the image above. This image was shared by Phil Neal on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 8th August 2017, (c) Unknown. [12]
Locomotive No. 10 (a Hunslet 0-6-0 ) waiting with its train to cross Wellington Road. This photo was shared by Lin Keska on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 2nd May 2017. [54]
Another view of the School Road Crossing. This photo was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 8th September 2014. [57]
An 0-6-0ST pulls a train of empties back from Donnington to Lodge and Granville Colliery. It is seen here crossing School Road. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Jim Walton on 16th August 2023, (c) Unknown. [13]
From the School Road Crossing the line ran Southeast. Its route is now a public footpath separated from the modern Donnington Wood Way by a hedgeline.
Somewhere Southeast of School Road on 8th September 1969, this view looks Northwest and shows NCB Loco No. 8 hauling empty hopper wagons towards Granville Colliery. This image was shared on Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 14th September 2014. [58]
Heading up hill from Donnington towards the Lodge and Granville Colliery. [11]
An 0-6-0ST (possibly No.8) pulls is train of hopper wagons up the direct route from Coal Wharf (Donnington) to Granville Pit (not going via the location of Muxton Bridge Pit) .This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 10th March 2020 by John Wood. [36]NCB 0-6-0ST No. 8 taking a train of empty hoppers up the line from Donnington. This appears to have been taken on the cutoff link avoiding the need for reversing at Muxonbridge Colliery. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 20th March 2020. [8]This photograph shows ‘The Colonel’, an 0-6-0ST, running down to the Sidings at Donnington. The image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Clive Sanbrook on 27th March 2020. [32]
A later locomotive crossing the same road. This image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 15th September 2014. [35]
Having climbed up from the exchange sidings trains of empties entered the area of what was once Old Lodge Furnaces.
By 1970, this was the layout of the lines between the mainline at Donnington and the Colliery. This hand-drawn image appears in Bob Yate’s book. [25: p119]
Granville Colliery’s Diesel Loco (NCB No. 2D?) hauling a rake of empty coal hopper wagons on the lines to the West of Granville Colliery. This photo was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 5th October 2014. [33]
The original engine shed. This building was demolished and the NCB built a replacement some distance away. It looks in a poor condition. The loco on the left looks like the 0-6-0 Barclay tank No 11 or one of the large ex Taff Vale locos. The one on the right is an unidentified Saddle Tank. This image was sent to me by David Clarke the author of a book about Telford’s railways, (c) Unknown. [37]
A view of the NCB-built engine shed noted in the image above. After the NCB took over the collieries owned by the Company, Granville Colliery supplied coal to Buildwas Power Station and the coal trains were worked by a range of locos down the 1.5 miles to Donnington. Granville Colliery had a decent sized shed and in later years used Austerity 0-6-0ST tanks but in Lilleshall Company days the bigger engines were the ex-TVR and Barry railway engines. This image and the accompanying text were shared by Marcus Keane on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 15th September 2015. [38]Possibly locomotive No. 8 on shed. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 20th March 2020. [8]
This view from a location on the spoil heap to the South of the last image shows the later engine shed, built by the NCB, and two locomotives in steam marshalling wagons. The wagons closest to the camera appear to be empties which will probably be pushed towards the colliery screens which are a distance off to the right of this image. The photograph was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Paul Wheeler on 25th May 2018. [34]
The ‘Colonel’, with a train of full wagons having left Granville Colliery and about to marshall its train for onward movement to Donnington Sidings. [11]
‘The Colonel‘ again! ‘The Colonel‘ was named after Colonel Harrison, Chairman of Harrison’s Grove Colliery. He was also Chairman of Cannock & Rugeley Colliery. After a spell at Area Central Workshops – May 1960 to June 1961, ‘The Colonel‘ went back to Grove Colliery then to Coppice Colliery at Heath Hayes for a few months in 1963 before transfer to Granville Colliery in November 1963. This image was shared on the Telford memories Facebook Group by Metsa Vaim EdOrg on 24th October 2020. [41]
Towards the end of steam, this loco is bringing its train South from the Depot towards the location of the engine shed which is off the picture to the left beyond the stored coal. The locomotive is ‘Granville No. 5‘. This image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 15th February 2017 by Lin Keska. [40]
This photograph was taken at a similar location to those above. At the centre of the image is the weighbridge. Granville Colliery itself can be made out on the horizon. The image was shared by John Wood on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 30th January 2015. [42]
The Lilleshall network continued to the West and Southwest of Granville Colliery and Lodge Sidings. These next photographs cover the length of the line through Oakengates to Hollingworth Sidings and Stafford and Dark Lane Collieries.
The dotted lines on this sketch map are private railways. The Lilleshall Company’s main line runs from Granville and Grange Collieries in the top-right of the sketch map via Old Lodge Ironworks and Priorslee Furnaces down to Hollinswood. This sketch map was included on the Miner’s Walk website which provides information about the local area. [10]
Grange Colliery, close to Granville Colliery operated independently at first and along with Granville Colliery survived to be nationalised in 1947. In 1951, the two were connected underground and from 1952 Grange Colliery served mainly to ventilate Granville Colliery. [2]
The monochrome photographs included here were taken by a number of different photographers. Where possible permission has been sought to include those photographs in this article. Particularly, there are a significant number of photographs taken by A.J.B. Dodd which appear here which were first found on various Facebook Groups. A number were supplied direct by Mike Dodd, A.J.B. Dodd’s son, who curates the photographs taken by his father. Particular thanks are expressed to Mike Dodd for entering into email correspondence about all of these photographs and for his generous permission to use them in this article. [59]
Grange Colliery as it appears on the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1901, published in 1902. The railway lines shown in the immediate area of the shafts and slag heaps were internal lines unconnected to the wider Lilleshall Company network. A single line ran to Dawes Bower where transshipment to the standard gauge Lilleshall Company network took place. [60]
The same area as shown on the OS map extract above. This image comes from Google Maps. What appears to be a caravan park on the site of the old colliery is Telford Naturist Club. The buildings to the top-right of the image are the Cottage Boarding Kennels and Cattery. [Google Maps, September 2025]
This extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1901 shows the point where the branch-line to Grange Colliery met the main Lilleshall line. The line from Grange Colliery enters bottom-right. At the top-right of this extract two sets of lines are shown. The upper lines run towards Donnington sidings, the lower lines connect to Granville Colliery. The lines leaving the top of the extract are local lines serving the area immediately around what were Old Lodge Furnaces. The line leaving the west (left) edge of the extract is the Lilleshall Company mainline to Priorslee and Hollinswood. As can be seen at the centre of the extract, a loco bringing wagons from Grange Colliery would need to cross the mainline before reversing its wagons onto the mainline and, depending on its destination, then head for Donnington or Hollinswood. The sidings shown on this extract were also used for storing wagons before onward transit to their ultimate destination. [61]
A short distance to the West of the sidings at Lodge, a line running North from Donnington Wood Brick and Tile Works met the Lilleshall Company’s main line at a triangular junction. [62]
Donnington Wood Brick & Tile Works were conveniently sited next to reserves of Clay. The Works had their own internal railway with a Self-acting Inclined Plane. [63]
Donnington Wood Brick & Tile Works seen from the air, from the Northeast. This image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Marcus Keane on 27th March 2019. [64]
A much closer view of the circular Hoffman Kiln taken in 1966. This image was shared by Marcus Keane on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 23rd September 2017. [65]
The location of the Donnington Wood Brick and Tile Works plotted on modern satellite imagery from Google Maps. Properties on Cloisters Way sit directly over the site of the Hoffman Kiln. [Google Maps, December 2023]
West along the main line from the short branch to Donnington Wood Brickworks there were sidings adjacent to Rookery Road. I have not been able to find them on any maps.
This extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey shows the Lilleshall Mainline running South West from the junction which served the Donnington Wood Brick & Tile Works and covers the approximate location of the Rookery Road Sidings. [66]
This view looks East towards the triangular junction serving Donnington Wood Brick Works, (c) A. J. B. Dodd. [59]An 0-6-0ST Saddle Tank participating in track removal at Rookery Road Sidings. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 28th June 2020, (c) A. J. B. Dodd. [9]
I believe this photograph was taken from a point close to the bridge over Gower Street. It looks East and shows Rookery Road Sidings in the distance, (c) A. J. B. Dodd. [59]
Moss Road/Gower Street Railway Bridge before demolition. This is a photo of a photo which was behind glass, hence the glare. It was shared by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on the Oakengates History Group including surrounding areas Facebook Group on 17th July 2018. [68]
The junction for New Yard Engineering Works was adjacent to Wrockwardine Villa. The engine shed is visible bottom-centre of the extract. One of two bridges which crossed the Lilleshall Company’s Railway appears towards the bottom-left of the image. I believe that this was known as the ‘Tin Bridge’. [69]
A very similar area to that covered on the map extract above. The image comes, again, from RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery. Wrockwardine Villa is centre-top in this image. [47]
New Yard Engineering Works. … Gower Street runs North-South on the right of the map extract New Works buildings faced East onto the road. The locomotive shed can be seen to the top-left of the image. The workshops which stood alongside it were not built by the time of the Ordnance Survey (1901). [72]
Sketch Railway Plan/Map of New Yard Engineering Works, Gower Street, St Georges showing the layout in 1959. The workshops adjacent to the Engine Shed are shown, top-left. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 1st April 2023 by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley. [73]
A aerial postcard image of New Yard Engineering Works, the camera is to the Southeast of the Works and as a result shows, at the top-right, the Engine Shed and Workshop. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on 17th February 2019. [74]
The Lilleshall Company mainline curves to the South through the area known as ‘The Nabb’. Two bridges are shown. The one just visible top-right is the ‘Tin Bridge. Prior to the construction of the standard gauge mineral railway a horse-drawn tramway ran North-South through this location, running down the side of the terraced housing adjacent to the bridge. The second bridge appears bottom-left. It was a more substantial structure. [75]
The Tin Bridge again with Diamond Row above and to the right. This photograph was taken during the Lilleshall Company’s last run on their Mineral line, with the Engine ‘Alberta’ in 1959. The Photo was taken by the late Edgar Meeson, cousin of Frank Meeson. The image was shared in the Oakengates History Group and surrounding areas Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on 27th January 2021. [78]
This is the second of the two bridges which crossed the Lilleshall Main Line in ‘The Nabb’.The picture looks to the Southwest and comes from the Howard Williams Collection and was shared on the Oakengates History Group including surrounding areas Facebook Group on 27th February 2014 by Frank Meeson. [79]
From this location the Lilleshall Company’s line curved round to the South and crossed Station Hill, Oakengates.
Station Hill, Oakengates at the turn of the 20th century. This postcard view looks West across the Lilleshall Company’s line down the hill towards the centre of Oakengates. The crossing keeper’s beehive hut is visible to the left of the road. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 24th October 2018 by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley. [81]
Two further images of the Station Hill Crossing. …
Looking South across Station Hill. The beehive keeper’s hut stands across the road from the camera. This image was shared by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 16th May 2021. [82]
The line crossed Station Hill in Oakengates on the level with the old canal running beneath the road. Looking West from the crossing, train crews would have had a glimpse of Oakengates (Market) Railway Station on the LNWR/LMS/BR Coalport Branch. The station appears on the left of this map extract. [83]
South of Station Hill the line ran at a high level above sidings which served Snedshill Ironworks. The next few images are relatively grainy as they are enlargements from aerial images from 1948. …
The Lilleshall main line runs across the top of the first of these images and behind the house at the top-right of the image. Wagons sit in the sidings associated with Snedshill Ironworks. [84]
On the South side of Canongate, Snedshill Ironworks dominates this map extract. The Shrewsbury to Birmingham main line can be seen entering a tunnel at the bottom-left of this image. Towards the left edge of the extract, the LNWR Coalport Branch runs in cutting crossed by a number of footbridges/access bridges. The Works sidings on the West of the Works terminate on the site, whereas those to the East of the building run off the bottom of the extract to make a junction with the Coalport Branch. The old canal was in use as a reservoir alongside the Works and the Lilleshall Company’s mainline runs alongside that reservoir to its East. [87]
Two further extracts from Image No. EAW013746 taken in 1948 looking East, which show the mineral railway running South passing the Snedshill Ironworks (at the bottom of the first image).
The darker area above the Ironworks is a remaining length of canal with a retaining wall immediately beyond which supports the Lilleshall Company’s main line. [85]
The Lilleshall Company’s main line is on the right side of this image. Canongate can be seen at the top of the image with the reservoir which was once a length of the Shropshire Canal to the South of Canongate alongside the Lilleshall main line. Snedshill Ironworks sidings pass under Canongate and run towards the bottom-left of the image. [86]
Another extract from an aerial image which was taken shortly after those above. The wagons on this image are in the same location as those on the image above. This extract from EAW013752 on the Britain From Above website looks over Snedshill Ironworks (bottom-left), with the short length of canal behind them, towards Priorslee. The Lilleshall Company’s mainline enters just below centre-left and runs at an angle towards the top-right of the image. The Greyhound bridge on the old A5 is alongside the level crossing which took the mineral railway across the A5. The Greyhound bridge took the A5 over the LNWR Coalport Branch (in deep cutting) and a feeder line from/to the sidings at the Snedshill Ironworks which met the Coalport Branch just beyond the bridge. [88]
Lines from Snedshill Ironworks join the Coalport Branch in passing under what became the A5 a little to the South of the Works themselves. The Lilleshall Company mainline crosses the road at level. A short branch runs off towards the Snedshill Brickworks. The GWR line from Shrewsbury to Wolverhampton runs in tunnel from top to bottom of the map extract. [90]
In the 21st century the area covered by the 25″ OS Map extract above has changed considerably. Only the GWR mainline from Shrewsbury to Wolverhampton remains of the lines on the OS Map extract. On this satellite image it is represented by the turquoise line and is running in tunnel. The Greyhound Roundabout has replaced what was the A5 (B5061 in 21st century) bridge over the Coalport Branch. The level crossing shown below, is long gone. The Lilleshall Company buildings have been replaced by Wickes and Aldi! The A442 dual carriageway dominates the area. [47]
This photograph looks across the roof of the Snedshill Brick and Tile Works towards Priorslee Furnaces. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 24th November 2015 by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley. [92]
Priorslee Furnaces and Steel Works in 1901. The Lilleshall Company’s main line runs diagonally across this map extract from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner. [93]
Priorslee Furnaces viewed from the Southeast. This image was shared by Paul Wheeler on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 28th November 2017. [94]
An aerial image of the extensive steelworks and slag reduction plant at Priorslee. The blast furnaces were decommissioned in 1958 and the internal system closed. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Lin Keska on 22nd February 2017. [95]
This postcard view of Priorslee Furnaces was taken in 1899. The rail access to the plant is emphasised by the locomotive and wagons in the foreground. The image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Lin Keska on 27th June 2020. [96]
Two Lilleshall Company locomotives (Peckett 0-4-0ST No.10 and 0-6-2T No. 3 which was once GWR No. 589) in attendance at the demolition of a 98ft high concrete coal bunker at Priorslee Furnaces circa 1936. This work was taking place as part of the demolition of the former steelworks site. The image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley (courtesy of John Wood) on 1st December 2019. I understand that the original image is held in the Archives of the Ironbridge Gorge Museum Trust. [97]
This extract from the 1882 25″ Ordnance Survey shows the area immediately Southeast of Priorslee Furnaces The Lilleshall Company’s main line split in three directions – to the South it runs into Hollinswood Sidings and up to Hollinswood Junction, where it joins the GWR mainline, Southeast it continues towards Stafford Colliery, and Northeast towards Woodhouse and Lawn Collieries. [98]
The remaining length of the Lilleshall Company’s mainline served Stafford Colliery (passing Darklane Colliery on its way East. This extract is taken from the 1901 25″ Ordnance Survey. Hollinswood Junction on the GWR mainline between Shrewsbury and Wolverhampton just sneaks into the bottom-left corner of this map extract. [99]
Hollinswood Sidings and Hollinswood Junction, to the South of Priorslee Furnaces and Steelworks. The GWR line between Shrewsbury and Wolverhampton runs from the top-left to the bottom-right. The LNWR Coalport Branch enters top-left and leaves the map extract to the left of centre at the bottom of the image. The line turning off the GWR mainline to the South served a series industrial undertakings to the East of the old Shropshire Canal. The Lilleshall Company’s sidings enter the map extract centre-top and meet the GWR mainline at Hollinswood Junction. [100]
This is another area of Telford which has seen dramatic change. The GWR line ‘turquoise’ remains, the LNWR Coalport branch (thicker purple) has long gone. As have all the Lilleshall Company’s lines (thinner purple). The M54, the A442, Queensway and Hollinswood Interchange dominate the modern image. [47]
Locomotive 48516 heading what seems to be a train of empty coal wagons and facing towards Wolverhampton. Hollinswood Sidings can be seen beyond the locomotive. The image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Lin Keska on 4th April 2018. [101]
Lilleshall Company Locomotives
The Lilleshall Company operated a number of steam engines which it picked up from various sources and some of which it built itself. The remainder of this article is no more than a glimpse of these locomotives on the Lilleshall Company’s network. The authoritative treatment of the motive power on the Lilleshall Company network is the book by Bob Yate, “The Railways and Locos of the Lilleshall Company.” [25]
Yate tells us that, because the Lilleshall Company’s network was extensive, it needed a considerable number of locomotives to operate it. He continues: “Much of the traffic was heavy, so it comes as no surprise to find that the company turned to acquiring former main line company locomotives for some of their more arduous duties. The total number of locomotives rose from four during the mid-1850s to eight by 1870, down to five by 1875, then six by 1886, increasing to nine in 1900 until 1920 when there were eleven. By the 1930s the number was back down to nine.” [25: p67] After WW2, numbers were reduced to five, and once closure was approaching all five were scrapped and two other locomotives were purchased.
Peckett 0-4-0ST, Lilleshall Locomotive No. 10 at Priorslee, (c) Industrial Railway Society, Ken Cooper collection. This photograph was shared by Andy Rose on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 29th September 2019. [103]
Former Barry Railway ‘B1’ Class 0-6-2T No. 60 (also ex-GWR No. 251) which when purchased by the Lilleshall Company was given No. 5, photographer not known. This photograph was shared by Andy Rose on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 29th September 2019. [103]
Lilleshall Company No. 9, an 0-6-0ST locomotive built by Robert Stephenson & Co. Ltd. It was bought by the Lilleshall Company in 1904 and lasted until 1929, (c) F. Jones Collection. This photograph was shared by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 27th November 2017. [104]
Lilleshall built 0-4-0ST, Constance and Andrew Barclay 0-6-0T No. 11 at New Yard Locomotive Shed. The image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on 4th April 2021. [105]
Lilleshall Company Locomotive No. 12, (ex-GWR No. 2794) 0-6-0PT sits a New Yard. This photograph was shared by John Wood on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 28th June 2020. [107]
Lilleshall Company Locomotive, Prince of Wales (ex-Lever Brothers, Port Sunlight Railway) 0-4-0ST also sits a New Yard This photograph was also shared by John Wood on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 29th March 2018. [107]
National Coal Board Locomotives
With nationalisation, the NCB took over Granville and Grange pits and continued to use the northern length of the Lilleshall Network until closure of Granville Colliery in 1979. Granville Colliery supplied coal to Buildwas Power Station and the coal trains were worked by a range of locos down the 1.5 miles to Donnington. Austerity 0-6-0ST steam locomotives were the most common form of motive power until steam was replaced by diesel locomotives.
Between 1948 and 1964, 77 new “Austerity” 0-6-0ST locomotives were built for the NCB.
NCB Hunslet Austerity 0-6-0ST Granville No. 5 at School Road Crossing. [108]
When steam was replaced by diesel, the NCB deployed Hunslet 0-6-0DH locos at Granville Colliery. Between 1965 and 1989 well over 50 0-6-0DH shunters were built by Hunslet (Leeds) for the British market. More were also built to a variety of gauges for users abroad in South America, Africa, Europe and the Indian subcontinent. The Hunslet 0-6-0DHs were surprisingly powerful for their size, and their short wheelbase enabled them to operate in locations where other locomotives may struggle. [109]
Typical NCB Hunslet 0-6-0DH locomotives. [110]
Models of the Hunslet 0-6-0DH are produced in OO gauge by Revolution Trains and in N gauge by the N Gauge Society.
CAD 3/4 image of Hunslet 0-6-0DH in 00 Gauge. [110]
What can be seen today?
All of the Granville Colliery buildings have been removed.
All that remains of the Old Lodge furnaces after extensive dismantling and site restoration involving raising of the ground levels are parts of the brickwork of the first three furnaces.
The high walls behind the furnaces are the remains of the furnace loading ramps. On the right of the ramp walls hidden in the trees is a retaining wall in front which was the blowing house. Behind the loading ramps were calcining kilns which were added in 1870 to improve the quality of the iron ore. Remains of the Lodge Furnaces, Tug Boat Canal and other buildings can be seen around Granville Country Park.
The Lilleshall Company Railways have disappeared completely.
G. F. R. Barker; Leveson-Gower, Granville (1721-1803); in Sydney Lee, (ed.); Dictionary of National Biography. Vol. 33; Smith Elder & Co., London, 1893.
The Jim Clemens Collection No. 2 – Steaming Through Shropshire Part 1; B&R Videos; and can be seen on Facebook at https://www.facebook.com/groups/265906436919058/search/?q=locomotive&locale=en_GB. B & R Video Productions produce a series of DVDs which have primarily been created by converting cine-film. One part of their library is the Jim Clemens Collection. These stills from the video are shared here with permission from Michael Clemens who holds the copyright on his father’s work. Michael is an author in his own right and maintains a website: https://www.michaelclemensrailways.co.uk. On that website there are details of all of the books he as published together with quite a bit of downloadable material including working timetables. His most relevant publication to this current article is: Michael Clemens; The Last Years of Steam in Shropshire and the Severn Valley; Fonthill Media Ltd, Stroud, Gloucestershire, 2017. That book contains two photographs which are similar to two of the images shown above (p67).
Many of the photographs taken by A.J.B. Dodd which appear in this article were first found on various Facebook Groups. A number were supplied direct by Mike Dodd, A.J.B. Dodd’s son who curates the photographs taken by his father. Particular thanks are expressed to Mike Dodd for entering into email correspondence about all of these photographs and for his generous permission to use them in this article.
On 27th September 2025 we marked the bicentenary of the Stockton & Darlington Railway which is accepted the world over as one of the most significant developments in the history of railways, the precursor of all that was to follow in the development of railway networks throughout the world. That day, Locomotion No. 1 (a replica appears in the featured image above) pulled a long train along the Stockton and Darlington Railway. …………
The logo for the series of events across the country to mark this significant anniversary. [46]
Andrew Wilson, writing in 2002, said that the Stockton & Darlington Railway (S&DR) “was incorporated in 1821. With the line from Stockton to Shildon opening on 27th September 1825. The S&DR became the world’s first steam-operated railway, although passenger services were initially horse-drawn; regular steam-powered passenger services commenced in 1833. In 1843 the line was extended to Bishop Auckland, and Barnard Castle was reached in 1856. Additional lines were soon planned, and one of these the South Durham & Lancashire Union Railway sought to link Bishop Auckland and Tebay so that coke from the Durham coalfields could be easily moved to the Furness ironworks, and iron-ore moved back to Cleveland.” [1: p13]
The Institution of Civil Engineers says that “The Stockton and Darlington Railway (S&DR) was the first passenger railway to use steam trains to transport passengers.” [4] The Company started operations at the end of September 1825 and was eventually taken over by the North Eastern Railway in 1863 when “it consisted of 200 route miles (320km) and around 160 locomotives.” [4]
Network Rail says: “On 27th September 1825, the world’s first passenger train, hauled by George Stephenson’s Locomotion No.1, carried more than 400 people along the Stockton and Darlington Railway. The landmark event drew crowds of up to 40,000 people and marked the birth of modern passenger train travel.” [46]
Darren Caplan, chief executive of trade body the Railway Industry Association, said: “It is hard to overstate the benefits that the railway has brought, and continues to bring, not just to the UK, but also globally, since 1825. Rail networks don’t just keep people connected, they also play a crucial role in spurring economic growth, creating jobs, boosting sustainability, and bringing together local communities.” [46]
The Encyclopedia Brittanica speaks of the S&DR as “first railway in the world to operate freight and passenger services with steam traction.” [6]
The Friends of the Stockton & Darlington Railway say that the S&DR “demonstrated to the wider world that such a railway could be a technical and financial success. The S&DR made possible the railways that were to follow such as the Liverpool & Manchester Railway. … It was therefore the birthplace of the modern railways that we know today.” [5]
Asked, ‘What’s so special about the S&DR?’ Neil Hammond, the Chair of the Friends of the Stockton & Darlington Railway, said, “We would argue that it’s the railway that got the world on track.” [7]
J. S. Jeans, writing in 1875, somewhat effusively called the S&DR, “the greatest idea of modern times.” [9] (His book appears in the adjacent image.)
According to Hammond, the S&DR, for the first time, brought together various elements of engineering and ideas for what a railway could be, which gave the rest of the world a blueprint for how to build a recognisably modern railway. Anthony Coulls of the National Railway Museum said that, “It set the DNA for the railway system.” [7]
From the outset, it was much more than just a way of conveying coal, unlike many of the other early railways. Transport of other goods and regular passenger services were intrinsic to its operation and purpose. “It used a combination of horses, stationary steam engines and steam-powered locomotives to pull wagons along its 26 miles, from the coalfields of County Durham to the port on the River Tees at Stockton, via the then-village of Shildon and market town of Darlington. Signalling systems, timetables and the idea of stations were all developed by the S&DR.” [7]
“While there had been earlier wooden waggonways, metal plateways and the use of steam engines, it was the coming together of engineering excellence with the motivation, vision and financial backing, mainly from Darlington’s Quaker families, in particular Edward Pease, which made the S&DR a significant milestone in the creation of what we now think of as the modern railway system. It required business people to recognise the potential role of the railway for communities and businesses beyond the mineral industries and to invest in a service that anyone (the public) could buy into and make use of. In return, unlike earlier mineral waggonways, the rail infrastructure would be a permanent fixture with a regular service linking populated areas and so attract additional businesses and industries resulting in population growth and movement. … By 1830, the S&DR was already a network of main and branch lines and had demonstrated to others building railways elsewhere in the UK and abroad, the model of a permanent, profitable steam powered public railway.” [8]
Coulls said that “Engineers travelled from across Britain and the world to see the the railway in action, to replicate its successes and learn from its mistakes. Bigger railways, such as the Manchester to Liverpool line, followed soon after and within a decade there was a global ‘railway mania’, akin to the rapid development and impact of the internet in the 20th Century.” [7]
He continued: “The S&DR was not the first railway and it was rapidly eclipsed. But it proved the practicality of the steam locomotive pulling trains over long distances.” [7]
There have been quite a number of detractors over the years and questions have been raised about the true place of the S&DR in railway history. As Coulls said, “it was not the first railway and it was rapidly eclipsed.” [7]
What we do know is that at least 400 people (maybe 600) travelled by train on the Stockton and Darlington Railway on 27th September 1825 and we know that around 40,000 people turned up to witness the event. [46] What is it that makes that event remarkable enough to be seen as the moment that the modern railway was born?
Lets first, make sure that we have understood the story on the Stockton & Darlington Railway Company: …
A Short History of the Stockton & Darlington Railway
Coal Reserves in Co. Durham
Coalfields in the United Kingdom in the 19th century. [103]
The Durham Coalfield is continuous with the Northumberland Coalfield to its North. It extends from Bishop Auckland in the South to the boundary with the county of Northumberland along the River Tyne in the North, beyond which is the Northumberland Coalfield. [106]
The two contiguous coalfield areas were often referred to as the Durham and Northumberland Coalfield(s) or as the Great Northern Coalfield. [108]
Three major ‘measures’ of Coal exist(ed) in the Durham Coalfield:
A closer focus on the Durham Coalfield: from a pamphlet printed by the National Coal Board in the 1950s, courtesy of ‘Mining History UK’, www.mhuk.org.uk. [106]Early Collieries tended to be sited as close as possible to major rivers. This is true of the Durham Coalfield – along both the Tyne and the Wear. The Tees appears bottom-right in this sketch map and was outside the extent of the Durham coalfield. [104]The Durham Coalfield: showing the mining areas developed before 1800. Proximity to river courses was paramount in keeping transport costs as low as possible. It is noticeable again that the River Tees and Stockton and Darlington were well outside the coalfield to the South. [104]This drawing highlights the extended areas of coal mining in 1800-1825 and 1825-1850. The areas concerned remain significantly to the North of the River Tees (and, indeed, Darlington and Stockton). [104]A cross-section of the Coalfield looking North. [104]
THe UK was the first country to develop its coal resources to any appreciable extent. The Durham Coalfield was among the first to be worked. The initiative came largely from the Bishops of Durham. The accounts of the See of Durham between 1274-1345 include a reference to the profits of the Bishop’s coalmines. By the middle of the fourteenth century mining had become well established at Whickham and Gateshead on the south side of the Tyne. “In 1366-1367 coal from Winlaton was bought by Edward III for the works at Windsor Castle. Coalpits were also in operation at Ferryhill, Hett and Lanchester before 1350. However, the cheapness of transport enjoyed by the pits close to the rivers gave them a big advantage and even at the beginning of the seventeenth century, almost all the large collieries were along the Tyne. Development of the Wear valley reserves led to the increasing importance of Sunderland as an exporting port, and by the time of the Civil War, the town had become, next to Newcastle, the biggest centre of the trade in the British Isles. The growth in the trade from the Tyne was phenomenal. In the year ended at Michaelmas, 1564, almost 33,000 tons of coal were shipped from Newcastle: in 1685, the tonnage was 616,000 almost 19 times as much.” [106]
Development of the industry in South Durham did not lag much behind the rest of the County. “As far back as the fourteenth century, part of the Bishopric of Durham south of Bishop Auckland was being successfully worked for coal. The Upper Wear Valley between Durham City and Bishop Auckland was in the Middle Ages the most populous part of the county because of the lead mines in the district. The coal consumed came from small workings sprinkled all through the valley and J. U. Nef, in his book ‘The Rise of the British Coal Industry’, estimates that by the middle of the seventeenth century there must have been twenty or thirty pits within an area of about 150 square miles. Every manor of any size had its own pits.” [106]
In more recent times, production from the Durham coal mines increased from about 26 million tons in 1877 to the highest recorded figure of almost 56 million tons in 1913. Just after the 1st World War there were 170,000 miners at work in the Durham coalfields. Since then, however, production has declined significantly. By the late 20th century production, with the closure of mines during the middle years of the century, production fell rapidly. The last mine in the Durham Coalfield closed in 1994. [107] The last in the Northumberland Coalfield (Ellington Colliery) closed in 2005. [108]
A few things to note:-
Coal Output – according to Sunnyside Local History Society, prior to the introduction of tramroads and then railways the combined output of the Northumberland and Durham coalfields was around 2,000,000 tons of coal per annum. [109] By 1850, the output was around 5,800,000 tons. By 1865, the coal exported from the combined coalfield was about 6,400,000 tons per annum. The railways and, prior to them, the tramroads enabled this dramatic increase, markedly increasing productivity and reducing costs. [110]
The location of Darlington and Stockton – both are some distance outside the Durham Coalfield. It is reasonable to ask what it was that meant that a railway route via Darlington to Stockton on the River Tees was considered to be the best route for the export of coal from the Southwest area of the coalfield. In practical terms, although the River Wear penetrated the Durham Coalfield close to the deposits in the Southwest, it was not navigable for much of its length. This meant that the distance to the port at Stockton (where the Tees was navigable) was shorter than the distance to Sunderland. The coal that was produced in the Southwest of the coalfield was either for local use or travelled by pack horse routes across the higher ground between the River Wear and the River Tees, or were carted on poorly surfaced roads to Stockton. It was natural, therefore to look to improve the route already used, rather than seek out significantly different alternative routes to the North and East. Landowners in the Southwest of the coalfield would only be able to exploit the coal reserves under their land once an economically sustainable transport method could be devised.
Pack horses – could carry about an eighth of a ton each. [111]
Tramroads – dramatically increased the capacity which a single horse could pull, from around 1 ton over uneven and poorly maintained roads to around 10 tons/horse. The problem, in the early 1800s, was to cost of horses and fodder. The Napoleonic Wars resulted in a dramatic increase in the cost of fodder and horses became more scarce as a result of the demands made by the wars. Landowners needed cheaper ways to transport coal to the ports for onward transport to London and the South. [112]
Canals – a number of different schemes were considered but foundered because of cost or the level differences involved in reach mines in the Pennine hills. If viable, they would have dramatically increased the load which could be pulled by one horse to as much as 30 tons! [111]
Steam railways – initially saw the amount of freight carried as 80 tons/locomotive (the amount pulled by Locomotion No. 1 on its inaugural trip on the Stockton and Darlington Railway). [113] And would go on to be able to move 100s of tons in single trains as the technology improved.
The Development of the Stockton & Darlington Railway
Until the 19th century, coal from the inland mines in southern County Durham used to be taken away on packhorses. Then later by horse-drawn carts as the roads were improved. [47]
A number of canal schemes failed.
Promoters included George Dixon, John Rennie, James Bradley and Robert Whitworth. [117]
The River Tees was straightened in the early 19th century through the creation of two cuts, the Mandale Cut (1810 – 220 yards long, saving over 2 miles of journey) and the Portrack Cut (1831 – 700 yards long), significantly improving access to Stockton’s port. [47]
Also in the early 19th century, another canal was proposed to take coal from the mines in the Southwest of Co. Durham to Stockton. The proposed route bypassed Yarm and Darlington and the scheme was resisted by Edward Pease and Jonathan Backhouse, both of Darlington. [47] It was at a meeting held in Yarm to oppose the construction of the canal that a tramroad was proposed. [48: p16] The Welsh engineer George Overton advised building a tramroad. He carried out a survey [49: p45-47] and planned a route from the Etherley and Witton Collieries to Shildon, and then passing to the north of Darlington to reach Stockton. The Scottish engineer Robert Stevenson was said to favour the railway, and the Quaker Edward Pease supported it at a public meeting in Darlington on 13th November 1818, promising a five per cent return on investment. [48: p16-17][49: p55 & 63] Approximately two-thirds of the shares were sold locally, and the rest were bought by Quakers nationally. [50: p33, 52, 79–80, 128][51][52][53: p223] A private bill was presented to Parliament in March 1819, but as the route passed through Earl of Eldon’s estate and one of the Earl of Darlington’s fox coverts, it was opposed and defeated by 13 votes. [11][54]
This plan, drawn by George Stephenson shows the original tramroad proposed by George Overton and George Stephenson’s own proposals for a railway. [118]
The first submission of a bill for what became the Stockton & Darlington Railway was deferred because of the death of George III. A revised bill was submitted on 30th September 1820. The route had to avoid the lands of Lord Darlington and Viscount Barrington. [49: p64-67][54]
The railway was unopposed this time, but the bill nearly failed to enter the committee stage as the required four-fifths of shares had not been sold. Pease subscribed £7,000; from that time he had considerable influence over the railway and it became known as “the Quaker line”. The Stockton and Darlington Railway Act 1821 (1 & 2 Geo. 4. c. xliv), which received royal assent on 19th April 1821, allowed for a railway that could be used by anyone with suitably built vehicles on payment of a toll, that was closed at night, and with which land owners within 5 miles (8 km) could build branches and make junctions;[49: p70][50: p37] no mention was made of steam locomotives. [48: p19][54]
What does seem significant, with the benefit of hindsight, is the way that this new railway initiated the construction of more railway lines, causing significant developments in railway mapping and cartography, iron and steel manufacturing, as well as in any industries requiring more efficient transportation. The railway(s) produced a demand for railway related supplies while simultaneously providing the mechanisms which brought significant economies of scale and logistics to many manufacturers and businesses [54][56][57]
This graph shows just how significant industrial growth was in the period before 1870 The vertical scale is logarithmic and we are focussing only on the period from 1800 to 1870. Each element of the industrial economy is set to a value of 100 in the year 1700. By 1800 the metals and mining sector had grown to 4.6 times its value in 1700, by 1870 it had risen to 618 times the 1700 value. The very rapid rise is due primarily to improvements in technology of which the railways were a dominant part. [119]Edward Pease and George Stephenson, (c) Public Domain.
“Edward Pease (1767-1858) was the chief inspiration and founder of the S&DR, in choosing a railway rather than a canal, in promoting its route, via Darlington, and adopting steam locomotive power.” [58: p13] Edward Pease had some concerns about George Overton’s competence in respect of railway construction. He turned to George Stephenson who had proven himself to be an excellent engine-wright at the Killingworth collieries, for advice. [54] In addition, Pease invested £7,000 (as much as £750,000 today) of his own money to overcome cashflow problems
A early share certificate (1823) for the Stockton and Darlington Railway. [127]
Pease also undertook, with fellow Quakers, what was perhaps the first targeted national sale of shares. They sought a wider involvement in share ownership beyond those immediately involved with their project.
On 12th May 1821 the shareholders appointed Thomas Meynell as chairman and Jonathan Backhouse as treasurer; a majority of the managing committee, which included Thomas Richardson, Edward Pease and his son Joseph Pease, were Quakers. The committee designed a seal, showing waggons being pulled by a horse, and adopted the Latin motto Periculum privatum utilitas publica (“At private risk for public service”).[49: p73][50: p184] By 23rd July 1821, it had decided that the line would be a railway with edge rails, rather than a plateway, and appointed Stephenson to make a fresh survey of the line, [49: p74][54]
The seal of the railway company was designed in 1821. It is clear that, at that time at least, the planned railway was not intended for steam propulsion or passenger use.
The Latin motto is Periculum privatum utilitas publica (At private risk for public service). [54]
Stephenson recommended using malleable iron rails, even though he owned a share of the patent for cast iron rails. Malleable iron rails formed about 65% of the railway but cast iron rails were used at junctions and on the remainder of the line. [4][59: p74][60]
By the end of 1821, Stephenson “had reported that a usable line could be built within the bounds of the Act of Parliament, but another route would be shorter by 3 miles (5 km) and avoid deep cuttings and tunnels.” [48: p20]
“Overton had kept himself available, but had no further involvement and the shareholders elected Stephenson [as] Engineer on 22nd January 1822, with a salary of £660 per year. [49: p79-80] On 23rd May 1822 a ceremony in Stockton celebrated the laying of the first track at St John’s Well, the rails 4 ft 8 in (1,422 mm) apart, [61] the same gauge used by Stephenson on his Killingworth Railway.” [48: p20][54] This was altered to 4 ft 8½ in to reduce binding on curves. [120: p19]
“Stephenson advocated the use of steam locomotives on the line. [48: p19] Pease visited Killingworth in mid-1822 [62: p154] and the directors visited Hetton colliery railway, on which Stephenson had introduced steam locomotives. [49: p83] A new bill was presented, requesting Stephenson’s deviations from the original route and the use of “locomotives or moveable engines”, and this received royal assent on 23rd May 1823 as the Stockton and Darlington Railway Act 1823 (4 Geo. 4. c. xxxiii).[49: p85-86] The line included embankments up to 48 feet (15 m) high, and Stephenson designed an iron truss bridge to cross the River Gaunless. The Skerne Bridge over the River Skerne was designed by the Durham architect Ignatius Bonomi.” [59: p75][65][54] George Stephenson’s bridge over the Gaunless suffered flood damage and had to be rebuilt – the directors of the railway company instructed Stephenson to consult Bonomi about the construction of Skerne Bridge – Bonomi designed a stone arch bridge, with a single arch spanning the river and two smaller flood arches over the paths either side. Bonomi’s bridge is still in use today. “Being the oldest railway bridge in continuous use in the world, it is a Grade I listed building.” [68]
By 1823, Stephenson and Pease had opened Robert Stephenson and Company, a locomotive works at Forth Street, Newcastle, from which the following year the S&DR ordered two steam locomotives and two stationary engines. [49: p95-96][54]
This highlights another way in which the S&DR was very much of its time and looked different from a modern railway: It only used locomotives (or horses) on the level sections of the line. Inclines were operated by a combination of gravity and steam-power from stationary engines.
“On 16th September 1825, with the stationary engines in place, the first locomotive, ‘Locomotion No. 1’, left the works, and the following day it was advertised that the railway would open on 27th September 1825.” [49: p105][54]
The Opening of the Line
Wikipedia tells us that “the cost of building the railway had greatly exceeded the estimates. By September 1825, the company had borrowed £60,000 in short-term loans and needed to start earning an income to ward off its creditors. A railway coach, named Experiment, [71] arrived on the evening of 26th September 1825 and was attached to Locomotion No. 1, which had been placed on the rails for the first time at Aycliffe Lane station following the completion of its journey by road from Newcastle earlier that same day. Pease, Stephenson and other members of the committee then made an experimental journey to Darlington before taking the locomotive and coach to Shildon in preparation for the opening day, with James Stephenson, George’s elder brother, at the controls. [49: p105-106] On 27th September, between 7 am and 8 am, 12 waggons of coal [74] were drawn up Etherley North Bank by a rope attached to the stationary engine at the top, and then let down the South Bank to St Helen’s Auckland. A waggon of flour bags was attached and horses hauled the train across the Gaunless Bridge to the bottom of Brusselton West Bank, where thousands watched the second stationary engine draw the train up the incline. The train was let down the East Bank to Mason’s Arms Crossing at Shildon Lane End, where Locomotion No. 1, Experiment and 21 new coal waggons fitted with seats were waiting.” [49: p109-110]
Between 450 and 600 people travelled behind Locomotion No. 1, most in empty waggons but some on top of waggons full of coal. Wikipedia tells us that “brakesmen were placed between the waggons, and the train set off, led by a man on horseback with a flag. It picked up speed on the gentle downward slope and reached 10 to 12 miles per hour (16 to 19 km/h), leaving behind men on field hunters (horses) who had tried to keep up with the procession. The train stopped when the waggon carrying the company surveyors and engineers lost a wheel; the waggon was left behind and the train continued. The train stopped again, this time for 35 minutes to repair the locomotive and the train set off again, reaching 15 mph (24 km/h) before it was welcomed by an estimated 10,000 people as it came to a stop at the Darlington branch junction. Eight and a half miles (14 km) had been covered in two hours, and subtracting the 55 minutes accounted by the two stops, it had travelled at an average speed of 8 mph (13 km/h). Six waggons of coal were distributed to the poor, workers stopped for refreshments and many of the passengers from Brusselton alighted at Darlington, to be replaced by others.” [49: p110-112][54][59: p85]
Wikipedia continues: “Two waggons for the Yarm Band were attached, and at 12:30 pm the locomotive started for Stockton, now hauling 31 vehicles with 550 passengers. On the 5 miles (8 km) of nearly level track east of Darlington the train struggled to reach more than 4 mph (6.4 km/h). At Eaglescliffe near Yarm crowds waited for the train to cross the Stockton to Yarm turnpike. Approaching Stockton, running alongside the turnpike as it skirted the western edge of Preston Park, it gained speed and reached 15 mph (24 km/h) again, before a man clinging to the outside of a waggon fell off and his foot was crushed by the following vehicle. As work on the final section of track to Stockton’s quayside was still ongoing, the train halted at the temporary passenger terminus at St John’s Well 3 hours, 7 minutes after leaving Darlington. The opening ceremony was considered a success and that evening 102 people sat down to a celebratory dinner at the Town Hall.” [49: p112-114]
The story of the opening day illustrates effectively that the line was not hauled throughout by steam locomotives and relied significantly on stationary steam engines for managing movements on steep inclines.
Early Days
“The railway that opened in September 1825 was 25 miles (40 km) long and ran from Phoenix Pit, Old Etherley Colliery, to Cottage Row, Stockton; there was also a 1⁄2 mile (800 m) branch to the depot at Darlington, 1⁄2 mile (800 m) of the Hagger Leases branch, and a 3⁄4 mile (1,200 m) branch to Yarm. [49: p106] Most of the track used 28 pounds per yard (13.9 kg/m) malleable iron rails, and 4 miles (6.4 km) of 57 1⁄2 lb/yd (28.5 kg/m) cast iron rails were used for junctions.” [49: p89-90][54][79] To put this in context, modern railway rails typically weigh between 40 to 70 kg/m (88 to 154 lb/yd), with heavier rails used for higher speeds and axle loads. In Europe, a common range is 40 to 60 kg/m, while in North America, it’s more common to see rails in the 55 to 70kg/m (115 to 154 lb/yd) range. The heaviest mass-produced rail was 77.5 kg/m (171 lb/yd). [78][79][80]
The full length of the Stockton & Darlington Railway in 1827 – modern railways are shown as red lines. [54][81]
The S&DR was “single track with four passing loops per mile; [48: p27] square sleepers supported each rail separately so that horses could walk between them. [59: p74] Stone was used for the sleepers to the west of Darlington and oak to the east; Stephenson would have preferred all of them to have been stone, but the transport cost was too high as they were quarried in the Auckland area. [49: p91] The railway opened with the company owing money and unable to raise further loans; Pease advanced money twice early in 1826 so the workers could be paid. By August 1827 the company had paid its debts and was able to raise more money; that month the Black Boy branch opened and construction began on the Croft and Hagger Leases branches. During 1827, shares rose from £120 at the start to £160 at the end.” [49: p138-140][54] Horses could haul up to four waggons. Dandy Waggons were introduced in mid-1828. A Dandy Waggon “was a small cart at the end of the train that carried the horse downhill, allowing it to rest while the train descended under gravity. The S&DR made their use compulsory from November 1828.” [48: p27][49: p154-156][54]
“The line was initially used to carry coal to Darlington and Stockton, carrying 10,000 tons [82] in the first three months and earning nearly £2,000. In Stockton, the price of coal dropped from 18 to 12 shillings, and by the beginning of 1827 was … 8s 6d.[49: p117, 119] At first, the drivers had been paid a daily wage, but after February 1826 they were paid 1⁄4d per ton per mile; from this they had to pay assistants and fireman and to buy coal for the locomotive. [49: p132] The 1821 Act of Parliament had received opposition from the owners of collieries on the River Wear who supplied London and feared competition, and it had been necessary to restrict the rate for transporting coal destined for ships to 1⁄2d per ton per mile, which had been assumed would make the business uneconomic. There was interest from London for 100,000 tons a year, so the company began investigations in September 1825. In January 1826, the first staith opened at Stockton, designed so waggons over a ship’s hold could discharge coal from the bottom. [49: p120-121] About 18,500 tons of coal was transported to ships in the year ending June 1827, and this increased to over 52,000 tons the following year, 44.5% of the total carried.” [49: p136][54]
Locomotives
“The locomotives were unreliable at first. Soon after opening, Locomotion No. 1 broke a wheel, and it was not ready for traffic until 12th or 13th October; Hope, the second locomotive, arrived in November 1825 but needed a week to ready it for the line – the cast-iron wheels were a source of trouble. [49: p118-119, 142] Two more locomotives of a similar design arrived in 1826; that August, 16s 9d was spent on ale to motivate the men maintaining the engines. [49: p118-119, 142] By the end of 1827, the company had also bought Chittaprat from Robert Wilson and Experiment from Stephenson. Timothy Hackworth, locomotive superintendent, used the boiler from the unsuccessful Chittaprat to build the Royal George in the works at Shildon; it started work at the end of November.” [49: p116, 142-143][54] A drawing of the Royal George appears below.
The boiler was a plain cylinder 13 ft. long and 4 ft. 4 in. in diameter. There were six coupled wheels 4 feet in diameter, and the cylinders, which were placed vertically at the end opposite to the fire place, were 11″ diameter, the stroke of the piston being 20 inches. The piston rods worked downward and were connected to the first pair of wheels. [122]
Problems with the locomotives may have seen the railway reverting to the use of horses but for the fact that Pease and Thomas Richardson were partners with Stephenson in the Newcastle works. Locomotives were clearly superior to horses when they were working. In his book, Tomlinson showed that coal was being moved by locomotive at half the cost of using horses. Rolt could not imagine the company reverting to horses. [83] Robert Young states that the company was unsure as to the real costs as they reported to shareholders in 1828 that the saving using locomotives was 30 per cent. Young also showed that Pease and Richardson were both concerned about their investment in the Newcastle works and Pease unsuccessfully tried to sell his share to George Stephenson. [50: p61-63][54][84]
“New locomotives were ordered from Stephenson’s, but the first was too heavy when it arrived in February 1828. It was rebuilt with six wheels and hailed as a great improvement, Hackworth being told to convert the remaining locomotives as soon as possible. In 1828, two locomotive boilers exploded within four months, both killing the driver and both due to the safety valves being left fixed down while the engine was stationary.” [49: p146-148][54]
Hackworth redesigned locomotive wheels – cast-iron wheels used to fracture too easily. His solution was the first use of “a system of cast iron wheel with a wrought iron tyre shrunk on. The wheels were made up in parts because the lathes in the Shildon workshops were too small to turn up the rims when fixed upon the axle. They were dotted with plug holes to ensure sound castings and reduce unnecessary weight. This new wheel type was very efficient and so was used on nearly every engine on the S&DR and on other railways for many years.” [124: p157-8][125: p30].
He designed the spring safety valve. He perfected the blast pipe and again it was to be used on many engines subsequently. Perhaps the most important invention was the blast pipe which ensured that boiler pressure was always maintained; thus curing the lack of steam found in Stephenson’s earlier engines.
Hackworth lagged Royal George’s boiler with strips of mahogany to insulate it. “Royal George” was built for coal traffic and so was designed to be strong and with good tractive adhesion suitable in all weathers and the blast pipe doubled the amount of useful work [it] could do.” [124: p228]. The ‘blast pipe’ discharged exhaust steam through a converging nozzle blast pipe in the chimney, greatly increasing combustion intensity and steam production.
“The S&DR was designed to be operated by travelling locomotive and through the skills of Timothy Hackworth, it was here that the locomotive engine became reliable and efficient. Through his work for the S&DR, confidence in the use of locomotives was gradually built up so that other embryonic railway companies were also prepared to embark on their use. By the time the Liverpool and Manchester line opened in 1830 the S&DR had 12 locomotives and by 1832 it had 19.” [125: p2]
“The surviving documentation suggests that without Hackworth’s promotion of the locomotive and his key developments such as the plug wheel and blast pipe which allowed the practical and ultimately successful implementation of locomotive power on the S&DR for all to see, then the railways that followed would have significantly delayed the use of travelling locomotives. Hackworth cast enough doubt in the Director’s minds of the Liverpool & Manchester Railway about the dangers and short comings of rope pulled inclines, that they organised the Rainhill Trials only months before opening in order to test the power and efficiency of various locomotives. … From 1828 when the locomotives were proven technology (thanks to Hackworth’s design of the Royal George the previous year), there was a growth in locomotive engineering companies in England, and by 1830, also in America and France.” [125: p3]
“Perhaps there was no man in the whole engineering world more prepared for the time in which he lived. He was a man of great inventive ability, great courage in design, and most daring in its application…” (The Auckland Chronicle, 29th April 1876 referring to Timothy Hackworth)
Passengers
Wikipedia tells us that “passenger traffic started on 10th October 1825, after the required licence was purchased, using the Experiment coach hauled by a horse. The coach was initially timetabled to travel from Stockton to Darlington in two hours, with a fare of 1s, and made a return journey four days a week and a one-way journey on Tuesdays and Saturdays. In April 1826, the operation of the coach was contracted for £200 a year; by then the timetabled journey time had been reduced to 1 hour 15 minutes, and passengers were allowed to travel on the outside for 9d. A more comfortable coach, Express, started the same month and charged 1s 6d for travel inside. [49: p122-126] Innkeepers began running coaches, two to Shildon from July, and TheUnion, which served the Yarm branch from 16th October. [49: p126-127] There were no stations: [87: p117] in Darlington the coaches picked up passengers near the North Road Crossing, whereas in Stockton they picked up at different places on the quay. [49: p130] Between 30,000 and 40,000 passengers were carried between July 1826 and June 1827.” [49: p131]
“The Union” started operating on 16th October 1825 and ran between Stockton and Yarm. [121]
Innovation occurred relatively quickly, the company decided that it needed to provide hostelries (pubs) close to its coal depots. Tickets were sold in various locations but, significantly, in the pubs closest to pick up points. The practice mirrored what happened with stagecoaches.
Perhaps a more significant change seems to have happened almost organically. … Some of the buildings at coal depots began to provide space for passengers to wait along with other goods to be carried by the railway. … Heighington was a wayside location on the railway. It had a coal depot, and the S&DR built a public house in 1826-1827 to oversee the coal depot. Historic England describe the building as a proto-railway station, built before the concept of the railway station had fully developed. [123] This was the first such structure on the railway.
This was one among a number of loading and unloading depots which would evolve into the now familiar railway architecture such as goods and passenger stations. [125]
Developing Understanding
In truth, a lot of work went into getting three different forms of traction to harmonise – horse, inclined plane and locomotives on a single line. This was further complicated by the fact that it was a public railway that anyone could use subject to payment and an agreement to abide by any rules. The increasingly popular use of the single line also meant that rules had to be established for giving way and the ‘first past the post’ system was adopted. Signalling considered (but blocked by local landowners), [128: p12] warnings were sounded on the approach to level crossings, braking systems improved and sleepers made heavier. There was no past experience to learn from, no book to consult and the duties of railway officials had yet to be clearly defined. [124: p121]
“The S&DR led the way in devising a system to run a public railway. It was here that passenger timetables evolved, baggage allowances were created, rules made regarding punishment for non-purchase of tickets, job descriptions for railway staff evolved and signalling and braking developed and improved for regular use. The S&DR also recognised the need for locomotives of a different design to haul passengers rather than heavy goods and the need to provide facilities for passengers and workers at stations – all before 1830.” [125: p2]
The Stockton & Darlington’s regulations were initially laid down in ten ‘rules’ set out in the company’s Act of Incorporation of 19th April 1821, which established fines for those failing to preserve order and security on the railway. These were of a fairly general nature. [128: p12-13]
Two rules had attached to them the massive (for the day) fine of £5, these required wagons to be especially constructed for the railway, to bear the owner’s name and wagon number in 3-inch high lettering, and to allow the company to gauge wagons if it felt necessary.
By July 1826, these rules were supplemented by 24 byelaws and rules concerning wagons taking to sidings, all of these suggesting that there were shortcomings in the original rules which were discovered as an early result of operational experience. [128: p67-68]
After the launch date in 1825, other advances followed rapidly. “The growth of health and safety, the administration of running a regional railway, … and, [critically,] commercial success that would reassure other investors that it was safe to invest in their own regional railway that would soon form part of a national and then international railway network. The first purpose-built goods station (as opposed to coal and lime which went to the depot down the road) was opened in Darlington 1827. … [It formed] the inspiration for the later 1830 warehouse at Liverpool Road Station in Manchester which still survives.” [125]
“Many aspects of the line were still unproven technology when they came to be used in the context of a public regional railway. Until it could be proven (and the launch of 1825 went some way to do that with enough customers ready to pay for the service to immediately allay fears of money losses), that the line had to work first before it could be expanded. It was up to the S&DR to find a way forward as new problems arose. [Much of that responsibility fell on Timothy Hackworth’s shoulders.] … Through the hard knocks of money shortages, operating difficulties and the limitations of contemporary engineering, the S&DR had discovered what would be necessary [to run a railway] by the start of 1829, at a time when the L&MR was still vacillating over vital traction and operating decisions.” [126: p11-12]
A Change in Passenger and Goods Services
It was 1833, before the passenger railway service began to become something like we would recognise today. By 1833, it had become obvious that the competing needs of passengers and goods under an open access model needed to be managed. Network management, capacity and overall co-ordination were increasingly seen as important. As the network expanded, the conflicts increased. Until 1833, passenger services were run by external contractors. In 1833, the S&DR took on this responsibility directly.
The railway changed from a kind of ‘public road’ on which all-comers could transport goods and passengers to a system where services were co-ordinated, managed, timetabled and run by the Company.
The S&DR established a permanent rail infrastructure providing a regular service transporting both goods and passengers. In this particular sense, the S&DR was truly the launch of a modern railway network. Managed, timetabled services for passengers and goods made possible the rapid expansion of railways in the 19th century across the globe, together with attendant huge worldwide social and economic change.
In a railway context, everything was being done for the first time:
the keeping of general records; various statistical and financial records; employment of staff and rules; at first all drivers were self-employed and paid their firemen themselves.
Engine shed maintenance records; the need for dedicated general goods facilities; all arrangements for passengers; the management and supply of first coke and then coal for use by steam engines. ….
The S&DR, from the official launch in September 1825, “was at the forefront of technology in terms of operating locomotives regularly and over a relatively long stretch of line, it was to the S&DR that other embryonic railway companies looked to. Railway engineers and promoters from other parts of the UK, France, and the USA attended the opening ceremony in 1825. Two of those distinguished French guests went on to found France’s first public railway. Others were to visit the S&DR Works in the years that followed including engineers from Prussia who took copious detailed notes on Hackworth’s experiments. Hackworth himself shared his results widely (often at the request of Edward Pease) and organised trials at the request of engineers from other companies who were torn between the use of canal versus railway, or horse versus locomotive, or stationary versus travelling engine. The S&DR was at its most influential until around 1830.” [125: p2] A very short period of time!
Beyond 1830, “there were significant technological achievements … such as the delivery of Russia’s first locomotives to the Tsar in the 1840s from Hackworth’s Soho Works in Shildon, the continuing evolution of the first railway towns at New Shildon and Middlesbrough and the delivery of gas to the works in New Shildon in 1841 before anywhere else in the country apart from Grainger Town in Newcastle. Further the grouping of internationally important structures with later pioneering structures (such as at North Road in Darlington or at Locomotion in Shildon) provides an insight into those rapidly developing days of the early railway and add value to each other.” [125: p3]
The First ‘Railway’ Town – New Shildon
Shildon was, at the start of the 1820s, just a tiny hamlet, (c) National Library of Scotland. [105]The same area South of Bishop Auckland as it appears on Stephenson’s survey of 1821. Shildon still appears as a tiny hamlet. [118]On Dixon’s Plan of 1839, there is new housing, the S&DR’s Shildon Works, bottom left, and Timothy Hackworth’s Soho Works, top right. [129]New Shildon has developed significantly by the time of this map extract. A significant number of streets are now present, and both the railway works and Hackworth’s Soho Works have expanded. Note Shildon’s Railway Station at the right side of the image. [130]By the 21st century New Shildon has completely swallowed the original hamlet of Shildon and urban sprawl has devoured all of the land North to Bishop Auckland. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The Second ‘Railway’ Town – Port Darlington and Middlesbrough
The ongoing story of the railway company is one of strong growth particularly in the carriage of goods. It opened its own port near the mouth of the River Tees.
The S&DR played a significant role in the rapid expansion of Middlesbrough. Initially a farming community of around 25 people at the beginning of the 19th century, it transformed into a major iron and steel producer, “spurred by the arrival of the Stockton and Darlington Railway and the discovery of iron ore in the Cleveland Hills. This rapid expansion led to a significant population increase and the development of a new town, planned by Joseph Pease and others, centred around a gridiron street pattern and a market square. [85][86] Middlesbrough had only a few houses before the coming of the railway, [87] but a year later had a population of over 2,000 and at the 2011 census had over 138,000 people. [88][89] Port Darlington was first established, as shown on the left of the image below, which also shows the gridiron street pattern in what would become Middlesbrough, the new town on the right of the image. [95]
Port Darlington’s staithes are on the left of this development plan, the fan of sidings and the staithes can be seen close to the red dot. This plan also shows the planned gridiron street pattern in the new town, on the right of the image behind the wharfs where ships could be loaded and unloaded. [95]The same area in the 21st century, the red dot provides continuity between these two images. A single rail siding still serves the area which had the staithes and some of the gridiron pattern of streets remains. The first house was completed in the New Town in the Spring of 1830. [Google Maps July 2025]
We have already noted the staithes built at Port Darlington to allow more mechanised loading of ships. These staithes were ingeniously designed, even if health and safety was not as paramount as perhaps it should have been. The Port of Middlesbrough describes the operation: “Staithes were elevated platforms for discharging coal and other materials from railway cars into coal ships for transport. … A steam engine hoisted a wagon full of coal off the line and about 20 feet into the air, where it landed on a gantry. A horse then pulled the wagon along the gantry and out over the water. At the end of the gantry, the wagon was strapped into a cradle and, with a man clinging to it, was swung in an arc on to the ship below. Here, the man unbolted the bottom of the wagon and the coal fell into the hold. Finally, the weight of the next full wagon swinging downwards caused the empty wagon and the man to swing upwards back to the gantry.” [95]
Plans from the port authority are shown below. It is difficult to imagine the process described from looking at these plans. It may be that the plans show a later design of staithe.
One of the staithes at Port Darlington/Middlesbrough Dock. [95]A closer view of the staithe shown in the image above. [95]
The years after 1827 (once Company finances were on a sound footing)
A series of different extensions and branches to the S&DR appeared over the period from 1827. [54] “In 1830, the company opened new offices at the corner of Northgate and Union Street in Darlington. [49:p189] Between 1831 and 1832 a second track was laid between Stockton and the foot of Brusselton Bank. Workshops were built at Shildon for the maintenance and construction of locomotives. [49: p235-236] In 1830, approximately 50 horses shared the traffic with 19 locomotives, but travelled at different speeds, so to help regulate traffic horse-drawn trains were required to operate in groups of four or five.” [54] The rule book stated that locomotive-hauled trains had precedence over horse-drawn trains. Even so, accidents and conflict occurred. The practice was to allow private use of the line by industries that it served, “some horse drivers refused to give way and on one occasion a locomotive had to follow a horse-drawn train for over 2 miles (3 km). [49: p383-384][50: p91-94] The committee decided, in 1828, to replace horses with locomotives on the main line, starting with the coal trains, but there was resistance from some colliery owners.” [54]
“After the S&DR bought out the local coach companies in August 1832, a mixed [locomotive-hauled] passenger and small goods service began between Stockton and Darlington on 7th September 1833, travelling at 12–14 miles per hour (19–23 km/h); locomotive-hauled services began to Shildon in December 1833 and to Middlesbrough on 7th April 1834. [49: p384-385][50: p68] The company had returned the five per cent dividend that had been promised by Edward Pease, and this had increased to eight per cent by the time he retired in 1832.” [50: p87-88][54]
In 1835, the S&DR partnered with the York & North Midland Railway (Y&NMR) to form the Great North of England Railway (GNER) to build a line from York to Newcastle which along the would run along the line of the S&DR’s Croft branch at Darlington. Pease specified a formation wide enough for four tracks, so freight could be carried at 30 miles per hour (48 km/h) and passengers at 60 mph (97 km/h), and George Stephenson had drawn up detailed plans by November 1835. [48: p64-65][54] The Acts of Parliament enabling the scheme were given royal assent on 4th July 1836 (Darlington to Newcastle) and 12th July 1837 (Croft to York). The railway opened for coal traffic on 4th January 1841 using S&DR locomotives, and to passengers with its own locomotives on 30th March 1841. [48: 67-69][54][87: p93-94]
A patchwork of different schemes was to follow:
By February 1842, a passenger service between Darlington and Coxhoe supported by an omnibus service to Shincliffe on the Durham & Sunderland Railway. [87: p165]
Early in 1842, the Shildon Tunnel Company opened its 1,225-yard (1,120 m) tunnel through the hills at Shildon to the Wear basin and after laying 2 miles (3.2 km) of track to South Church station, south of Bishop Auckland, opened in May 1842. [49: p435-437]
In 1846, the S&DR installed Alexander Bain’s “I and V” electric telegraph to regulate the passage of trains through the tunnel. [90: p52-53]
The SD&R provided a 3 1⁄4 hour service between Darlington and Newcastle, with a four-horse omnibus from South Church to Rainton Meadows on the Durham Junction Railway, from where trains ran to Gateshead, on the south side of the River Tyne near Newcastle. [48: p74]
By 1839, the S&DR track “had been upgraded with rails weighing 64 lb/yd (32 kg/m). [91: p415] The railway had about 30 steam locomotives, most of them six coupled, [91: p419] that ran with four-wheeled tenders with two water butts, each capable of holding 600 imperial gallons (2,700 L; 720 US gal) of water. [91: p422] The line descended from Shildon to Stockton, assisting the trains that carried coal to the docks at a maximum speed of 6 mph (9.7 km/h); the drivers were fined if caught travelling faster than 8 mph (13 km/h), [91: p415, 422] and one was dismissed for completing the forty-mile return journey in 4 1⁄2 hours. [59: p136-137] On average there were about 40 coal trains a day, hauling 28 waggons with a weight of 116 tons. [91: p423] There were about 5,000 privately owned waggons, and at any one time about 1,000 stood at Shildon depot.” [54][91: p417-418]
Wikipedia continues: “The railway had modern passenger locomotives, some [still] with four wheels. [91: p421-422] There were passenger stations at Stockton, Middlesbrough, Darlington, Shildon and West Auckland, and trains also stopped at Middlesbrough Junction, Yarm Junction, Fighting Cocks and Heighington. [91: p416] [A significant improvement on early passenger practice.] Some of the modified road coaches were still in use, but there were also modern railway carriages, some first class with three compartments each seating eight passengers, and second class carriages that seated up to 40. [91: p416][92] Luggage and sometimes the guard travelled on the carriage roof; [49: p423] a passenger travelling third class suffered serious injuries after falling from the roof in 1840. [49: p400] Passenger trains averaged 22–25 mph (35–40 km/h), and a speed of 42 mph (68 km/h) was recorded. Over 200,000 passengers were carried in the year to 1st October 1838, [91: p419] and in 1839 there were twelve trains each day between Middlesbrough and Stockton, six trains between Stockton and Darlington, and three between Darlington and Shildon, where a carriage was fitted with Rankine’s self-acting brake, taken over the Brussleton Inclines, and then drawn by a horse to St Helen Auckland. [91: p418] The Bradshaw’s railway guide for March 1843, after South Church opened, shows five services a day between Darlington and South Church via Shildon, with three between Shildon and St Helens. Also listed were six trains between Stockton and Hartlepool via Seaton [94] over the Clarence Railway and the Stockton and Hartlepool Railway that had opened in 1841.” [87: p146-147][54]
During the 1830s, Port Darlington quickly became overwhelmed by the volume of traffic (both imports and exports) and work started in 1839 on Middlesbrough Dock which was laid out by William Cubitt and capable of holding 150 ships! It was “built by resident civil engineer George Turnbull. [89] … After three years and an expenditure of £122,000 (equivalent to £9.65m at 2011 prices), the formal opening of the new dock took place on 12 May 1842. [49: p437][89] The S&DR provided most of the finance, and the dock was absorbed by the company in 1849.” [49: p508][54] The S&DR was, by 1849, a well established and very significant company.
Ongoing Developments
Political manoeuvring to secure a route from London to Scotland via the Northeast continued during this period and the S&DR saw its stocks in the GNER increase in value before a new concern, the Newcastle and Darlington Junction Railway (N&DJR) bought out the GNER.
The S&DR also secured interests in the Wear Valley, [4] [54] a line to Redcar and Saltburn, a branch to a mine at Skelton, [4][54] a line to Barnard Castle, a route (South Durham and Lancashire Union Railway (SD&LUR)) over Stainmore Summit to Tebay, [54] and, through running rights over the Eden Valley Railway (EVR) and the Lancaster & Carlisle Railway (L&CR), to Penrith. “The S&DR opened a carriage works south of Darlington North Road station in 1853 [98] and later it built a locomotive works nearby to replace its works at Shildon [which was] designed by William Bouch, who had taken over from Hackworth as Locomotive Supervisor in 1840, it completed its first locomotive in 1864.” [54][87: p8][99] The inclines, built when stationary engines were used, were bypassed by lines on gentler grades. By the early 1860s, the S&DR had a significant network, even having absorbed the EVR and the SD&LUR. [54]
“With 200 route miles (320 km) of line and about 160 locomotives, [100: p167] the Stockton and Darlington Railway became part of the North Eastern Railway on 13th July 1863. Due to a clause in the North Eastern and Stockton and Darlington Railways Amalgamation Act 1863 (26 & 27 Vict. c. cxxii) the railway was managed as the independent Darlington Section until 1876, when the lines became the NER’s Central Division. [87: p9][48: p133] After the restoration of the dividend in 1851, by the end of 1854 payments had recovered to 8 per cent and then had not dropped below 7 1⁄2 per cent.” [50: Appendix 1][54]
I guess that we might easily be able to agree that the Stockton & Darlington Railway was of great local significance. It significantly reduced the cost of coal supplied to Stockton and Darlington. It temporarily enhanced the Port at Stockton before moving that trade downstream to Middlesbrough. It dramatically improved the speed of supply of larger quantities of coal. It made the town and Port of Middlesbrough. It linked the industries of Cumbia and Cleveland allowing speedy transport of coal and iron-ore to the different industries. It improved passenger travel East-West and began with others the development of North-South travel freight and passenger train travel. ……
But how has the Stockton & Darlington Railway transcended the local and become internationally significant? ……
Why Is the Stockton & Darlington Railway So Important?
So, what is the case? Was the S&DR the first real railway?
As 2025 got underway, this question prompted me to look at what is known of railway history in the period from 1800 to 1850, and led to the writing of an article (online) about railway developments during that period. The article is entitled ‘The Mother of All Inventions‘. [2]
September 2025 marked the bicentenary of the Stockton & Darlington Railway (S&DR) and, very naturally and most appropriately, major events were planned across the UK, and enthusiasts across the world planned their own commemorations. In this context, it is, at the very least, worth considering what the S&DR can and cannot justifiably claim for itself. In fact, Anthony Dawson in an article in Steam Railway Magazine in February 2025 suggested that we best get to understand the importance of the S&DR, perversely, by considering what cannot be claimed for it. [3] What follows below is based around that article by Anthony Dawson.
Dawson says: “while every enthusiast would arguably agree that the [S&DR] is special and that the bicentenary of its opening is a landmark worthy of celebration, how many of us truly understand why the [S&DR] is so momentous? Indeed, putting the Stockton & Darlington’s importance into context isn’t exactly straightforward, nor can it be boiled down to a particular ‘first’. Therefore, to understand why the Stockton & Darlington is so important, we need to look at what it wasn’t.” [3]
He goes on to suggest that, to paraphrase Winston Churchill, “while the [S&D] was not the beginning, it was the end of the beginning. Although it wasn’t the first of anything, as early railway historian the late Andy Guy put it, it was ‘better than the first’.” [3]
Was the Stockton & Darlington the first railway?
Perhaps that question can only be answered once we have agreed a definition of a ‘railway’. Collins Dictionary offers three definitions: a railway is the steel tracks that trains travel on; a railway is a company or organization that operates railway routes; and, a railway is the system and network of tracks that trains travel on. [10] Accepting these definitions would rule out a number of early ‘railway-like’ systems based on stone and wood.
The Collins dictionary definitions are very narrowly drafted. Dawson points us to Dr Michael Lewis’ definition: A railway is “a prepared track which so guides the vehicles running on it that they cannot leave the track”. [3][11] This short, simple definition allows for the inclusion of the Diolkos and other rutways of the Classical World, [12][13] possible rutways in Wiltshire (circa 300CE), [13] Cornwall (circa 1550s), [13][14] rutways in 19th century Australia, [15] and the guide-pin railways developed in Germany and Austria in the Middle Ages. Lewis’ definition includes ‘railways’ “before the late 18th Century, [often] private … with rails essentially of wood or occasionally of stone, with carriage only of goods in vehicles propelled by horse- or by man-power, and with a variety of methods of guiding the wheels. ” [11]
Dawson comments that, “The earliest evidence for ‘railways’ in this country comes from the Lake District when German-speaking immigrants led by Daniel Hochstetter introduced them to silver mines at Caldbeck during the reign of Elizabeth I. These railways consisted of longitudinal planks which guided an iron pin secured to the bottom of a four-wheel mine cart, working rather like a slot-car. … But the first [‘true’] railway in England was very likely that built by Huntingdon Beaumont in 1604 to carry coal from his pits at Wollaton near Nottingham down to the River Trent. It was made entirely from wood and greatly improved the transport of coal for onward shipping by water. So pleased was Beaumont with this new technology, he invested heavily in four similar railways around Newcastle, which were built to carry coal down to the Tyne. Beaumont, however, failed to break into the local market. This, coupled with heavy investment in his new railways and his lavish lifestyle, led him to being declared bankrupt, ending his days in a debtors’ prison.” [3]
Dawson goes on to say that, “following the turmoil of the English Civil War and Commonwealth period, wooden railways began to spread across Shropshire where they took on the name ‘Railed Way’ and the North-East where they were known as ‘Waggonways’ – two different names for the same idea. Indeed, as excavations on the first railway in Scotland – the Tranent to Cockenzie Waggonway of 1722 – have shown, there was very little new in the technology of a wooden railway. It [was] essentially a giant ladder laid on the ground. They used old ideas to provide a solution to a new problem.” [3]
The coming of the 18th century heralded a transport revolution. Dawson says: “The early waggonways carried largely coal and other minerals down to a staithe or wharf on a river or canal for onward shipping. Thus, they grew hand in hand with the canal network and many canal companies even owned their own waggonways as feeder lines. There was a transport revolution on the roads as well with the growth of turnpikes. Taken together, [these events] … fed and fuelled industrialisation and growing urbanisation, particularly in the North of England. Improved transport links meant coal could go to market quicker. It meant it was cheaper at the point of sale, which meant greater profits and, in turn, greater demand.” [3]
Various forms of ‘railway’ were clearly well established by the advent of the 19th century. The S&DR was clearly not the first railway.
If not the first ‘railway’, was the Stockton & Darlington the first to use iron rails?
Iron was first used in a ‘railway’ context as protective plating for the early wooden ‘railways’. Lengths of cast iron plate were nailed to the running surface of wooden rails, probably first in Coalbrookdale. Wooden rails were wearing too quickly and the iron covers improved longevity. It was a simple logical next step to move from cast-iron plate to cast-iron bars and then to either cast iron edge rails or cast iron L-shaped ‘tram-plates’. Cast-iron rails were common by the 1790s, their only real fault was that they were brittle and often broke under load. Indeed, when Trevithick’s early locomotive ‘Pen-y-darren’ made its maiden run on the Merthyr Tramroad in 1804, it was noted that the cast-iron rails were not robust enough for the heavy locomotive and a number broke. [16]
Dawson says that “What was needed was a superior type of rail … made from wrought iron. First rolled in any quantity in 1820 at Bedlington Iron Works, the Stockton & Darlington was probably the first railway to use wrought-iron rails on a large scale. Due to distrust of the new material, half of the line was laid with cast iron and half with wrought. It was a major technological breakthrough and one crucial to the development of the locomotive.” [3]
It may well be that around two thirds of the length of the railway used wrought iron rails and one third had cast iron rails. Cast iron was used for the chairs which sat on the sleepers.
A section of the original Stockton & Darlington Railway track, including the rail, chairs and sleepers, at Preston Park Museum circa. 1962 (c) Bruce Coleman, courtesy of the Shildon Archive [133]
So, it seems that the Stockton & Darlington was not the first to use iron rails but that it was important in the taking of the next technological step of employing wrought-iron rails. “Bedlington Ironworks, in Blyth Dene, Northumberland … is remembered as the place where wrought iron rails were invented by John Birkinshaw in 1820, … with their first major use being [on] the Stockton and Darlington Railway. [17] Birkinshaw’s wrought-iron rails were rolled in 15ft lengths.
If not the first railway and not the first to use iron, was the S&DR the first railway authorised by Act of Parliament?
The first Act of Parliament for a railway was obtained by Charles Brandling for what became the Middleton Railway. It ran from coal pits at Hunslet down to the River Aire. The Act received Royal Assent in 1758. A significant number of Acts of Parliament relating to railways preceded the S&D, including this small selection: [18]
The Llanelli Railway and Dock Act, 1802 and the Monmouth Railway Act 1810. [134][135]
1802: The Llanelly Railway and Dock Act;
1803: The Croydon, Merstham and Godstone Iron Railway Act;
1804: The Ellesmere Canal, Railway and Water Supply Act;
1805: The Surrey Iron Railway Act;
1808: The Kilmarnock and Troon Railway Act;
1809: The Bullo Pill Railway Act; the Gloucester and Cheltenham Railway Act; the Lydney and Lidbrook Railway Act;
1810: The Monmouth Railway Act; the Severn and Wye Railway and Canal Co. Act; The Severn Tunnel Act;
1811: The Hay Railway Act; the Llanvihangel Railway Act; the Penclawdd Canal and Railway or Tramroad Act; the Severn and Wye Railway and Canal Co. Extension Act;
1812: the Anglesey Railway Act;
1813-15: the Usk Tram Road;
1817: the Mansfield and Pinxton Branch;
1818: the Kidwelly and Llanelly Canal and Tramroad Company Act; the Kington Railway Act;
1819: the Leeds and Liverpool Canal Branch and Railway Act; the Plymouth and Dartmoor Railway Act;
1820: the York and North Midland Railway Act; and the Plymouth and Dartmoor Railway (Crabtree and Sutton Pool Branch) Act. [18]
All these and more received their Royal Assent in advance of the S&D at some great expense. Dawson explains that “getting such an Act was very expensive and required having a Parliamentary Agent and introducing a Private Members’ Bill. It would then have to go through both Houses and committee stage and, unless the Bill could demonstrate it was for the public good, could be thrown out at any stage. It was a big risk, but ultimately worth it. Even though the Middleton had an Act, it didn’t mean it was a public railway. It was owned by the Brandlings, to carry their coal to market. It wasn’t open to any other users, and wasn’t a public right of way.” [3]
Not the first railway, not the first to use iron, not the first railway to received Royal Assent through an Act of Parliament. …Was, then, the S&D the first public railway?
All the railways built in the 17th and 18th centuries were private railways, built over private land. Dawson notes that, “or a railway to be public – to be public right-of-way – that meant it needed an Act of Parliament. It also meant that, until 1825 when the law was changed, an Act was also needed to form a joint-stock company.” [3]
Lake Lock Rail Road was the first public railway in England. It opened in 1798. [132]
The first public railway in England was the Lake Lock Rail Road (LLRR), which opened in 1798. It linked collieries near Wakefield to the Aire & Calder Navigation. The LLRR qualifies as a public railway “because it was open to any user upon payment of a toll and because its capital was held in publicly traded shares. … The LLRR didn’t operate the railway itself, but rather allowed colliery owners to run their own trains on it, for which a toll was paid.” [3] The LLRR can claim another first! As well as being “probably the world’s first public railway, it was also owned … by the world’s first public railway company.” [21]
If you are unhappy with the idea of the LLRR being the first public railway, Then perhaps you would have to accept the Surrey Iron Railway as the next contender for the title – It required an Act of Parliament and incorporated in 1803 and fully open at the latest by 1806.
The first public railway carrying passengers – The Swansea and Mumbles Railway. [131]
The first passenger-carrying public railway in the United Kingdom was opened by the Swansea and Mumbles Railway at Oystermouth in 1807, using horse-drawn carriages on an existing tramline. [19][20]
The first public railway in Scotland was the Kilmarnock & Troon Railway (K&TR) which finally opened in 1812. Like the LLRR, it operated as a toll road, so that independent carriers could place wagons on it, and pay for the facility. [22]
We have established that the Stockton & Darlington was not the first public railway. Given what we have already discovered, our next question needs to be one about the intentions of the designers and directors of the Stockton & Darlington.
Was the Stockton & Darlington the first to be designed and built with mechanical operation in mind?
Here we have to start from an ambivalent position. … It depends! … Do you see hydraulic power as a form of mechanical power? If your answer is ‘Yes’, then the first length of railway to be operated mechanically is one known to have existed in Sweden in the late 1600s, where a waterwheel was employed to haul wagons up an incline. By the end of the 1700s, this technology was in use in Mas-sachusetts (on the South Hadley Canal) for a rail-based lift for canal boats linked with practice at Ketley, Shropshire at that time but assisted by power from a water wheel. There was another ex-ample at Bad Gastein in what is now Germany. [114][115: p87 & p337][116] The water-powered haulage of wagons up an inclined plane in the UK was initially limited to one location in Devon alt-hough the practice was used much later in North Wales. [115: p87-88]
If we set aside waterpower, perhaps the S&DR could stake a claim to be the first publicrailway designed to be worked mechanically. But it definitely was not the first to be operated mechanically. … (More of that later).
Setting aside waterpower, was the S&DR the first railway designed to be operated mechanically? … Again the answer is ‘No!’ … Early inclines were self-acting, water power could support this but, as Gwyn tells us, experience on the Ketley Incline led Reynolds, when carrying out a survey for a canal to connect the Oakengates collieries with the River Severn, to conclude that the wastage of water from locks “would be prohibitive, and after much hesitation and a public competition, he and the other shareholders resolved on a modification of the Ketley system, but with fixed steam engines on its three inclined planes, at Donnington Wood, Windmill Farm and Hay. Instead of locks at the summit as at Ketley, reverse railed slopes were constructed into docks permanently kept in water, and the cradles were equipped with overlapping wheels which ran on ledges on the docksides to maintain them in a horizontal position. The engines were used to draw boats and cradles out of the docks and to haul up the main incline if necessary. All three were built to a hybrid design by Reynold’s protégé, Adam Heslop. These were the first locations in the world where railed vehicles were moved by steam. They were operational by 1793.” [115: p89]
The top of the Hay Inclined Plane as drawn by Agustín de Betancourt. [136]Rendered isometric views of the 3D CAD model of the top area/winding house of the Hay Incline. [136]
This was followed by a significant section of the Lancaster Canal crossing the Ribble Valley. In 1803, steam-powered inclines were used “to connect the northern and southern ends of the Lancaster Canal. Its three inclined planes were each equipped with a high-pressure 6-horsepower 13-inch cylinder engine costing £350 and made by Summerfield and Atkinson, a local foundry which offered ‘patent steam engines’, and which also built the waggons. The first was installed in May of that year. In June, a 6-horsepower steam engine was installed on a plateway incline to haul spoil on the construction of London Docks.” [115: p89]
From the turn of the nineteenth century a number of shorter inclines were being steam-operated or steam-assisted. Examples include: an incline at Wellington Quay on the North bank of the Tyne (where George Stephenson was employed for a time), 1802/1803; an incline at Glynneath, connecting Aberdare Ironworks with Neath Canal, 1805; Bewicke Main (Urpeth) Colliery, 1805. [115: p89-91]
Three years prior to the opening of the Stockton & Darlington Railway George Stephenson designed and built another railway (the Hetton Colliery Railway) which, like the Stockton & Darlington “used a combination of stationary engines, rope haulages and level sections worked by locomotives.” [3] However, the Hetton Colliery Railway was a private, not a public railway:- “The Hetton Colliery Railway was an 8-mile (13 km) long private railway opened in 1822 by the Hetton Coal Company at Hetton-le-Hole, County Durham. … The Hetton was the first railway to be designed from the start to be operated without animal power, as well as being the first entirely new line to be developed by … George Stephenson.” [25]
Again, if we set aside hydraulic and discrete uses of stationary steam-power, it seems that the Stockton & Darlington was the first ‘public‘ (rather than ‘private‘) railway to be designed and built with steam power in mind. This, perhaps, feels as though we are making some headway. … The Stockton & Darlington was the first ‘public‘ railway to be designed and built with steam power in mind. … That is definitely a ‘first’ isn’t it. ….
Was the Stockton & Darlington the first railway to use steam power?
Surely, given that the S&DR was the first public railway designed for mechanical operation, that must mean that it was the first to use steam-powered engines. Mustn’t it?
Nothing is that simple!
The Middleton Railway in Leeds, was using steam power by 1812: “In 1812, it introduced the worlds first commercially successful steam locomotives which were designed and built in Leeds. These locomotives incorporated one of the most significant advances in the design of the steam locomotive – namely the twin cylinder engine which eliminated the need for the cumbersome flywheel employed on earlier single cylinder engined locomotives.” [24][34][35][36]
Incidentally, because it was the first railway to regularly use steam locomotives, the Middleton Railway also “lays claim to other firsts; they employed the first regular professional train driver in the world, a former pit labourer named James Hewitt. More tragically, a 13 year old boy called John Bruce was killed in February 1813 whilst running along the tracks – almost certainly the first member of public killed by a locomotive.” [36]
The Kilmarnock & Troon Railway first used steam power in 1817: in 1817 the Duke of Portland acquired a locomotive for the K&TR named ‘The Duke‘, which was the first use of steam locomotive power in Scotland. Its use was however discontinued in view of frequent breakages of the cast-iron rails on the line. [23] … Notes in The Railway Magazine of January 1950, suggest that this was only a hiatus in the use of this locomotive on the K&TR: In his ‘Story of the Life of George Stephenson‘, Samuel Smiles noted the discontinued use of ‘The Duke‘, but later, in his ‘Lives of the Engineers Volume III’ he appears to have secured further information, viz: “The iron wheels of this engine were afterwards removed, and replaced with wooden wheels, when it was again placed upon the road and continued working until the year 1848.” [43: p59][44: p139] This is supported by W. J. Gordon, writing in 1910, who says of the K&TR: “on it was placed the Killingworth engine with the chain gearing bought by the Duke of Portland from George Stephenson in 1817. The iron wheels of this remarkable engine broke down the cast-iron rails, for it thumped horribly, but, instead of being withdrawn from duty, as usually reported, it had its iron wheels taken off and replaced by wooden ones; and with wooden wheels it worked the traffic-mineral, goods and passenger-until 1848, for so many years in fact that it has been confused with or mistaken for the old St. Rollox, one of the first engines of the Glasgow & Garnkirk, which it in no way resembled.” [43: p59-60][45: p188-190]
Gordon appears to “have picked up and recorded a local railway tradition about the locomotive. It is difficult to credit that an old Killingworth-type engine was re-furbished in 1839 or later, after two decades of disuse, but this seems to be the only way of reconciling the various scraps of evidence. No trace has been found of any other Kilmarnock & Troon locomotive.” [43: p60]
It would be impossible to argue that the K&TR was built with steam power in mind, however, the K&TR was definitely the first use of steam-power on a public railway in Scotland. It could also be argued that this was the first use of steam power on a public railway in the United Kingdom. This was eight years before the Stockton and Darlington first used steam-powered trains.
However, neither of these could justifiably make a claim to be the first to use steam on a revenue earning railway. That accolade must go to the Merthyr Tramroad (otherwise known as the Pen-y-Darren Tramway and associated with the Pen-y-darren Ironworks, in Merthyr Tydfil) a bit earlier in the 19th century, on 21st February 1804 to be more precise, and to a locomotive designed by Richard Trevithick.
“In 1802, Trevithick took out a patent for his high-pressure steam engine. To prove his ideas, he built a stationary engine at the Coalbrookdale Company’s works in Shropshire in 1802, forcing water to a measured height to measure the work done. The engine ran at forty piston strokes a minute, with an unprecedented boiler pressure of 145 psi.” [26]
It seems that the experiment in Shropshire led to Trevithick experimenting with creating steam railway locomotives. He had already designed and built a road locomotive, ‘Puffing Devil‘. [27]
In 1802, the Coalbrookdale Company in Shropshire built a rail locomotive for him. [28] The death of a company workman in an accident involving the engine is said to have caused the company to not proceed to running it on their existing railway. [29]
The drawing above has been used as the basis of all images and replicas of the later ‘Pen-y-darren’ locomotive, as no plans for that locomotive have survived. It cannot be an exact sister of the later locomotive because there is a tunnel on the Pen-y-darren Tramway which would have required a lower chimney and a smaller flywheel. [3]
The S&DR was not the first railway to use a steam locomotive. However, the S&DR saw a step change in the use of steam power. … “Prior to 1825 no one had ever attempted to run a locomotive as far as George Stephenson did; the furthest they had ever run was a few miles.” [3] George Stephenson had such faith in steam power “that he designed and built a steam railway to be worked by locomotives not just for a couple of miles but for tens of miles” [3] – twenty six miles in all!
We have established that the S&DR was the first ‘public‘ (rather than ‘private‘) railway to be designed and built with steam power in mind. We have seen that while not the first to use steam-power, it was the first to be so confident in the new technology to believe that it could be used over significant distances.
We have noted, in passing, that the majority of different railways in use prior to 1825, were designed to carry coal or iron ore and some other ancillary forms of freight.
Can we say that the Stockton & Darlington was the first to carry fare-paying passengers over any significant distance?
Dawson tells us that “unofficial passenger carrying goes back into the 18th Century, on what were private mineral lines. The first public railway, as authorised by an Act of Parliament and which authorised the railway to do so was the Swansea & Mumbles Railway of 1807. This was a horse-drawn service, working to a timetable and, in 1812, saw the first railway station open in Swansea.” [3]
He continues: “The first passenger service on a public railway in Scotland was in 1813, on the Kilmarnock & Troon [Railway]. Again, it was horse-worked but like the Stockton & Darlington tickets could be bought from local inns along the line – as well as refreshments and parcels left there to be carried by the railway as well. There was a long history of public passenger railways before 1825. … Therefore, the Stockton & Darlington was tapping into an existing idea.” [3]
David Gwyn says: “In April 1807 the first known public railway passenger service was inaugurated, enabling tourists to enjoy the beauties of Swansea Bay along a plateway opened the previous year to carry limestone from the Mumbles to the copper smelters, and coal and manure in the opposite direction. Such services were soon found on railways in the border country, Scotland and the English West Country. Some carriers offered pleasure carriages for hire. Well-heeled people could now make railway journeys in order to enjoy attractive scenery, and humbler folk could travel by train to buy and sell – both Dr Griffiths plateway from the Rhondda to Pontypridd and the rail section of the Somerset Coal Canal to Radstock were used by women taking farm produce to market.” [115: p71-72]
Gwyn goes on to say that, “Carriers offering passenger services for wealthy tourists built specially designed vehicles, including long-wheelbase carriages on the Sirhowy, hauled at 6 or 7 mph, and on the Oystermouth.” William Chapman suggested in 1813 that ‘long carriages, properly constructed, and placed on two different sets of Wheels, viz. 8 in all, may take 30 or 40 people with their articles to market’.” A ‘market caravan’ on the Plymouth and Dartmoor had fireplaces to keep passengers warm, and there was also an open carriage with an awning. The Kilmarnock and Troon had a coach called ‘the Caledonia’, another called ‘the boat’, then one variously described as ‘an enormous Gypsy caravan’, ‘the Czar’s winter sledge’ and a ‘Brobdingnagian diligence’.” On other systems, humbler passengers rode on unconverted waggons, perhaps for the price of some beer money to the haulier or some other acknowl-edgement, or paid a fare to travel in a coal waggon which had been brushed out, and had planks inserted to serve as seats.” [115: p73]
Let’s tighten up the question. …
Was the S&DR the first to use steam for passenger trains?
Again we have to ask what criteria this should be judged by. Dawson says, “Yes, the opening train of the Stockton & Darlington was indeed pulled by a locomotive, and … included a purpose-built passenger carriage and passengers travelling in coal waggons, but that was a one-off event. It wasn’t the start of a regular steam-worked passenger service. Indeed, the Stockton & Darlington’s passenger service was horse-worked until 1833.” [3]
It was only after a number of years of operating passenger services that the economic potential for steam powered passenger services was recognised by the S&DR and it introduced its own steam hauled passenger services in 1833. It should be borne in mind that, “Although the S&DR made use of steam locomotives from its opening day, it can also be seen to represent a transitional stage of railway development in which stationary engines and horse-drawn vehicles were also utilised. Although [George Stephenson’s] ‘Locomotion’ represents a notable development [in] the earlier pioneering work of George Stephenson and others, it is fair to say that the subsequent work of Timothy Hackworth, the first Superintendent Engineer of the S&DR, proved the supremacy of the steam locomotive over other forms of motive power.” [37]
We have already noted in passing that passengers were carried on a number of earlier steam powered trains:
on 21st February 1804, Trevithick’s locomotive pulled a train of coal wagons which carried workmen (over 11 tons of coal, five wagons and 70 men) over the length of the line and it was also proposed to couple a private carriage begin the engine; [38][39]
Trevithick’s ‘Catch Me Who Can‘ of 1808 was pioneering in two ways – it was the first purpose-built passenger locomotive, as well as the first to haul fare-paying passengers; [33] and,
steam-powered trains on the Middleton Railway and associated lines also carried passengers, informally from very early days, formally by around 1834. [40]
We also have to note that the first regular steam-worked passenger service was to be established in May 1830 on the Canterbury and Whitstable Railway, which incidentally issued the first ever season tickets in 1834. [41] That line “was worked by a combination of stationary engines and a single locomotive – the now preserved Invicta, designed and built by Robert Stephenson & Co in Leeds immediately after Rocket.” [3]
In September 1830, the Liverpool and Manchester opened with a timetabled steam-powered passenger service. So, the S&DR cannot claim to be the first steam-powered passenger service.
If we accept that all of this is true, that the S&DR was not the first in any of the ways already discussed. What can we say about the S&DR which justifies the place it holds in the popular mind and in the eyes of technical specialists, journalists and railway enthusiasts around the world?
What is so special about the Stockton & Darlington Railway?
It is clear that the Stockton & Darlington Railway would not have existed without the, at least, two centuries of railway development which came before it. As Dawson says, “During those two centuries, crucial ideas and crucial technologies were worked out from the track to locomotives, to carrying passengers and legal structures. So, while the Stockton & Darlington wasn’t really the first of anything, it was the culmination of that previous development and evolution. It represents the bringing together and synthesising of existing ideas into a new concept. A public railway, authorised by Act of Parliament, to carry passengers, to use steam locomotives and use iron rails. In many ways it was, as Andy Guy noted in 2016, ‘better than the first’.” [3]
The Museum at Hopetown, Darlington says that, “The Stockton & Darlington was by no means the first railway, but its opening in 1825 marked a very significant step in the development of railways by bringing together two features for the first time:the concept of a public railway, available to all, for transport of passengers and goods; andthe use of steam locomotives.” [37]
On that first journey on 27th September 1825, made by the locomotive, ‘Locomotion No. 1‘, driven by George Stephenson, a large number of wagons filled with coal, flour and passengers were hauled along the line. There was a passenger carriage called ‘Experiment’ present which carried the railway’s directors. 300 passenger tickets were sold officially. However, a total amount of nearly 700 passengers were crammed into the wagons and the total load on that day was about 80 tons! [42]
There was clearly a sense that something momentous was happening that day and history has proven that to be the case.
And that initial success, together with that of the neighbouring Hetton Colliery Railway, meant that George Stephenson had demonstrable experience in the use of steam locomotives and places on which to trial his continued development of the technology.
As Dawson says, the S&DR “wasn’t the first. It wasn’t the first railway, it wasn’t the first steam railway, nor was it the first main line railway. But what it did do was put the railway squarely on the map and in the public consciousness showing what a steam-worked railway could do, laying the foundations for everything that came afterwards.” [3] It was a critical link in the chain of developments that brought about our modern railways. “The Liverpool & Manchester and the birth of main line railways as we know them simply wouldn’t have happened without the Stockton & Darlington Railway.” [3] It placed George Stephenson at the forefront of the development of railway technology and gave him space to test and modify locomotive design.
In that context, However, we must acknowledge the strength of debate underway between 1825 and 1829.
In this four-year period there was an intense debate about whether locomotive power or stationary engines were best.
Stephenson ascribed to the use of fixed engines where gradients were both short and steep. Others argued for the use of a variety of different fixed engines. The directors of the Liverpool & Manchester Railway challenged Stephenson’s proposals for the use of locomotives. This resulted in a number of studies taking place. The first of these took place on the S&DR and reported that rope haul-age would be suitable for the Liverpool & Manchester, with the proviso that it could cause problems at level crossings and at junctions.
A second study based at the Bolton & Leigh Railway and at the Middleton Railway also found in favour of the use of stationary engines for the Liverpool & Manchester spaced at no more than 2-mile intervals, with goods and passengers changing from one system to another at locations dictated by the gradient or by the length of rope in use. That study saw the value of locomotives for light loads but estimated that the rate per ton per mile for heavier loads would be 2/3 of a penny cheaper with stationary engines rather than locomotives.
There was a worldwide proliferation of the use of stationary engines from the second half of the 1820s into the 1830s.
The complexity of use of the stationary engines over significant distances, the necessary transshipment of goods and passengers to suit the technology eventually brought the director of the Liverpool & Manchester to the conclusion that provided locomotives could meet specific criteria then they should be used for the longer lower gradient length (35 miles) of the railway.
There is little doubt that the experience of working the S&DR and the rapid development in loco-motive technology which resulted gave Stephenson and Hackworth a clear advantage over any competition. But it must be remembered that the ‘ordeal’ at Rainhill was as much about the choice between stationary engines and mobile locomotives as it was about which was the best locomotive.
Both Hackworth and Stephenson entered locomotive for the Rainhill Trials Stephenson’s expertise, honed by experience on the S&DR and built on a fastidious attention to detail which saw all parts of Rocket tried and tested as part of a component review, resulted in Rocket significantly out-performing all its competitors (including Hackworth), but perhaps of greater significance, the debate over the use of locomotives or stationary engines had been conclusively resolved in favour of the locomotive.
Locomotive design was developing so quickly that after 1831, Rocket became design-expired and was only used on engineers’ trains and for other secondary duties! [137] [115: p144-171]
To summarise, … the S&DR:
Was a significant step forward on a journey to technological advancement and in the history of transport. The S&DR made a critical contribution to the history of the world, not just to the development of railways. It:
Demonstrated the Feasibility of Steam Railways as a means of transport of goods and passengers over significant distances. It proved that steam-powered trains could be a practical and profitable means of transport, not just for coal but also for passengers.
Inspired Global Growth: The S&DR’s success led to a surge in railway construction both in Britain and around the world, as other countries sought to replicate its model. Initially, it gave confidence to a number of investors in railways. After the opening of the S&DR, people knew that they would be investing in proven technology, not risking their money on what was no more than an experiment.
Brought About Technological Innovation: The S&DR pioneered various railway technologies, including signaling systems, timetables, and station layouts, which became standard practices in the railway industry.
Had a Significant Economic Impact: The railway transformed the Tees Valley into an industrial powerhouse, facilitating the transport of goods and people, and contributing to the growth of new industries and towns.
Had a Manifest Social Impact: The S&DR made travel more accessible to people of all classes, leading to increased social mobility and cultural exchange.
Created a Legacy: The S&DR is considered the “birthplace of the modern railway system” and its legacy continues to be celebrated through museums, heritage sites, and ongoing research.
By the time Richard Trevithick died in 1833 the first main lines were extending across Britain. By the time of George Stephenson’s death in 1848, the railway mania was in full swing. Soon the world would be crisscrossed by parallel iron rails, and nothing would ever be the same again. Places once considered perilously distant could be reached in hours.
However, if the S&DR had not opened in 1825, somewhere else would have taken its place as the birth-place of modern railways within a matter of a few short years. It was however, the tipping point when one excellent technology of tramway and tramroad gave way to what we now call the railway..
Industries would soon transport their goods across the globe with ease.
Industrial output grew exponentially. … Cities were reshaped now that people didn’t have to live within walking distance of work.
Businesses could be more productive than ever before with reliable means of communication. News of events in far-off places could be on the breakfast table the following day.
Railways would drive wars and revolutions.
Railways also made going on holiday accessible to ordinary people.
Railways were celebrated in literature music and film.
The new need for consistent timekeeping across the country meant that Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) was adopted as standard – even time itself would be spiked to the iron way.
And here we are, 200 years later in a world that Trevithick and Stephenson would barely recognize. Perhaps the best way to end would be with a quote attributed to Stephenson found in Smile’s biography of George Stephenson and told to Smile by John Dixon. …
“The time will come when railways will supersede almost every other form of conveyance in this country when mail coaches will go by railway and railroads will become the great highway for the king and all his subjects. I know there will be great and almost insurmountable difficulties to be encountered but what I have said will come to pass as sure as you live.” [George Stephenson]
References
Andrew Wilson; The Stainmore Route and the Eden Valley Line; in Rex Kennedy (ed.); Steam Days, Red Gauntlet Publications , Bournemouth, Forest, January 2002, p13-30.
J. S. Jeans; Jubilee Memorial of the Railway System. A History of the Stockton and Darlington Railway and a Record of Its Results; Longmans, Green & Co., London, 1875. (later 1974 ed., p74).
M. J. T. Lewis; Railways in the Greek and Roman World, in A. Guy & J. Rees, J. (eds.); Early Railways. A Selection of Papers from the First International Early Railways Conference; (PDF); Newcomen Society, London, 2001, p8–19; via https://web.archive.org/web/20110721083013/http://www.sciencenews.gr/docs/diolkos.pdf, accessed on 26th March 2025.
David Gwyn and Neil Cossons; Early Railways in England: Review and summary of recent research; Historic England, Discovery, Innovation and Science in the Historic Environment Research Report Series No. 25-2017; via
“The first railways in England probably date, at earliest, from the second half of the 16th century and were associated with mines where German-speaking miners were employed. Smith-Grogan 2010 suggests that several Cornish rutways might date back to the 1550s and be associated with Burchard Cranich and Ulrich Frosse. The West-Country mining engineer Sir Bevis Bulmer (1536-1615) was familiar with Agricola’s De Re Metallica (Skempton 2002), and another possible literary conduit is Sebastian Munster’s Cosmographia Universalis, published in German in 1544 and in Latin in 1550. This includes a woodcut of a hund on flanged wooden rails in a mine at Ste Marie/Markirch in Alsace (Lewis 1970, 51).” [12: p20]
G. Smith-Grogan; Rutways in Cornwall; in Early Railways 4, Fourth International Early Railways Conference; Newcomen Society, London, 2010.
J. Longworth and P. Rickard; Plateways, Steel Road Rails, Stoneways, and Rutways in Australia; in Early Railways 6, Sixth International Early Railways Conference; Newcomen Society, London, 2016.
“Designed and built by Matthew Murray, four of these locomotives were built for use in Leeds, where they lasted – despite one blowing up – until the early 1830s. Three were built for use around Newcastle-upon-Tyne; three under licence for use near Wigan, and one for service in South Wales. A working model was sent to the Tsar of Russia and copies were built in modern-day Belgium and Poland. This means not only were they the first locomotives in commercial use, but the first built in any number and the first to be used in many countries around the world.” [3]
The design of this early locomotive address one particular problem associated with these early locomotives: “Colliery manager John Blenkinsop focussed on a particular problem with locomotives on cast-iron rails, specifically that an engine light enough to run on the tracks without breaking them would have trouble with the weight of the wagons and the often steep gradients of the track. Blenkinsop relaid the track on one side with a toothed rail – patented in 1811 – and approached engineer Matthew Murray to design a locomotive with a pinion to mesh with the rail. The resulting Salamanca became the first commercial steam locomotive to operate successfully in 1812.” [36]
Maurice W. Kirby; The Origins of Railway Enterprise: The Stockton and Darlington Railway 1821–1863; Cambridge University Press. 2002.
In the 19th century members of the Society of Friends travelled to attend regular meetings and came to know Quakers elsewhere, this leading to marriages and business partnerships. The Society of Friends published guidance on conduct that included honesty in business matters, and this gave Quakers the confidence to invest in the dealings of a devout member. [50: p52, 79–80, 128]
“In the mean time, a bill is to be brought into Parliament to carry a rail-way from Bishop Auckland to Darlington and Stockton. Mr. Stevenson … has been called … to give an opinion as to the best line. The work is estimated at 120,000l., a great part of which is already subscribed.” [53: p223]
Thomas Thomson, ed.; Durham Coal Field; in Annals of Philosophy. Vol. XIII.; Baldwin, Cradock and Joy, London, March 1819.
“From [1825] on, an abundance of maps, plans, diagrams and technical drawings were created to enable railways to be planned, constructed and operated; to be changed, developed and regulated; to attract business and passengers; and to provide railway staff with a range of specialist tools.” [56]
Diana Collecott; The Arrival of Quakerism in Teesdale; in The Quaker Line: A study to understand the importance of the Quaker community to the Stockton & Darlington Railway; compiled by the Friends of the Stockton & Darlington Railway (FSDR), supported by Historic England, 2022/3, p7-14; via https://www.sdr1825.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/The-Quaker-Line-Alan-Townsend-Ed.pdf, accessed on 14th July 2025.
L. T. C. Rolt; George and Robert Stephenson: The Railway Revolution; Penguin, 1984.
Malleable iron rails cost £12 10s and cast iron rails £6 15s per ton at that time, but malleable iron rails could be less than half the weight for the same strength. [59: p74]
“Smiles [62: p160] states that early tramroads had rails 4 ft 8 in (1,422 mm) apart, but Tomlinson [49: p82–83] questions this, stating that the most common gauge of the early tramroads and waggonways was about 4 ft (1,219 mm), and some, such as the Wylam Waggonway, had the rails 5 ft (1,524 mm) apart. The gauge of the S&DR was given in early documents as 4 ft 8 in (1,422 mm), but the distance between the rails was later measured as 4 ft 8+1⁄2 in (1,435 mm), and this became the standard gauge used by 60 per cent of railways worldwide. The difference of 1⁄2 inch (13 mm) is a mystery.” [54][63: p75][64]
“The Skerne bridge was shown on the reverse of the Series E five-pound note that featured George Stephenson, issued by the Bank of England between 1990 and 2003.[66] Allen [48: p22] and Tomlinson [49: p93–95] state that Bonomi was directly appointed by the directors after Stephenson had ignored suggestions to consult him, but Rolt [59: p75] does not mention this.” [54]
“Smiles [62: p166] has an image of this railway coach and describes it as ‘a somewhat uncouth machine’, even though the Illustrated London News had discounted in 1875 an earlier publication of Smiles’ image, stating that coach used on the opening day was a similar to a road coach. [72] Tomlinson [49: p109–110] describes the coach as having a table, cushioned seats and carpets, and criticises the Smiles image for the lack of roof seats, having the wheels outside the coach frame and says that the drawing in Smiles does not look like a vehicle that was built for £80 (approximately £8300 in 2023). [73]
Railway Jubilee at Darlington; Illustrated London News. 2nd October 1875, p342.
UK Retail Price Index inflation figures are based on data from Gregory Clark; The Annual RPI and Average Earnings for Britain, 1209 to Present (New Series); MeasuringWorth, 2017, via https://measuringworth.com/datasets/ukearncpi accessed on 15th July 2025.
“These waggons (known as wagons after about 1830) [75] were designed to carry a Newcastle chaldron (pronounced ‘chalder’ in Newcastle) of coal, about 53 long cwt (5,900 lb; 2,700 kg). This differed from the London chaldron, which was 36 bushels or 25+1⁄2 long cwt (2,860 lb; 1,300 kg). [49: p120][76]
A. A. Jackson; The Railway Dictionary: An A-Z of Railway Terminology; Alan Sutton, 1922, p322.
Bill Griffiths; A Dictionary of North East Dialect; Northumbria University Press. 2005, p30.
An imperial or long ton is the same as 1.016 metric tonnes and 1.120 short tons, the US customary unit.
Compare Tomlinson (49: p141–142) and Rolt (59: p143).
Robert Young; Timothy Hackworth and the Locomotive; Locomotive Publishing Co., London, 1923 – republished by The Hackworth Society/The Book Guild Ltd., 2000 in PB.
A. N. Mackay, ed.; A History of North Eastern Railway Signalling; North Eastern Railway Association, 2016.
Francis Whishaw; The Railways of Great Britain and Ireland Practically Described and Illustrated (2nd ed.); John Weale, London,1842.
“Passenger accommodation was sometimes classified as inside and outside following the practice on stage-coaches; express trains with premium fares were known as first-class trains. The S&DR introduced third class accommodation on some trains in 1835 as people unable to afford a second class ticket had been walking along the tracks.” [93]
Charles Edward Lee; Passenger Class Distinctions; in the Railway Gazette, London, 1946.
Bradshaw’s Monthly General Railway and Steam Navigation Guide; March 1843, p16
A. Guy; Better Than First: the Significance of the Stockton & Darlington Railway, 1821-30;(unpub paper given at the Friends of the S&DR Conference June 2015).
José Ignacio Rojas-Sola & Eduardo De la Morena-De la Fuente; The Hay Inclined Plane in Coalbrookdale (Shropshire, England): Geometric Modeling and Virtual Reconstruction; Symmetry 2019, Volume 11, No. 4, p589; https://doi.org/10.3390/sym11040589; via https://www.mdpi.com/2073-8994/11/4/589, accessed on 20th August 2025.
M.R. Bailey & J.P. Glithero; The Engineering and History of Rocket; National Railway Museum, London and York, 2000.
The featured image above is a rather grainy image of steam at Drap-Cantaron Railway Station.
In the first six articles about the line from Cuneo to the sea we covered the length of the line from Cuneo to Breil-sur-Roya and then to Ventimiglia. These articles can be found here, [9] here [10] here, [11] here, [12] here, [13] and here [14]
Woven into the text below are a series of stills from a video of the train journey from Breil-sur-Roya to Nice. The video can be seen here. [4]
This article begins the journey from L’Escarene.
Initially, the line heads Southeast but then gradually turns to the the Southwest through Peille, Peillon and Drap before running into Nice.
The map below shows the two routes which headed from Nice and Ventimiglia North to Cuneo, as they existed prior to the alteration of the border between France and Italy after the Second World War.
The lines Nice to Tende and Ventimiglia to Tende in the period from 1928 to the Second World War, before the annexation, in 1947, of St-Dalmas de Tende and Piene to France. [15]
From l’Escarene to Drap-Cantaron
The line from L’Escarene to Drap/Cantaron. [25]
L’Escarene sits at the head of a long climb from Nice, it was one of the historic staging posts on the old royal road from Nice to Turin. Like Sospel Station, that of l’Escarene has substantial facilities which would allow the reception of military convoys in the event of conflict with neighbouring Italy. [1: p92]
It is only a very short distance to the abutment of the viaduct that carries the line through l’Escarene.
The D2566 passes West-East under the railway and then curves round to join the D2204 and pass North-South under the West end of the railway viaduct. The Anc. Rte de L’Escarène passes through the first arch of the viaduct. The D2204 passes through the second arch of the viaduct. [Google Maps, September 2025]
Setting off from l’Escarene Railway station, this is the first view of the l’Escarene Viaduct from the cab of a Nice-bound train. The viaduct over the Redebraus has eleven 15 metre arches. [4]
Part way across the viaduct the camera in the cab of the Nice-bound service picks up the metal parapet rails of the viaduct and the short tunnel ahead. [4]
The tunnel at the Southeast end of l’Escarene Viaduct is the Tunnel de Brec (382 metres in length. [19]
The Northwest portal of Brec Tunnel seen from alongside the line. [19]
The same crossing on Google’s satellite imagery. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The view Southeast from the mouth of Brec Tunnel. [4]
Turning through 180, provides us this view of the Southeast portal of Brec Tunnel. [19]
A gated crossing over the line a little further to the Southeast. [4]
The view from Rte de Tres, looking back towards l’Escarene Railway Station. [Google Streetview, November 2022] From the same location looking Southeast. Notice the bridge over the line. [Google Streetview, November 2022]
The view of the same bridge from the cab of the Nice-bound train. [4]
The bridge carry Rte de Tres over the line. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Looking Northwest along the line from the bridge carrying Rte de Tres over the line. [Google Streetview, November 2022]
The view Southeast from the same bridge. [Google Streetview, November 2022]
The next overbridge carries Rte de l’Eira over the line. [4]
Looking North from the bridge carrying Rte de l’Eira over the line. [Google Streetview, April 2013]
Looking South from the same bridge. [Google Streetview, April 2013]
Southeast, the line enters Tunnel de Ecluse (136 metres in length). Just before this, there is a footpath access under the embankment. [34]
The underbridge mentioned above, seen from the D21. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
The Northwest portal of Tunnel de Ecluse, seen from the cab of a Nice-bound train. [4]
The same tunnel mouth, seen from the lineside. [34]
The view from the cab of the Nice-bound train at the Southeast portal of Tunnel de Ecluse. [4]
Turning to face Westnorthwest, this is the Southeast portal of the Tunnel de Ecluse. [34]
The next feature on the line is a short tunnel – Tunnel d’Euira (63 metres in length). [32]
Tunnel d’Euira is on the right side of this satellite image. [Google Maps, September 2025]
The North portal of Tunnel d’Euira. [32]
The South portal of Tunnel d’Euira and the galleried retaining structure which carries the line from a point very close to the tunnel portal. [32]
From many an angle, you would be forgiven for thinking that the railway crosses a viaduct. It appears, however, that the structure is a galleried retaining structure which creates a platform for the railway to run on while limiting the wight of the structure on the rock face beneath. [Google Maps, September 2025]
This view of the location from a little further ‘South, shows that the trackbed abuts the rockface on the East side of the line. [32]
Looking East from a short length of the D21, the galleried retaining structure, which is almost a viaduct, can be seen. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
The railway continues on a ‘berm’ built out from the East face of the Paillon valley and high above the D21, until it reaches the Ruisseau d’Euira.
This small extract from Google’s satellite imagery shows Le Paillon, the D21 and the railway in parallel. The railway bridge over the Ruisseau d’Euira is on the right of this image. [Google Maps, September 2025]
The Viaduc d’Euira crosses the valley of the Ruisseau d’Euira. The viaduct has one 30 m arch and two 5 m arches. [31]
The Tunnel de Santa Augusta (754 metres in length) runs under the Ste-Augusta Chapelle. [30]
The South portal of the Tunnel de Santa Augusta. As can be seen the tunnel runs straight between the two portals, allowing the light from the North portal to be seen from outside the South portal. This photograph was taken alongside the track crossing the Viaduc d’Erbossièra. [30]
The Viaduc d’Erbossièra (205 metres in length). [29]
Viaduct de Faquin seen from the West on Chemin de Sainte Lucie in the valley floor. [Google Streetview, January 2011]
The northern mouth of Tunnel de Coletta, seen from a Nice-bound train. [4]
Viaduct de Faquin, seen from the D53 which crossed the line above the tunnel mouth to the South of the viaduct (Tunnel de Coletta). [Google Streetview, April 2023]
Tunnel de Coletta. [23]
Immediately to the South of Tunnel de Coletta the railway enters Peille Railway Station in Grave de Peille.
The approach to Grave Railway Station, seen from the cab of a Southbound service at the mouth of Tunnel de Coletta. [4]
Le Gare de Peille is situated on the East bank of the River Paillon on a pan artificial plateau which was created as part of the construction of the line from Nice to breil-sur-Roya. [26]
Peille Railway Station is located 6 km from the village of the same name, and serves the La Grave district, where the Vicat company operated a quarry and cement factory from 1924. A branch of the TNL tramway network reached this point from Pont-de-Peille. [1: p92]
At the South end of the Station site the line becomes single track once again adjacent to a house built originally for railway staff. [4]
South of Peille Railway Station the line passes this railway-built home, usually these houses were built for railway employees, either at a nearby station or working on track maintenance. [Google Streetview, April 2013]The line continues South towards Tunnel de Nogairet. [Google Streetview, April 2013]
Further South the line passes through Tunnel de Nogairet (32 metres in length). [Google Maps, September 2025]
The North portal of Nogairet Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Nice-bound service. [4]
The view South from the cab of the Nice-bound train at the South portal of Nogairet Tunnel.
Turning through 180°, this is the South portal of the Tunnel de Nogairet as seen from the cab a Breil-sur-Roya-bound train in 1995. [37]
And then a short distance further South trains pass through Tunnel de Bouisses.
Tunnel de Bouisses as it appears on Google’s satellite imagery, (107 metres in length). [Google Maps, September 2025]
The North portal of Tunnel de Bouisses, seen from the cab of a Nice-bound train. [4]
Low sun shines on the cab of the same Nice-bound service as it leaves Tunnel de Bouisses and is about to cross the first of two viaducts with the name ‘Bouisses’ (Viaduc de Bouisses No. 2). [4]
Turning through 180°, this low definition view shows the South portal of Tunnel de Bouisses as seen from the cab of a Breil-sur-Roya-bound train in 1995 which is just about to cross Viaduc de Bouisses No. 2. [37]
Viaduc de Bouisses No. 2 (three 6-metre arches), as it appears on Google’s satellite imagery. [Google Maps, September 2025]
A very short distance South-southwest the line crosses Viaduc de Bouisses No. 1. …
Viaduc de Bouisses No. 1 (six 6-metre arches).[Google Maps, September 2025]
In the light of the low sun this is the view South-southwest across Viaduc de Bouisses No. 1 from the cab of the Nice-bound service. [4]
The two Bouisses viaducts seen from across the valley to the West. No. 1 is on the right, No. 2 is on the left, with the portal of Tunnel de Bouisses visible top-left. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
A little further to the South, after running along a trackbed supported by retaining walls trains travelling towards Nice cross the Viaduct de Adrecia, seen here from the cab of the Nice-bound service. [4]
Viaduc de Adrecia (three 6-metre arches). [Google Maps, September 2025]
Viaduc de Adrecia, seen from the D21. [Google Streetview, April 2023]
The line has curved round to the Southeast before it enters Tunnel de Launa, shown here by the red, blue and green dots. Viaduc de Launa sits immediately to the Southeast of the tunnel. [38]
The Northwest portal of Tunnel de Launa (309 metres in length). [4]
This slightly overexposed image shows the view from the cab of the Nice-bound service as it leaves the Tunnel de Launa. The Viaduc de Launa is just beyond the railway house on the left of the image. [4]
The Southeast portal of Tunnel de Launa with a railway house on the right of the image. The viaduct is immediately behind the camera. Note also the level crossing close to the tunnel mouth. [38]
The view East across the railway on Rte du Vieux Village (D121). [Google Streetview, March 2023]This photograph, taken at the apex of a hairpin bend on Rte du Vieux Village (D121) has the tunnel mouth top-left, the railway house just to the right of centre at the top of the image with the railway in front of it spanning a bridge which carries the road under the railway. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
The bridge carrying the railway over Rte du Vieux Village (D121). [Google Streetview, March 2023]
Viaduc de Launa (100 metres in length – six 12-metre arches over the Galimbert stream) seen from the cab of the Nice-bound train running through the level-crossing. The viaduct was rebuilt during 1992 and 1993 as the first viaduct suffered settlement due to ground movement. [4]
Both this and the next image of the pedestrian crossing at Chemin de Laghet – a couple of hundred metres further along the line toward Nice – are of poor quality because of bright and low sunlight. [4]
Immediately to the West of Peillon-Sainte-Thècle Railway Station, the line crosses Pont de Brauschet (five 9 metre arches), seen here from the South on Avenue de la Gare. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
Pont du Brauschet sits just to the West of Peillon-Sainte-Thècle Railway Station and is marked on this map with a red arrow. It is 70 metres long and is a 5-arch viaduct.
Pont de Brauschet, seen from the cab of a train heading for Nice. [4]
The next structure along the line is Tunnel de Châteauvieux (219 metres in length). This in the East portal of the tunnel. [4]
Tunnel de Châteauvieux is the first of three tunnels which Nice-bound trains now pass through. It is marked by the red, blue and green dots on this image. Immediately to the West of this tunnel are the two side-by-side Viaducs des Mortes. [40]
This is the West portal of Tunnel de Châteauvieux, seen from alongside the line between the tunnel and Viaduc des Mortes. [40]
Just to the West of the Tunnel de Châteauvieux there are 2 viaducts next to each other (Viaducs des Mortes) of which only one is in service; the southern one which gives access to the Tuhet tunnel. The viaduct to the north (which has seven arches) leads to an unfinished tunnel. An accident occurred during the drilling of the original tunnel in 1925. The accident, which caused the death of 3 workers, resulted in the need to drill a new tunnel and, as a result, the construction of another viaduct in 1927 (with five 11 metre arches). The viaducts are named, Viaducs des Mortes, not because of the accident but because the viaducts bridge a footpath which was used to take deceased inhabitants of Borghéas to the cemetery of the neighbouring village of Drap.
The two viaducts mentioned above. [Google Maps, September 2025]
The two viaducts, seen from the North. The green arrow indicates the operational viaduct, the red arrow, the redundant viaduct. [48]
A view of both of the two viaducts and the Tunnel de Tuhet beyond. [46]
The East portal of Tunnel de Tuhet, seen from the cab of a Nice-bound service on the Viaduc des Mortes. [4]
The Tunnel de Tuhet (346 metres long). [46]
The West portal of the Tunnel de Tuhet. [46]
The East portal of Tunnel de la Ribosse. [47]
Tunnel de la Ribosse. [47]
The West portal of Tunnel de la Ribosse. [47]
A short distance further West, the line passes through Fontanil-Drap High School Halt.
Fontanil-Drap High School Halt seen from the Southeast on Route des Croves. [Google Streetview, March 2025]
At the West end of the station/halt, the Route des Croves passes under the line. The low arch bridge seen from the South. [Google Streetview, March 2025]
The same structure seen from the North side of the line. [Google Streetview, March 2025]
The next bridge carries the line over Chemin de de l’Ubac. [Google Streetview, March 2025]
The South side of the same structure. [Google Streetview, March 2025]
A short distance further West the line crosses the D2204, the River Paillon and the D2204B. …
The railway station at Drap also served the village of Cantaron which was on the opposite bank of the River Paillon. This old postcard image was shared by Roland Coccoli on the Comte de Nice et son Histoire Facebook Group on 22nd January 2016. [5]A closer view of the Station at Drap. This postcard image was shared on the Comte de Nice et son Histoire Facebook Group by Charles Louis Fevrier on 5th January 2021. [6]
This length of our journey finishes here at Drap-Cantaron Railway Station.
References
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 1: 1858-1928; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 2: 1929-1974; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 3: 1975-1986; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Franco Collida, Max Gallo & Aldo A. Mola; CUNEO-NIZZA History of a Railway; Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo, Cuneo (CN), July 1982.
Franco Collidà; 1845-1979: the Cuneo-Nice line year by year; in Rassegna – Quarterly magazine of the Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo; No. 7, September 1979, pp. 12-18.
Stefano Garzaro & Nico Molino; THE TENDA RAILWAY From Cuneo to Nice, the last great Alpine crossing; Editrice di Storia dei Trasporti, Colleferro (RM), EST, July 1982.
SNCF Region de Marseille; Line: Coni – Breil sur Roya – Vintimille. Reconstruction et équipement de la section de ligne située en territoireFrançais; Imprimerie St-Victor, Marseille (F), 1980.
The featured image above is a poster for the Nice-Cuneo line. It shows Scarassoui Viaduct with a Northbound steam service between the wars (c) Adolphe Crossard. … Public Domain. [49]
In the first three articles about the line from Cuneo to the sea we covered the length of the line from Cuneo to St. Dalmas de Tende. These articles can be found here, [9] here [10] and here. [11]
I also want to acknowledge the assistance given to me by David Sousa of the Rail Relaxation YouTube Channel https://www.youtube.com/@RailRelaxation/featured and https://www.railrelaxation.com and particularly his kind permission given to use still images from rail journeys that he has filmed on the Cuneo Ventimiglia railway line. [35][55]
1. The Line South from St. Dalmas de Tende as far as the French/Italian Border …
St. Dalmas de Tende (San-Dalmazzo-di-Tenda in Italian) was “the last station on Italian territory, before the northern border. This is where the French Forces would install a large-scale border station that will handle customs clearance operations in addition to the French facilities at Breil. In the first phase, a temporary passenger building and a small freight shed were built on the vast embankment created from the spoil from the tunnels upstream of the confluence of the Roya and Biogna rivers. The original layout includes four through tracks, one of which is at the platform, five sidings, three storage tracks, a temporary engine shed, a 9.50 m turntable, and a hydraulic power supply for the locomotives.” [1: p127]
It is here, at St. Dalmas de Tende, that we start this fourth part of our journey from Cuneo to the coast. Before we do set off southwards we note that the Tende to La Brigue “tranche of the work on the line was awarded to the Tuscan contractor Enrico Lévy, and the Briga to St. Dalmas de Tende tranche was executed by the Rosassa company of Alessandria. Work began in 1912 and progressed more quickly than upstream of Tende, thanks to the opening of the construction sites during public holidays and the use of new compressed air drills.” [1: p129]
The line from Tende (Tenda) to San-Dalmazzo-di-Tenda (St. Dalmas de Tende) was opened on 1st June 1915. The three of the four daily services were connected to the Southern arm of the line which by this time had reached Airole, by a coach shuttle. [1: p131]
A temporary station was provided as a terminus of the line from Cuneo. It was sited to the Northeast of the present large station building which was not built until 1928.
A postcard image overlooking the station site at St. Dalmas de Tende prior to the construction of the large station building. This image was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group by Mauro Tosello on 12th June 2022. [19]The San Dalmazzo di Tenda station before the construction of the current building. [12]St. Dalmas de Tende Railway Station as show on OpenStreetMap. [56]The locomotive Depot at St. Dalmas de Tende. The depot was on the Southeast side of the running lines opposite the railway Station and close to the Biogna River. The road shown on the OpenStreetMap plan of the modern station to the Southeast of the site is the road shown at the top of this plan. This drawing comes from From the December 1929 Technical Magazine of Italiane Ferrovie. It was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group on 13th February 2024 by Francesco Ciarlini Koerner. [18]The station during construction work. There is scaffolding on the main station building, which appears to have been built in sections with a completed length nearest to the water tower. The engine shed is under construction, centre-right. This image was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group by Mauro Tosello on 12th June 2022. [20]A postcard view of the Railway Station at St. Dalmas de Tende, taken from the East. The tunnel at the Southwest end of the station site can be seen on the left of the photograph. This image was shared on the Ferrovia internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group by Luisa Grosso on 1st November 2021. [57]The station forecourt, seen from Avenue Martyrs de la Resistance. [Google Streetview, August 2016]A schematic view of the line South of St. Dalmas de Tende, as far as the French/Italian border. [13]
St. Dalmas de Tende Railway Station seen, looking Northeast, from the cab of a North-bound service. [35]
Looking Southwest from alongside the end of the platform of the modern railway station at St. Dalmas de Tende with the grand edifice of the 1928-built station building fenced off on the right. [55]A little further to the Southwest, the line bridges the Bieugne (Biogna) River over a 15-metre arch bridge and then heads into the Biogna Tunnel. [55]The tunnel mouth is in shadow at the bottom-left of this extract from Google’s satellite imagery. The railway bridge over the River Bieugne is centre-bottom with the road bridge (D91) to the left. [Google Maps, August 2025]The railway tunnel mouth is on the centre- left of this view from the D91 with the rail bridge over the river bottom-left and the road bridge over the river ahead. [Google Streetview, August 2016]Looking Northeast from the D91 through the station area. [Google Streetview, August 2016]The view Northeast from the tunnel mouth of the Biogna Tunnel, the road bridge over the river is on the left, the rail bridge over the river is immediately in front of the camera. This photograph is a still image from a video taken from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]The portal of Biogna Tunnel and the bridges over the Bieugne immediately after Storm Alex in October 2020. This photograph was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group by Mario Zauli and Olivier Woignier on 3rd October 2020. [17]One final view of St. Dalmas de Tende railway station. This the Direct 18:83 Turin Porta Nuova – Imperia Porto Maurizio, Locomotive D445.1056 heads a train of five coaches passing through St. Dalmas de Tende on 24th April 1994. This image was shared by Andrea Richermo on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group on 11th April 2020. [21]
From San-Dalmazzo (St. Dalmas), the railway forms two horseshoe loops underground, crossing the Roya three times over a distance of just over a kilometre as the crow flies.
The Biogna Tunnel is the first of these horseshoe tunnels, it is 1154 metres long. We have already seen the approaches to the tunnel from St. Dalmas de Tende Railway Station. The tunnel’s horseshoe shape can be seen on the OpenStreetMap extract below. …
The Biogna Tunnel is horseshoe shaped. [14]
The view Northeast from the southern mouth of Biogna Tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180 degrees this is the mouth of the tunnel, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
Two viaducts cross the valley off La Roya, San Dalmazzo II Viaduct crosses the River Bieugne (three arches each of 15 metres, then the San Dalmazzo III Viaduct, also three 15 metres arches bridging the Avenue de France (E74/D6204) and then La Roya, before disappearing into the Porcarezzo Tunnel. [15]The two viaducts as they appear on Google Maps satellite imagery. [Google Maps, August 2025]In the foreground is a viaduct over the Biogna Torrent; beyond are a viaduct over the River Roya, and then the entrance to the Porcarezzo Tunnel. This section of line is near San Dalmazzo di Tenda. This image was included in an article about the line in Railway Wonders of the World. All that is left of the building at rail level in the left half of the image is the widened surface of the embankment between the two viaducts. [24]
Looking East across San Dalmazzo II Viaduct which has three arched spans, each of 15-metres and crosses the Bieugne River. [55]
Looking East across San Dalmazzo III Viaduct which spans La Roya. This Viaduct has one opening for the road and a narrower archway for pedestrians and has three further 15-metre spans. The mouth of the Porcarezzo Tunnel is in shade. [55]
The bridge over Avenue de France seen from the North. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
The same bridge seen from the South. In this image both the secondary (narrow) arch and the viaduct over La Roya can be seen. [Google Streetview, August 2025]
San Dalmazzo di Tenda Viaduct III, seen from the South on 23rd October 2020. This image was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group by Federico Santagati on 23rd October 2020. [22]
Reinforcement/repair works in November 2020 on San Dalmazzo di Tenda Viaducts II and III after the damage from Storm Alex on October 2 – 3, 2020. This image was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group on 20th November 2020 by Mario Zauli, courtesy of Bernard Woignier. [23]
Looking West across the same viaduct towards the Biogne Tunnel. [35]
The Porcarezzo Tunnel mouth to the East of La Roya. [55]
Looking West from the Porcarezzo Tunnel mouth across the San Dalmazzo III Viaduct. [35]
The Porcarezzo Tunnel turns through 180°, continuing to drop at a gradient of 25mm/m. It is 1249 metres in length. [16]
Southbound trains leave Porcarezzo Tunnel and immediately cross San Dalmazzo di Tenda Viaduct IV. [55]
Turning through 180° we see the Southwest mouth of the Porcarezzo Tunnel which sits above La Roya and is seen here from the cab of a Northbound train on the San Dalmazzo IV Viaduct. [35]
San Dalmazzo di Tenda IV Viaduct as it appears on Google’s satellite imagery. [Google Maps, August 2025.
The approaches to the Porcarezzo Tunnel from the Southwest cross the San Dalmazzo di Tenda IV Viaduct (six 15-metre spans) over La Roya and the E74/D6402. [35]
San Dalmazzo di Tenda IV Viaduct seen from the North. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
San Dalmazzo San Dalmazzo di Tenda IV Viaduct seen from immediately below on the North side. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
San Dalmazzo IV Viaduct di Tenda seen from the South. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
Once Southbound trains had crossed La Roya, it was just a short distance before they entered Gorges Paganini Tunnel. This is the tunnel mouth. [55]
Turning through 180° this is the view from the cab of a Northbound train leaving Gorges Paganin Tunnel (1,702 metres in length). [35]
Gorges Paganin Tunnel runs South-southwest parallel to the valley of La Roya and only a few metres beyond the valleys western face, occasionally running close enough to the valley side for gallery openings to shed light into the tunnel.
Gorges Paganin Tunnel is marked by the dotted line to the West of the river valley. It is over 1700 metres in length with occasional gallery openings in the valley side. [25]
The Gorges Paganin Tunnel is actually considered to be a series of six different tunnels separated by sections of galleries with arched openings into the valley side. These tunnels are: Foce (167m long); Tornau I (270m long); Tornau II (475 m long); Ravallone I (392m long); Ravallone II (91m long; and Balma (337m long). [1: p129]
One of a series of gallery openings in the walls of Gorges Paganin Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Southbound service. [55]
OpenStreetMap shows a short length of line within the Paganin Valley above the Hydroelectric Power Station which is next to the E74/D6204 in the valley of La Roya. [26]
Google’s satellite imagery shows the hydroelectric scheme in the Vallon de Paganin and the power station next to the road and La Roya. The railway line can be seen just to the left of centre. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Banaudo et al tell us that at “the end of the tunnel, the line opens into the Paganin Valley, which marks the northern border between Italy and France. … In this wild and steep site, where a torrent and the penstock of the Paganin Hydroelectric Power Plant tumble, the portals of the last Italian tunnel and the first French tunnel face each other, each guarded by a roadside cottage in the typical style of the FS and PLM.” [1: p129]
Having reached the old French/Italian border we can stop and take stock. We will look at the construction of the line North from the coast once our journey reaches that portion of the line. Suffice to say that by 1915 tracklaying from the coast had reached Airole.
As far as the line heading South from Cuneo is concerned track laying had reached San Dalmazzo di Tenda and the structures and track formation was in place to the Northern French /Italian border.
2. The First World War
In 1915, Italy entered the war on the side of the allies. “Leading up to WWI, Italy had formed an alliance with the Central Powers of the German Empire and the Empire of the Austria-Hungary in the Triple Alliance. Italy should have joined on the side of the Central Powers when war broke out in August 1914 but instead declared neutrality.” [27]
“The Italian government had become convinced that support of the Central Powers would not gain Italy the territories she wanted as they were Austrian possessions – Italy’s old adversary. Instead, over the course of the months that followed, Italy’s leaders considered how to gain the greatest benefit from participation in the war. In 1915, Italy signed the secret Treaty of London and came into the war on the side of the Triple Entente (Britain, France, Russia). By its terms, Italy would receive control over territory on its border with Austria-Hungary stretching from Trentino through the South Tyrol to Trieste as well as other areas.” [27]
“After the war ended, at the Paris Peace Conference that led to the Versailles Treaty, the Italian government struggled against the other Allied leaders, the Big Three (Britain, France and the US), to gain all that they believed had been promised to them. Although Italy did receive control of most of the European requests, they failed to gain their colonial ambitions and felt they did not get what they had been promised. This engendered resentment towards the Allied countries, especially as Italians felt they had paid a high price, in terms of men and money, fighting for the Allies. These resentments helped drive the success of Benito Mussolini and his fascist movement – four years after the war, Mussolini and his blackshirts gained power.” [27]
Ultimately, the war stopped all progress on the line. Banaudo et el tell us that “the work begun thirty-two years earlier by the SFAI, then continued by the RM until nationalization, was thus virtually completed by the FS. The construction of the 80.3 km of line in Italian territory cost nearly 85 million lire compared to the 76 million initially planned, representing an average expenditure of 1,058,500 lire per kilometre.” [1: p135]
In France, the war caused all work to be halted. An attempt was made to continue the work in 1915, but failed because of underground conditions encountered. In 1917, an attempt to continue activity using prisoners of war was unsuccessful.
During the war, Italian authorities lifted track between Piena and Airole in the South for use on the front. Work on the new Cuneo railway station halted.
French and British troops were sent to augment Italian forces on 1917. It seems as though many of these passed through San Dalmazzo di Tenda. Between 19th October and 15th December 1917, “192 military convoys departed from San-Dalmazzo, and the Col de Tende line saw up to twenty movements of all categories on some days.” [1: p136]
After the war, resources were in short supply. In France priority was given to the devastated areas in the Northeast of the country. The PLM received very little support. Contractors found recruitment a problem because of the drastic loss of life among working age men. Banaudo et al tell us that in France “tunnels, abandoned for nearly five years, had suffered serious deformation, particularly in areas with high water infiltration. In Italy, the situation was no better, and construction of the new Cuneo station was suspended, even though an arch of the large viaduct over the Stura River, which was to provide access to it, was already being erected.” [1: p138]
Nevertheless, work did resume, supplies began to head North from Menton on the tramway to Sospel and supplies were arriving from the South via the FS on the Italian side of the border at Airole. Transport via Airole proved better than via the Menton-Sospel tramway and by 1920 the two main contractors on either side of the border (Giianotti and Mercier) ceased to use the Menton-Sosel route. [1: p138]
1920 saw a significant budget reduction for the works in French territory – 104 million Francs to 75 million Francs. Only 17 million Francs were allowed in 1920. “The Mercier company alone was spending 4 to 5 million francs per month on its construction sites.” [1: p140] Layoffs were necessary and work slowed significantly to remain within budget.
“In June 1920, the Inspector General of Public Works announced to companies that only 700,000 francs of credit remained to complete the year, an insignificant sum that forced construction to be suspended immediately, putting hundreds of workers out of work. Elected officials from the Alpes-Maritimes immediately rushed to Paris to meet with representatives of the ministry and the PLM management. After heated discussions, a new budget was allocated by the State for railway construction. The PLM had a credit of 41 million, 25 of which were allocated to the Nice – Cuneo line. Work could resume, but the engineers and contractors in charge of it would have to take into account the irregular arrival of funds until the end when organizing their construction sites.” [1: p140]
2. The Northern French/Italian Border South to Breil-sur-Roya
Two tranches of construction work covered the length of the line from the French/Italian border to Breil-sur-Roya. Banaudo et al tell us that this length of the line “contained the highest density of engineering structures on the French route, and, with a few exceptions, the war had interrupted work there in its early stages.“[1: p142]
A schematic representation of the line between the historic Italian/French Border and Breil-sur-Roya. [13]
The view across the border from the North, a view from the cab of a Southbound service at the mouth of the Gorges Paganin Tunnel. [55]
Looking back North towards the southern portal of the Gorges Paganin Tunnel, a view from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
Once on the French side of the border the line immediately entered the Frontiere Tunnel. …
The North portal of the Frontiere Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Southbound train. [55]
Looking North across the border from the cab of a Northbound service leaving the mouth of the Frontiere Tunnel [35]
The view from the cab of a southbound train just to the Southwest of the Frontiere Tunnel mouth. [55]
The short open section of track appears on the left of this extract from OpenStreetMap. Tree cover means it is impossible to show the short section of line on and extract from Google’s satellite imagery. [28]
The view from the cab of a Northbound train approaching the mouth of Malaba Tunnel. Ahead is the southern portal of Frontiere Tunnel. A very short length of line runs between Frontiere Tunnel and Malaba Tunnel. [35]
Malaba Tunnel is 389 metres in length. This image shows the view from the cab of a Southbound service as it leaves the tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180 degrees we see the Southwest portal of Malaba Tunnel from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
This extract from OpenStreetmap shows the next open length of track running from centre-top to bottom-left. We are just entering the first length of another spiral and can see the lower length of track in tunnel under the line and then bridging La Roya. [29]
Google’s satellite imagery shows the same length of railway high above the Scarassoui Viaduct which can be seen bottom-right. [Google Maps, August 2025]
From the cab of the Southbound service, we see the mouth of Scarassoui Tunnel. The Tunnel is 181 metres in length. [55]
Turning through 180°, we look Northeast from the cab of the Northbound train as it leaves the Scarassoui Tunnel. [35]
The spiral in this location consists of a number of tunnels and open lengths of track. The first tunnel encountered travelling South is the Scarassoui Tunnel (top-right) which has a gallery of a series of arches at its southern end. A length of open track leads to Peug Tunnel, Vernardo Tunnel, Caussagne Tunnel and then Berghe Tunnel. [31]
A view North along the valley of La Roya. Top-left in this image, the line from St. Dalmas de Tende enters the image at high level and on a falling grade, through Scarassoui Tunnel. It passes through Peug Tunnel and, after running parallel to the river for a short distance, curves away to the left in tunnel. It appears again beneath Scarassoui Tunnel to cross La Roya before travelling down the East side of the river in a series of tunnels. Source not recorded. [30]
The high level tunnels of Scarassoui (its South portal can be seen at the top of this extract) and Peug. The metal frames over the open lengths of track are part of an avalanche warning system. [30]
Two views looking South inside the gallery at the southern end of Scarassoui Tunnel. [55]
A driver’s eye view of the South end of Scarassoui Tunnel. [35]
The gallery seen from below soon after it was constructed. This image appear in the Railway Wonders of the World article about the line, (c) Public Domain. [24]
Just a short distance further South, we can look over our shoulder to see the modern Scarassoui Viaduct crossing the River Roya some distance below. In a short while we will cross that viaduct. [35]
Turning through 180°, this is the view South towards the North portal of Peug Tunnel which is just 75 metres in length. [55]
The view North from the mouth of the Peug Tunnel. [35]
This Google Earth 3D satellite image gives good idea of how far up the valley side from the river and road the railway is positioned. [Google Earth, August 2025]
The view South from the mouth of Peug Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Southbound train. [55]
The southern portal of the Peug Tunnel seen from the cab of a Northbound service. [35]
A little further South and looking South from the cab of the Southbound service across the Peug Viaduct (50 metres long). [55]
Looking across the valley of La Roya we can see the line heading South . Our train will travel along that length of the line in a short while. [35]
Further South again, a driver’s view from a Southbound service along Capuon Viaduct (45 metres long) towards the North Portal of Verardo Tunnel (53 metres long). [55]
Looking back at the southern mouth of Verardo Tunnel. [35]
The cab of the Southbound train again, looking from the southern end of Verardo Tunnel over Berghe Viaduct (30 metres long) towards the mouth of the Caussagne Tunnel (275 metres long). [55]
Caussagne Tunnel curves West into the valley of the Torrent de la Ceva. The far tunnel mouth faces West-northwest.
The view back towards Vernardo Tunnel over the Berghe Viaduct from the mouth of Berghe Tunnel. [35]
The view from the cab of the Southbound train as it leaves Caussagne Tunnel, heading Northwest up the valley of the Ceva. [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the tunnel portal, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
The Ceva valley is steep sided and the line sits on a narrow ledge supported above the valley floor by a retaining wall. Before entering the 1881 metre Berghe Tunnel it crosses the Ceva Viaduct (71 metres long).
The view from the cab of a Southbound train crossing Ceva Viaduct before entering the Berghe Tunnel. [55]
This extract from a photograph taken to illustrate the demands placed on cyclists riding up the Ceva Valley shows the retaining structure which holds the railway above the minor road. The tunnel mouth of the Berghe Tunnel can just be made out at the left of this image, (c) Cromagnon. [32]
The Mouth of the Berghe Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Southbound service. The Tunnel curves back to the North and then round to the Southeast. [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the View from the mouth of the Berghe Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Northbound service. [35]
Throughout the spiral the line continues on a falling grade. It opens out, well below the level it enters the spiral, onto the Scarassoui Viaduct.
The view from the mouth of the Berghe e Tunnel across the Scarassoui Viaduct. [55]
Looking back towards the mouth of Berghe Tunnel. [35]
This postcard image shows the Scarassoui Viaduct as built in 1922, (c) Public Domain. [33]The Scarassoui Tunnel, top-left, and the Scarassoui Viaduct, bottom-right. [46]
The French engineer, Paul Séjourné decided to create a significant structure at the location of the Scarassoui Viaduct. Banaudo et al quote Séjourné: “The Scarassoui Viaduct is the first French structure that one will see when coming from Italy. It is like a gateway to France; it must be worthy of it.” [1: p142] Séjourné was of the opinion that: “Of all the structures — I mean all, even the smallest — appearance matters. It is not permissible to make ugly. It is a strange opinion to consider expensive what is beautiful, cheap what is ugly.” [1: p142] The bridge Séjourné designed was a curved viaduct (radius 300 metres) carrying the railway on a falling grade of 21 mm/m. It was 125 m long, spanning both La Roya and the E74/D6204 at a height of 42 m. Banaudo et all, tell us that “two arches of 11 m on the Nice side and a 13 m arch on the Cuneo side give access to a central arch of 48 m decorated with six vaults, according to a design that Séjourné had applied on other works. … The central arch was supported by two massive pilasters with crenellated facings, whose bases were widened to compensate for the misalignment due to the curvature of the deck.” [1: p142]
Sadly this bridge was destroyed by the retreating German forces in 1944 and it was not reconstructed in any form until the 1970s. Details of this bridge and photographs of its condition prior to reconstruction can be found here. [34] The replacement 1970s structure is shown below. …
The modern Scarassoui Viaduct seen from the E74/D6204, looking South. [August 2016]The modern Scarassoui Viaduct seen from the E74/D6204, looking North. [August 2016]One of the regaul=ar service trains posed on the Scarassoui Viaduct in the 21st century. [36]
Scarassoui Viaduct crosses the River Roya close to the top of this image. Trains heading South then pass through a series of short tunnels following the East bank of La Roya. [30]
The northern portal of the Camera Tunnel is in deep shade. [55]
The view back across the Scarassoui Viaduct from the northern portal of the Camara Tunnel. [35]
The view South from the southern portal of Camara Tunnel. [55]
Looking back at the South Portal of the Camara Tunnel. [35]
Just to the South of Camara Tunnel is Camara Viaduct, seen here from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
While it is not possible to see the line on the West bank of La Roya over this length of the valley from the road, it is possible to glimpse the line on the East side of the valley occasionally. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
The North Portal of Vallera Tunnel No. 1. [55]
The view North from Roches-Rouges Viaduct towards the South Portal of Vallera Tunnel No. 1. [35]
The view South from Roches-Rouges Viaduct towards Vallera Tunnel No. 2. [55]
The North Portal of Vallera Tunnel No. 2. [55]
Looking North from the tunnel mouth above. [35]
Looking South from the southern tunnel mouth of Vallera Tunnel No. 2. [55]
Looking South along Vallera Tunnel No. 2 [55]
Looking back at the South Portal of Vallera Tunnel No. 2. [35]
Looking North from Vallera Viaduct towards Vallera Tunnel No. 2. [35]
The North portal of Torette Tunnel (121 metres long). The village of Fontan can be seen to the right on the valley floor, [55]
The view from the Southern Portal of Torette Tunnel. [55]
The southern mouth of Torette Tunnel seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
The approach to Fontan-Saorge Railway station from the North, seen from high on the valley side to the West of the River Roya. [My photograph, 18th November 2014]
The the track duals to the North of Fontan-Saorge Railway Station. [55]
The D38 (Route de la Gare crosses the River Roya and turns South for quite a length of the road the railway towers over it, held above by a large retaining wall. [Google Streetview, July 2014]Road and railway become much closer in height before the road passes under the railway. [Google Streetview, July 2014]Another image from the cab of the Northbound train. Just before arriving at Fontan-Saorge Railway Station the line bridges Route de la Gare – the road between Fontan and Saorge. [55]After passing under the railway the road continues to climb. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
The final approach to Fontan-Saorge Railway Station. [55]
Fontan-Saorge Railway Station, seen from the cab of a Southbound train. [55]
This extract from Google’s satellite imagery shows the site of the Fontan-Saorge Railway Station which sits between the two villages. It is a large site as it was designed to be a frontier station. The historic border between France and Italy was just a short distance North along the valley of La Roya. [Google Maps, August 2025]
A view of the Fontan-Saorge Railway Station from high on the West flank of the valley of La Roya in 1927/1928. This image illustrates the significant earthworks needed to create a ‘plateau’ for the station (c) Public Domain. [50]
As trains head south from Fontan-Saorge they cross Ambo Viaduct (a short viaduct – just 36 metres in length) before entering Saint-Roch Tunnel . The wall on the left carries the D38 (the road to Saorge). [55]
Ambo Viaduct and the North Portal of Saint-Roch Tunnel, seen from the E74/D6204. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
The road to Saorge climbs above the level of the railway. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
The tunnel carrying the road to Saorge runs just above the railway tunnel. Saint-Roch Railway Tunnel is named for the church close to the road as it enters Saorge. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
This is the view North along the railway towards Fontan-Saorge Railway Station from the mouth of the road tunnel on the D38. The Ambo Viaduct is in the bottom-left of the image, Fontan-Saorge Railway Station is in the top-right. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Looking back along the line towards Fontan-Saorge Railway Station from the mouth of Saint-Roch Tunnel. The viaduct in the foreground is Ambo Viaduct. [35]
Looking Southwest across the bridge at Saorge from the cab of a Southbound service leaving the mouth of Saint-Roch Tunnel. Tracks cross the bridge 60 metres above the valley floor. [55]
Turning through 180 degrees this is the Southwest portal of the Saint-Roch Tunnel as seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
The bridge at Saorge in the 21st century. It was rebuilt in the 1970s after destruction in 1944. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Early during the construction of the bridge at Saorge. Here we see the formwork for the arch being constructed high above the valley floor, (c) Public Domain. [50]
Work on the bridge at Saorge started “in February 1922 from the Saint-Roch and Nosse tunnels, between which a conveyor cable was stretched for the assembly of the 40 m lowered arch. A suspended footbridge was then launched over the precipice and a 0.60 m track was placed there to supply the materials onto small 500 kg load wagons, maneuvered by gasoline-powered shunters. … The main work of the bridge was completed in March 1923.” [1: p143]
The bridge at Saorge was completed in 1922, it spanned the valley of La Roya at a particularly tight point along the gorge. The village of Saorge can be seen beyond the bridge. This bridge was destroyed by the retreating German troops in 1944. [47]This extract from a postcard image shows the bridge in use in the early 1930s. [51]Looking Southeast from road level, the modern bridge seems to fly between the valley walls! [Google Streetview, August 2016]The same structure seen from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
Looking Northeast over the bridge at Saorge towards the Saint-Roch Tunnel from the mouth of Nosse Tunnel. [35]
Significant savings on construction costs were made (even when the cost of construction of the bridge was included) by following the right bank of La Roya down towards Breil-sur-Roya. [1: p142]
The Northeast portal of Nosse Tunnel (89 metres in length). [55]
The view Southwest from the tunnel mouth of the Nosse Tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180°, looking Northeast into the mouth of Nosse Tunnel. [35]
The open length of the line between Nosse and Four A Platre tunnels. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The North Portal of Four A Platre Tunnel (316 metres long), seen from the cab of a Southbound train. [55]
The view South from the South Portal of Four A Platre Tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the South Portal of Four A Platte Tunnel. The village of Saorge can be seen in the sunlight on the right of the image. [35]
The length of line between Four A Platre (Plaster Kiln) Tunnel and Commun Tunnel. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The village of Saorge is a lovely ancient perched village sitting high above La Roya. We have stayed there three times over the years renting the same small apartment each time that we have been there. Most recently, we were there post-Covid and after Storm Alex. That short holiday was in November 2023.
The view from our apartment window – the railway can be seen on the far bank of La Roya, high up the valley side. The visible length of railway is that to the South of Four A Platre Tunnel. [My photograph 11th November 2014]A closer view of the line on the West bank of La Roya, seen from the apartment window. [My photograph, 20th November 2014]An even closer view, also from the apartment. [My photograph, 19th November 2014]Another view, focussing, this time, on the vaulted retaining wall which is typical of a number of retaining walls along the line. [My photograph, 11th November 2014]Saorge village, seen from the road below. [My photograph, 13th November 2014]
The northern mouth of Commun Tunnel (60 metres in length), seen from the cab of the Southbound service. [55]
The view South from the South portal of Commun Tunnel towards Precipus Tunnel over the Petit Malamort Viaduct. [55]
This satellite image shows Petit Malamort Viaduct which cannot easily be seen from the road network. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Turning though 180, just a short distance further along the line, this is the view back towards the South Portal of Commun Tunnel from the Petit Malamort Viaduct (56 metres long). [35]
Petit Malamort Viaduct and the North portal of Precipus Tunnel (623 metres long). [55]
Between Saorge and Breil-sur-Roya construction works were delayed for a time by high pressure water ingress into tunnels. [1: p142]
Looking North across Precipus Viaduct (46 metres long) toward the South Portal of Precipus Tunnel. [35]
The Precipus Viaduct seen, looking West from the D6204 in the valley floor. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
Looking North from the North Portal of Combe Tunnel. [35]
The South Portal of Combe Tunnel. [35] 262
Looking South across a minor road crossing on the North side of Breil-sur-Roya. [55]
Looking back North across the same road crossing to the North of Breil-sur-Roya, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. The D6204 is off to the right of the image, the museum is off to the left of the camera. [35]
Maglia Bridge looking South from the cab of a Southbound train. [55]
Maglia Bridge looking North from the cab of a Northbound service. [35]
Maglia Bridge seen from Route de la Giandola. [Google Streetview, October 2008]
The bridge carrying the Route du Col de Brouis over the railway. [55]
Looking back North from the same bridge over the railway. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
Looking ahead towards Breil-sur-Roya Railway Station from the bridge which carries Route du Col de Brouis over the railway. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
Looking Back North through the same bridge. This is the view from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
Looking South from the D6204 adjacent to the level crossing at the North end of the station site, along the line towards Breil-sur-Roya Railway Station. Beyond the crossing is the Eco Musee, Breil-sur-Roya, Haut-Pays et Transports, an exhibition of vintage trains, trams & buses. The road on the right is Avenue de l’Authion. [Google Streetview, August 2016]
The same location looking to the North. The D6204 is on the right of the picture. [35]
The Eco Musee at Breil-sur-Roya, seen from the road to its North, Avenue de l’Authion. [Google Streetview, 2009]
The Eco Museum was founded in 1989 to showcase the history and heritage of the Roya valley, it became a museum focused mostly on industrial heritage in 1991. It now houses exhibits of hydropower and transportation. The collection comprises lots of interesting locomotives, railcars, trams, postal vans and other vintage vehicles.
Looking North from adjacent to the end of the platform at Breil-sur-Roya Railway Station. [35]
Looking North at Breil-sur-Roya as a Southbound service arrives at the Station. [35]
Breil-sur-Roya Railway Station facing North. [35]
The approach to Breil-sur-Roya from the South, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
We finish this fourth length of the journey from Cuneo to the coast of the Mediterranean here at Breil-sur-Roya South of Breil, there are two routes to the coast. One heads to Ventimiglia, the other to Nice. The next article will look at the line heading South towards Ventimiglia.
In Breil, the earthworks for the international station were constructed starting in June 1920. The area was around 1 kilometre in length and 300 metres wide. To build this the, “National Road 204 had to be diverted towards the Roya for about a kilometre, as was the Goulden power plant canal. The natural ground was cleared on the northern side and raised with excavated material from the tunnels on the southern half. At this end of the station, the modest single-arch bridge over the Lavina valley, which provides access to the Nice and Ventimiglia lines, required considerable work. The foundations for the abutment on the Nice side had to be dug into a gypsum bed sloping to a depth of 16 metres (compared to 2.20 metres on the Breil side, where hard rock quickly emerges). and a 15.12 m high reinforced concrete cantilever to the abutment anchored it in the loose fill.” [1: p141]
The next article in this series can be found here. [4]
References
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 1: 1858-1928; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 2: 1929-1974; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 3: 1975-1986; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Franco Collidà, Max Gallo & Aldo A. Mola; CUNEO-NIZZA History of a Railway; Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo, Cuneo (CN), July 1982.
Francohttps://www.geneanet.org/cartes-postales/view/186296#0 Collidà; 1845-1979: the Cuneo-Nice line year by year; in Rassegna – Quarterly magazine of the Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo; No. 7, September 1979, pp. 12-18.
Stefano Garzaro & Nico Molino; THE TENDA RAILWAY From Cuneo to Nice, the last great Alpine crossing; Editrice di Storia dei Trasporti, Colleferro (RM), EST, July 1982.
SNCF Region de Marseille; Line: Coni – Breil sur Roya – Vintimille. Reconstruction et équipement de la section de ligne située en territoireFrançais; Imprimerie St-Victor, Marseille (F), 1980.
A proposed tramway that did not get built. … The featured image is a map showing the full length of the proposed line which followed National Route No. 204 in France.
Late in the 19th century before a link from Vievola to the Mediterranean was really on the agenda. Alongside the experimental ‘Train Scotte’, [1: p40][2][3] a “local engineer, M. Chatelanat, proposed building a tramway line between Vievola station … and Ventimiglia. He knew the region well, having just overseen the construction of the rack railway from Monte Carlo to La Turbie. [4] Here is the project he presented in an application filed on 7th February 1899.” … [1: p47]
The submission made by M. Chatelanat began, “The electric tramway for which we are requesting a concession is intended to facilitate the movement of passengers and goods in the Roya Valley through a rapid, convenient, and economical means of communication. Currently, to reach Nice and the other communes of the department, the population of the French part of this valley must either travel more than 60 kilometers along the old Nice-Cuneo road, crossing the foothills of Brouis and Braus, in unsafe conditions due to the steep slopes, the height of the passes, and, in winter, the seasonal inclement weather. Or, since the opening of the national road from Breil to Ventimiglia, travel approximately 30 kilometers and cross two customs lines to join the coastal railway line in Ventimiglia. … Between the coast and Upper Piedmont, especially the province of Cuneo, there is a very intense movement of population every year, but if you want to go by train, you have to make a long detour via Savona, which is long and expensive. The province of Cuneo sends to Nice and the coast some of its products that our region cannot obtain elsewhere. On the other hand, our particular products from the South are in demand and consumed in the upper Po Valley. Facilitating the movement of travelers and this exchange of products between Piedmont and the coast will at the same time allow the French populations of the Roya Valley to come easily and quickly to Nice to stock up and connect with the entire French coast without having to cross the Braus and Brouis passes, such is the goal we are pursuing.” [1: p47]
There were a number of projects of this nature being explored at the time. The tramway between Menton and Sospel is an excellent example. [5][6] Others in the valley of the River Var and in the valley of the River Paillon were also built.
M. Chatelanat continues to explain how up to that time it had not been possible to devise a railway scheme that enable a link between Nice and Cuneo. His proposed tramway was not claimed to be a replacement for the planned railway, but while awaiting the development of the railway scheme, the tramway would “provide great services by greatly reducing the communication difficulties between the two regions. The project [would] not provide the speed of the railway, it [would] require two transshipments at Ventimiglia and Tende. Nevertheless, the transport of goods [would] be significantly more economical and passengers [would] find facilities and comfort there which [would] undoubtedly give the population satisfaction, if not complete, at least acceptable. The electric tramway, executed at a width of 1 metre with gradients of up to 70 mm/m and curves down to 20 metres in radius [could not] be used for the passage of standard-gauge locomotives and wagons, and therefore [could not] be used in the event of war.” [1: p48]
Concern about possible conflict was paramount in the minds of many and projects were vetted and often vetoed by the military. M. Castelanat went on to explain that power for the section of the line would be supplied from a hydraulic plant close to Breil-sur-Roya which could easily be put out of action, and if the overhead cables were also removed no use would be possible. He was sure that no advantage would be gained by a future enemy and that “The tramway must therefore be considered a commercial means of communication with no possibility of use in the event of war.” [1: p49]
Castelanat confirmed that electrical operation would mean no problem would be encountered with gradients up to 7% without the need for any regrading of the highway. He planned stations at Breil, Giandola, Saorge, Fontan, and Berghe. The tramway would use National Road No. 204 without any deviations and would cost around 1,400,000 francs. This tramway would, strictly speaking, be only a section of an international line which would have its origin in Ventimiglia and which would go up the valley of the Roya.
A conference including all the statutory interested parties was arranged for 23rd November 1899. Differing views were expressed about whether the tramway could provide a military advantage to the enemy in the case of war. A few months after the conference, on 2nd May 1900, “Chief Engineer Aubé of the Ponts et Chaussées (Roads and Bridges Department) reached the following conclusions: ‘The establishment of the planned electric tramway has lost much of its appeal since the military authorities ceased, with certain reservations, to oppose the construction of the railway from Nice to Sospel and to the Italian border, near Fontan. This line would, in fact, provide the French population of the Roya Valley with the access to Nice they were willing to seek in an economical manner by means of the tramway connecting them to the international station at Ventimiglia‘.” [1: p50]
The effect of the military’s withdrawal of their opposition to the Nice-Sospel-Fontan line was to render the tramway proposals obsolete. It was 1904 before “an international conference finally approved the construction of the Vievola – Breil – Ventimiglia and Breil – Sospel – Nice railway sections. … [Nevertheless] two tram lines were created[in the area]: one from Menton to Sospel, which operated from 1912 to 1931, [5][6] and a line from Ventimiglia to Bordighera, which operated from 1901 to 1936.” [1: p50]
Instead of the ‘Train Scotte’ and a tramway, from perhaps as early as 1900, but definitely by 1st September 1906, a service connecting with trains was introduced between Vievola station and Ventimiglia. The two images below show the mixture of different vehicles in use. Both focus on the road on the West side of the station building at Vievola.
Banaudo et al provide details of a bus service which started on 1st September 1906. The bus service between Vievola and Ventimiglia provided two buses a day from Vievola to Ventimiglia, the first leaving Vievola at 12:15 and arriving in Ventimiglia at 17:00, the second leaving Vievola at 20:40 and arriving in Ventimiglia at 0:40. The cost of the full journey was 5 lire/person. [1: p52]
The advert in the local paper commented that, “Without making the tedious Bastia-Savona detour, travelers can reach the Nice or western Ligurian coast from Cuneo and nearby towns in just a few hours, take care of their business, and return to their hometowns the same day, if they wish, even finding enough time in Vievola to refuel. Every modern comfort will be available in the station buffet, since, with appropriate consideration, the owner, Mr. Giuseppe Borgogno, has asked the Italian State Railways Administration to expand and repurpose the space for this purpose.” [1: p52]
Banaudo et al share details of services which developed over the next few years with pictures of the various buses in use. [1: p52-56]
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 1: 1858-1928; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
The railway from Nice PLM Station to Tende was completed in 1928. It was long in the gestation and in construction. The story stretches back more than a century and a half. ‘Le Chemin de fer du Col de Tende’ is historically a significant local and international line. Its inverted Y-shaped layout and its crossing of international borders means that it is known by a number of different names:
in Nice it is known as the Nice – Coni Line;
generally in Italy it is officially Ferrovia Cuneo Ventimiglia
in the Piedmont city of Cuneo’s economic/political circles, sitting at the top of the inverted ‘Y’, it is often referred to as the Cuneo – Nizza line in recognition of good relations with the community of Nice.
Its story is a saga of significant technical achievement: gaining 1000 metres in height ; having a dozen tunnels longer than 1 kilometre (including those of the Col de Tende (8098 m), the Col de Braus (5939 m) and the Mont Grazian tunnel (3882 m), which are among the longest structures on the French and Italian networks); having four complete helical loops, several S-shaped loops and a multitude of bridges and viaducts (some of which, such as those of Scarassouï or Bévéra, are architecturally significant railway structures. Of a total route of 143.5 km, 6.5 km are on bridges or viaducts and over 60 km are in tunnels. This means that close to 42% of the journey along the line(s) is on or within structures.
The line warrants a comprehensive detailed treatment and Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos have provided just such a work. The 3 volumes of their work cover three distinct periods in the life of the line:
Volume 1: 1858 until the completion of construction in 1928; [1]
Volume 2: 1929 through to 1974 [2]
Volume 3: 1975 to 1986. [3]
The line’s construction spanned over 40 years and as a result a variety of different structural techniques were used. The first length built in Italy in the 19th century has some substantial stone and brick structures. Later work on the length from Nice to Fontane which was built between the two world wars employs much lighter design techniques. Then even later, after sections of the line were destroyed in the second world war, prestressed concrete construction techniques were used in the rebuilding of the line. [1]
The history of the area through which the line has been built has been tumultuous. This meant that the process of developing the line was tortuous. It took more than 75 years for the line(s) to be completed and then after a few short years of operation, the lines usage was disturbed by the machinations of dictatorships and then the second world war literally destroyed the region. Post war recovery was slow but nowhere more so than the length of the line between Ventimiglia and Breil-sur-Roya which was not fully reopened until 35 years after the end of the second world war. [1]
The reopening of the line after the second world war was vital for the economic development of Piedmont, the Riviera dei Fiori, and the Côte d’Azur – between which there was no efficient road connection and where the difficult terrain favored rail access. [1]
The immediate area offered tremendous tourism potential, both the train itself and the region it served. Ski resorts became accessible, particularly Limone, excursion trains came from all over Europe. But, after just a few decades of development the approach of the 21st century saw increased bureaucracy, financial disputes between the increasing number of partners, contradictory regulations and increased journey times. The result was that the line’s value and existence was called into question and that too sparked further conflict. “Paradoxically, European unification, which should have fully promoted this symbolic communication route, marginalized it!” [1: p5]
In 2014, my wife and I stayed in the village of Saorge in the valley of La Roya for the first time. We had travelled by train from Nice to Tende in an earlier year. In 2014, we had a hire car and on one occasion we followed the old road to the Col de Tende. In subsequent years it was not possible to drive up the old road as works on the much more modern tunnel seemed to have blocked access to the old road. On a more recent visit, we stayed in Saorge a year after serious flooding had destroyed much infrastructure in the valley. Travel towards the Col de Tende from Tende was not possible.
Early attempts to create a route from Cuneo toTende
In 2014, we drove up a road which was constructed by le duc Charles-Emmanuel 1er de Savoie (Duke Charles Emmanuel 1st of Savoy). It seems that he constructed a road over the pass between 1592 and 1616. Of this road, Banaudo et al say that, “the northern road [up to the pass] has about twenty hairpin bends, while access from the south requires an extraordinary … sixty hairpin bends.” [1: p9]
Our hire car was a very small vehicle, but nonetheless needed some careful manoeuvring at each hairpin bend. Once at the top, we were able to walk quite a distance between the different forts that stood on the ridge.
Banuado et al, tell us that since that route was constructed, a series of attempts were made to tunnel from lower points on the pass. Attempts from the North were made: in 1612 (achieved just 75m of tunnel before being halted); in 1781 which was abandoned 3 years later (164m of tunnel was achieved). [1]
In 1784, a carriage managed to traverse the pass for the first time.
Banaudo et al. Tell us that “the public works engineer Deglioli submitted an initial report on 3rd June 1852, supported by the diplomat Francesco Sauli (1807-1893), on the extension of the Marseille-Var railway, then planned in France, to Nice, Ventimiglia, the Roya Valley, and Piedmont, namely Cuneo or Mondovì.” [1: p11]
In 1854, the first train of the Società della Ferrovia Torino Cuneo arrived in Cuneo from Turin (via Trofarello, Savigliano, and Fossano). The first terminus was built in the Cuneo suburb of “Madonna-dell’Olmo, on the left bank of the Stura below the city. Ten months later, the time required for the completion of the viaduct over the Stura, Cavour and the Minister of Public Works, Pietro Paleocapa (1788-1869), presided over the inauguration of the new Cuneo platform/station on 5th August 1855, established in a temporary location at Basse-di-San-Sebastiano. The permanent station would not be built until 1870 on the plateau preceding the confluence of the Stura and Gesso rivers.” [1: p11]
In 1856, “Victor Emmanuel II, King of Sardinia, Cyprus and Jerusalem, Duke of Savoy and Aosta, Prince of Piedmont, Count of Nice and Tende, visited [Nice and] personally promised [a] railway to the people of Nice and distributed a lithograph depicting him, ostentatiously bearing a map bearing the dedication ‘Ferrovia da Cuneo a Nizza. Ai Fedeli Nizzardi’. … The Minister of Public Works commissioned a Roman military engineer, Filippo Cerrotti (1819-1892), to conduct a more in-depth study. On 29th May 1856, Cerrotti submitted a preliminary design for a standard-gauge line from Cuneo, ascending the Gesso and Vermegnana valleys, crossing the Col de Tende through a 6.5 km tunnel accessible by inclined planes powered by hydraulic funiculars, to emerge in the Roya River, which it followed to Airole. From there, two tunnels successively would take it through the Bévéra Valley and then into the Latte Valley, through which it reached the coast, which it then followed to Menton, Monaco, and Nice.” [1: p11]
The Nicois authorities accepted the proposed scheme in September 1856, their counterparts in Cuneo quickly endorsed the plans in principle but asked that an alternative route via the Col des Fenestres and the Vésubie, be explored and that a modification to the initial proposal should be explored, specifically a locomotive-powered line without the use of inclined planes. The municipality of Nice then commissioned another survey of alternative routes by Louis Petit-Nispel, but proposals were rejected by the Ministry of Public Works on 4th March 1858. [1: p11, p14]
Nothing happened, so the Nice authorities sent a petition to the Sardinian parliament (16th July 1858) but the request got lost in the midst of political machinations which surrounded the cession of Savoy and the County of Nice to France which was eventually confirmed on 22nd April 1860.
“During his first visit to the new border department in September 1860, the French Emperor promised the people of Nice a rapid connection to Marseille and the rest of the country via the Paris-Lyon-Mediterranean Railway Company (PLM) line, whose construction was then well advanced beyond Toulon.” [1: p14]
Nice got its connection to Marseille by 18th October 1864, but hopes for a Nice to Cuneo link were overshadowed by the desire to have a direct link between Marseille and Turin via Sisteron, Gap, Briançon, the Col de l’Echelle, and Bardonecchia – a plan was eventually shelved (even though it was favoured by the French government and the PLM company) as a result of the deal-making associated with the Saint-Gothard line.
In the mid-1860s the Piedmontese railway network became part of the Società per le Ferrovie dell’Alta Italia (SFAI). Its focus became developing internal infrastructure in Italy, with the exception of a very large project … a 13.7 km (8.5 mile) long tunnel, carrying the Turin-Modane railway line under Mont Cenis, linking Bardonecchia in Italy to Modane in France under the Fréjus. [1: p17][8]
Despite this, economic and political groups in Cuneo remained committed to having a rail link and in 1868 proposed a joint commission of French and Italian engineers. The following year, “the provincial authorities granted a loan of 500,000 lire to the Lombard engineer Tommaso Agudio (1827-1893), who sought to develop the possibilities offered by funicular traction. He, in collaboration with the engineer Arnaud, recommended the construction of a narrow-gauge railway alongside the SS 20 national road, along its entire route from Cuneo to Ventimiglia. This hypothesis suggested curves with a radius of less than 50 m and gradients of 45 mm/m. The Tende Pass was to be crossed by the planned road tunnel, with two access ramps sloping at 87.5 mm/m, on which traction would be provided by a hydraulically counterweighted cable.” [1: p17]
His project was approved by the Italian parliament in 1862 but no progress was made on the French side of the border. The project failed and Tommaso Agudio moved on to other things, “experimenting with his cable traction system in 1874 in Lanslebourg, then by applying it in 1884 to the railway linking the Turin suburb of Sassi to the famous Basilica of Superga.” [1: p17]
With little progress being made on a rail link, road links became paramount, a commission chaired by the civil engineering inspector Sebastiano Grandis (1817-1892) renewed interest in 1870 in a road tunnel under the Col de Tende which Grandis imagined would obviate the need for a railway.
“Following the fall of the Empire, France and Italy were finally connected by rail, first through the Fréjus Tunnel, opened between Modane and Bardonecchia on 17th September 1871, and then through the Menton and Ventimiglia on the coast on 23rd February 1872. At the same time, traffic between Piedmont and the former County of Nice was growing at an encouraging pace: the Fontan customs post recorded an annual transit of 22,000 tons of goods and 76,447 head of cattle. Under these rather favorable conditions, Nice’s business community sought to revive discussions with a view to attracting to their port a share of the benefits of the upcoming opening of the Saint-Gothard line, whose traffic, they feared, would exclusively benefit Genoa via the Via Giovi, or Marseille in the event of the construction of the Col de l’Echelle route. In April 1871, a group of industrialists and politicians from the region, including the mayor of Nice, Auguste Raynaud (1829-1896) and his counterpart from Toulon, Vincent Allègre (1835-1899), founded a Syndicate for the Nice Cuneo Line with the support of the Alpes-Maritimes Chamber of Commerce. On 7th November, the municipal council sent a personal letter to Adolphe Thiers, the new President of the French Republic, to express the desire of the people of Nice to see this project, which had been on hold for some twenty years, realized. On 29th November, the syndicate appointed a study commission headed by engineer Joseph Durandy (1834-1912), … to establish contacts with interested Italian parties and determine the advantages and disadvantages of each proposed route.” [1: p19]
“In March 1872, the engineer Henry Lefèvre (1825-1877), a public works contractor and member of parliament for the Alpes-Maritimes, published an ambitious programme comprising two railway lines, Nice – Digne and Nice – Cuneo. They would run as a common trunk up the Var valley to the confluence of the Vésubie; from there, the branch towards Piedmont would follow this river to its source, crossing the Pagari pass under a 7000 m tunnel drilled at an altitude of 1300 m, to then reach Cuneo via the Gesso valley. The gradients would not exceed 35 mm/m, which would however require several reversals from Venanson, as well as the use of articulated Fairlie locomotives.” [1: p19][9]
Lefèvre’s project was based on poor maps and went through areas with a high risk of avalanches and heavy snowfall. Durandy suggested that a longer tunnel (almost 15km long) could be employed, Delestrac suggested following the undulations/contours on the left bank of the Vésubie as much as possible to reduce the number of engineering structures and limit the gradients to 25 mm/m.” [1: p19] Both these suggestions significantly increased the costs of Lefèvre’s 120 km project.
Other projects were proposed:
In 1872, Séraphin Piccon proposed a “103 km long narrow-gauge route, crossing the Col de Tende through a 5100 m tunnel at a height of 1150 m. Descending the valley of la Roya to Piena, reaching the Bévéra basin and Sospel through a 1300 m tunnel under the Col de Vèscavo, then heading up the Merlanson valley to pass under Mont Méras through a new tunnel leading to Peille, and thence to Nice through down the valley of the Paillon. Access to the Col de Tende would be via two inclined planes with inclinations of 40 to 85 mm/m totaling a length of 6100 m, while a 60 mm/m gradient over 4700 m would allow the line to gain altitude north of Peille.” [10] On these steep gradients, traction would be assisted by a rack or an auxiliary central rail (the Fell System). [11][1: p20]
Also in 1872, Baron A. Cachiardy de Montfleury of Breil submitted a renewed proposal to the Conseil General, based on the Narrow-Gauge route between Cuneo and Ventimiglia funicular sections developed by engineers Agudio and Arnaud. [12][1: p20]
Then in April 1873, Baron Marius de Vautheleret. presented a proposal for a narrow-gauge Cuneo-Ventimiglia line using the planned Col de Tende road tunnel, passing through Briga, then through a 13,000 m tunnel under the Marta peak and then along the Nervia valley to its mouth near Ventimiglia. This route aimed to simplify administrative procedures by bypassing French territory, even if it meant creating a costly underground tunnel to connect the Roya to the Nervia river valleys. Gradients would not exceed 35 mm/m except for 22 km on either side of the Col de Tende, where gradients of 38 to 40 mm/m would require the adoption of a rack or hydraulic funicular. [13][14][1: p20]
These last two projects were discarded, partly because they were narrow gauge and required steep gradients, neither of which would suit the anticipated important international traffic and partly because they only linked two Italian cities while passing through French territory and not serving Nice. Both the protagonists continued to push their case until the end of the 19th century.
The first project proposal by Piccon was also deemed incompatible with heavy traffic flows but in its favour was the intent to link the railway to Nice. The “Durandy Commission preferred this option, subject to significant technical adjustments, such as adopting the standard gauge and replacing the inclined planes with longer base tunnels. On this route, the syndicate hoped for annual freight traffic of 90,000 tons despite a higher cost per kilometre than the routes via the Tinée or the Careï, as well as a revival of passenger traffic.” [1: p20]
The PLM had little enthusiasm for the proposed line as their experience of lines in the Alps encountered technical difficulties and had profitability problems
In 1878, the Minister of Public Works, Charles de Freycinet (1828-1923), asked regional authorities to consider possible lines to become part of a network of secondary lines across the country. The Prefect of the Alpes-Maritimes submitted the line ‘from Nice to the Italian border’, running from Nice to Turin via the Paillon Valley, the Col de Nice, L’Escarène, the Col de Braus, Sospel, the Col de Brouis, Breil, the Roya Valley, and the Col de Tende. This route was registered No. 142 in the network in the law of 17th July 1879, where it appeared alongside the Nice – Digne via Saint-André and Nice – Draguignan via Grasse lines. [1: p21]
While the Cuneo-Nice line was a low priority for the national government in Italy, but Piedmont and Liguria did not give up, encouraged by the interest on the French side of the border. A number of different schemes were considered (from Baron de Vautheleret, Giacomo Pisani and Domenico Santelli).
Renewed interest at a national level led, in April 1876, the ‘conseil superieur des Travaux Publics’ approved the principle of a Cuneo – Ventimiglia railway, following the Roya along its entire course, including crossing French territory. The estimated cost for the 86 km on Italian soil was 38 million lire.
Two years later, while France was preparing its “Freycinet plan”, Italy had its ‘loi Baccarini’ (law 5002) which was passed in parliament on 25th July 1879 and included for a secondary line ‘from Cuneo to the sea’, “leaving all options open South of the Col de Tende so as not to prematurely offend any interests.” [1: p23]
By the end of July 1879, the process seemed well underway but no one allowed for the political machinations that would follow.
“The first disappointments emerged in France in 1880 during the budget debates, where the President of the Chamber of Deputies, Léon Gambetta (1838-1882), postponed the vote on construction funding. On 22nd July, the General Council of Bridges and Roads rejected an initial project, which included 30 mm/m gradients and 300 m radius curves, as too costly. In November 1881, the Ministry of War was even more categorical, formally opposing the extension of the railway beyond Sospel, and demanding that it serve the village of Lucéram from L’Escarène, the supply base for the defensive sector of L’Authion, Turini and Peïra-Cava. In this case, the line would have to adopt even more severe characteristics: 40 mm/m gradients, 150 m radius curves, switchbacks to cross the Col de Nice and helical loops to reach Lucéram…” [1: p24]
“In 1882, an important step towards opening up the Haute Roya region was taken with the commissioning of the Col de Tende road tunnel. … This structure, remarkable for its time, was designed for the movement of carts, horses, pedestrians and. cannons, because the defense of the Tenda and Briga area was a major concern for the Italian general staff! The journey now avoided the countless hairpin bends of the pass and the risk of snowstorms and avalanches.” [1: p24]
The Col de Tende Road Tunnel and the border between France and Italy. [17]
But while economic and emotional ties remained strong between Cuneo and Nice, they were weakening between Rome and Paris due to political, commercial, and colonial rivalries that would poison relations … for about fifteen years. The attitude of the city of Marseille was also difficult. The business community in Marseille was hostile to a new rail link between Nice and Italy. Fearing the expansion of the port of Nice at their expense. They lobbied against any possible expansion of the port of Nice, even to the extent of thwarting standard-gauge lines from Nice to Digne and Draguignan, ensuring that the lines were built to metre-gauge (with less transport capacity and obligatory double-handling of loads). [1: p24]
Locally, in Nice, some pushed for the line to be metre-gauge, thinking that might iron out the technical difficulties and strategic objections. [1: p24] Faced by the administrative impasse which stalled the project in France , the French Ministry of Public Works decided to close its Nice design office on 1st September 1887. Italy, however, worked unilaterally with the intention of opening up the Haute Roya without prejudging the continuation of the route towards France. [1: p24]
From 1882 until 1900 it was the Italians that took the initiative. A delegation from Cuneo secured 29.5 million lire from the Italian Minister of Public Works. The first length of the scheme received local approval on 25th March 1882. Work on site started in April 1882 on the length of the line from Cuneo to Vernante.
The present railway station in Cuneo dates from the late 1930s the older station is known as Cuneo Gesso Statzione. At the time of the building of the Line from Cuneo towards Nice and Ventimiglia, Cuneo’s railway station sat alongside the Gesso River across the town from the present station.
The original Cuneo Railway Station from which the line to Nice and Ventimiglia left in a southerly direction. This image was taken in 1903. It was shared on the Facebook Nel dipartimento della Stura – Cuneo – pagina. [19]This second photograph of Cuneo’s original railway station which was on the banks of the River Gesso shows both the station building and the bridge which carried the railway over the river. This image was taken in 1905. It was shared on the Facebook Nel dipartimento della Stura – Cuneo – pagina on 16th November 2017. [20]Although dated 6th October 1979 this postcard image originated in the early years of the 20th century. It shows the Cuneo Gesso Station as it was at the turn of the 20th century. The postcard was made to commemorate the reopening of the international railway line that connects the city of Cuneo with the city of Nice. This image was shared on the Facebook Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza page on 11th December 2017. [21]
The railway initially arrived from Turin, via Fossano. It came as far as Madonna dell’Olmo opposite Cuneo across the Sturia River on 16th October 1854 where a small building was built to serve as a temporary station. On 5th August 1855 the inaugural train from Cuneo left for Turin. In the same year the municipality built a bridge over the Sturia (at its own expense). After the construction of the bridge over the Stura, a second temporary station was built on an embankment in the San Sebastiano plain (where Giuseppe Garibaldi had arrived to visit his “Alpine Hunters” in 1856). Only in 1870 was a significant edifice completed which became Cuneo’s railway station. It was alongside the Gesso River and it was again built entirely at the town’s expense. [19]
The complete opening of the Cuneo-Ventimiglia line, which took place on 30th October 1928, caused significant logistical problems for both travellers and rolling stock at Cuneo station. The old depot, dating back to 1864, soon became insufficient to house the locomotives of the new line, [23: p41] a hastily built locomotive depot was provided (because of delays creating the new line and new railway station, and in the construction of the large mixed-use viaduct over the Stura di Demonte. [24][25]
The Locomotive Depot at Cuneo Gesso Station which was used until the new depot close to Cuneo Altipiano Railway Station was opened. The site was repurposed – it became a sawmill. This plan comes from From the December 1929 Technical Magazine of Italiane Ferrovie., It was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group on 13th February 2024 by Francesco Ciarlini Koerner. [62]
The new depot was placed beyond the embankment of the road to Mondovì. A double track arched bridge took the tracks under the road. [26][27] On 7th November 1937[24] the new Cuneo Altipiano station was opened, located to the west of the city centre and connected to the new locomotive depot built on the right side of the Stura River. [24][25]
Cuneo Gesso quickly lost importance, remaining active only as a stopping point for the lines to Mondovì and Boves , the latter closed to traffic in 1960. [23: p55-57][25]
Near the station was the terminus of the Cuneo-Dronero, [28] Cuneo-Saluzzo [29] and Cuneo-Boves [30] tramways, active for different years between 1879 and 1948 [25][31: p120]. The Cuneo Boves line opened in 1903 and closed in 1935.
Ex Stazione Ferrovia Di Cuneo Gesso as it appears on Google Maps satellite imagery. he river is the Gesso Torrent and a modern concrete bridge now spans the river. The line heading South from the station originally served a temporary Locomotive depot but now serves the sawmill that replaced the depot. [Google Maps, July 2025]The old station buildings seen from the Southwest. The building is in use as a cafe/bar. Tracks remain in place beyond the building. [Google Streetview, May 2025]The bridge which now carries the railway over the River Gesso. [Google Streetview, 2022]
Construction of the new line started in 1882, it left the station to the South curving sharply to the left to cross the Gesso River on a 3-arch brick viaduct (each span was 24.8 metres) shared with the line from Cuneo to Mondovi which was under construction at the same time. [1: p25]
The line to Mondovi remains today, but no passenger trains use the line any longer. The line we are following from Cuneo to Vernante, left the line to Mondovi heading Southwest and passing through the villages of Boves and Fontanelle-di-Boves. Provision for freight and passengers was made at Boves, just for passengers at Fontanelle-di-Boves.
Preparing for this article, I found a document from 1904 which included the plans and profiles of the line on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group. It was shared as a series of photographs by Davide Franchini on 2nd March 2022.
The 1904 document cover. [47]The first plan shows the bridge crossing the River Gesso with the line heading for Nice and Ventimiglia bearing away from the line to Moldovi. [47]The line heading South. [47]The route of the old railway from Cuneo Gesso to Borgo-San-Dalmazzo, (c) Ale Sasso and licenced for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence, (CC BY-SA 4.0). [32]
As far as I can tell, the line to Boves has been built over. It seems to have followed the route of Via del Borgo Gesso South from the river bridge, then Via Bisalta, then Highway SP21 to Boves where the line curved back towards the River Gesso. Boves station was on a relatively sharp curve in the line. [33]
Boves Railway Station building. [35]A similar view of Boves Railway Station in the 21st century. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The altered station building as seen from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, 2012]The goods shed/warehouse seen from the East. [Google Streetview, 2012]The goods shed at Boves, seen from the West on the SP21. The original station building can be seen on the left of this image. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The location of Boves Railway Station in the 21st century. Via Gastalato (SP21) runs along the old railway line. The main station building has a silver coloured roof and sits at the centre of this satellite image. The goods warehouse costs to the West of the main station building and has a red roof. [Google Maps, July 2025]
Boves station had a passing loop and two sidings. The passenger building, converted into residential housing several years ago, was adjacent to a goods warehouse, now used as a provincial warehouse. [35]
Boyes Railway Station plan. [47]The line beyond Boves Railway Station ran through Fontanelle di Boves and then crossed the River Gesso again. [47]
The hamlet of Fontanelle di Boves was just a short distance beyond Boves Railway Station. It had its own passenger station which opened in 1942 after the line from here back to Cuneo was replaced by a new line on the other side of the River Gesso which ran into the new station at Cuneo. Just a short distance further down the line was the viaduct which took the line back over the River Gesso. Originally, this was a masonry structure of three 24.8 metre arched spans. [1: p25] The viaduct was overwhelmed and destroyed by a flood of the Gesso on the afternoon of 2nd October 1898. It was then replaced with the current 74 m metal truss girder bridge. [34]
This photograph shows the immediate aftermath of the destruction of the bridge between Fontanelle-di-Boves and Borgo San-Dalmazzo. It was shared on the Ferrovia Internazionale Cuneo-Ventimiglia-Nizza Facebook Group by Mario Zauli on 29th February 2024. As well as appearing on the Facebook Group, Banaudo et al include the picture in their book. They comment: “On 2nd October 1898, the Southern Alps suffered violent floods that swept away the three-arched masonry viaduct over the Gesso between Boves and Borgo San-Dalmazzo, built in 1883. It was rebuilt as a metal truss bridge, but initially trains used a temporary structure on wooden beams. In December 1898, this was tested by the passage of locomotive No. 4333 of type 040, series 4201 to 4493 of the Rete Mediterranea. (Photo Giacinto Garaffi – Diego Garel collection).” [37][1: p26]
The bridge is known as Ponte di Sant’Andrea, a second truss was positioned alongside the railway bridge and together the two bridges now carry the SP21.
After crossing the River Gesso and at about 12 km from Cuneo the line arrived at Borgo-San-Dalmazzo.
This schematic map shows the two rail routes. The solid line shows the original alignment that we have just been following. The dotted line shows the route built at the end of the 1930s. The two lines met to the West of Pont Sant’Andre. The 1937-built station is on the banks of the Stura River on the West side of Cuneo and on the dotted line. [34]The bridge (Ponte di Sant’Andrea) is flagged in the bottom-right, the newer line from Cuneo enters this image middle-top and runs down to the bottom-left. The older line curved round from the SP21 and its route is marked by the curved field boundary. [Google Maps, July 2025]
Returning to the 1937-built Cuneo Railway Station, the line from that station leaves Cuneo in a South-southwest direction. It is easiest to see the route of the line on a sequence of extracts from global mapping provided by OpenStreetMap. …
Cuneo’s Railway Station in the 21st century. [OpenStreetMap, July 2025][38]
A twilight view of Cuneo railway station taken from the cab of a multiple unit entering the station from the Southwest. [45]
The line runs alongside the locomotive depot to the South of the passenger facilities at Cuneo Railway Station and then enters a tunnel which turns South under the city. [39]The tunnel mouth to the South of Cuneo Railway Station can be made out at the centre-top of this image. [Google Earth 3D, July 2025]This time looking North, the Southern portal of the tunnel to the South of Cuneo Railway Station can be made out below the roundabout at the centre-top of this image. [Google Earth 3D, July 2025]
A rain-spattered cab view from the South, taken in the late evening, of the Southern portal of the tunnel which sits to the South of Cuneo Railway Station. [45]
After leaving the tunnel, the line began to curve round to the Southwest passing under Via Fontanelle and then under the roundabout at the junction of Via Mellana and Viale Federico Mistral. [40]
Looking North in the evening light under a footbridge close to Via Giuseppe Scagliosi through the cab widow of a multiple unit on the line. [45]
The view North from the bridge carrying Via Fontanelle across the line. [Google Streetview, 2019]Looking South from the bridge carrying Via Fontanelle over the line. The bridge in the distance sits underneath a roundabout at the junction between Via Mellana and Viale Federico Mistral. [Google Streetview, 2019]
A three arch bridge carries Via Fontanelle over the railway, seen again in the evening light from the South through the rail-spattered cab widow of a multiple unit. [45]
A short tunnel carries the roundabout at the meeting of Via Mellana and Viale Federico Mistral over the railway, seen again from the South through the rail-spattered cab widow of a multiple unit. [45]
Vegetation around the roundabout means that it it not possible to see into the cutting from the road.
The line continues in a Southwesterly direction running alongside Viale Federico Mistral. [41]
A brick-ringed arch bridge carries the railway over a side road off Viale Federico Mistral. This view is from the Southeast. The structure is at the top-right of the map extract immediately above. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
A very similar arch bridge carries the railway over a further side road off Viale Federico Mistral. The bridge is located in the bottom-left quadrant of the map extract above. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
Now on a more Southwesterly course the line passes under a footbridge, obscured on the map extract by the words Tetto Bidetti in the top-right corne of the extract.
Silhouetted in the evening light, this bridge crosses the line carrying a footpath over the railway. The image, again comes from the cab of a multiple unit heading for Cuneo. [45]
Close to Cascina Tallone, the line crosses Lungo Gesso by means of another brick ringed arch. This view looks under the railway from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
Near Cascina David another brick-arched bridge pierces the railway embankment where Via David passes beneath the railway. Again this view is from the Southeast on Via Sant’Andre. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
Near Cascina Landra another brick-arched bridge pierces the railway embankment. Again this view is from the Southeast on Via Sant’Andre. Thestructure appeasr bottom-left on the map extract above and top-right on the extract below. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
And close to where the line of the older route meets the newer route the line is heading South-southwest and turns towards the Southwest. [43]Now in Borgo San-Dalmazzo we have reached the point where the older line curved in from the East having crossed the River Gesso. [44]
Via Sant’Andrea passes over the line. This view looks Northeast towards Cuneo. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
Also taken from the bridge carrying Via Sant’Andrea over the railway, this view looks across the road SP21 towards Borgo San-Dalmazzo. [Goog;e Streetview, May 2022]
The view Southwest from the bridge carrying the SP21 over the railway. The route of the older line is marked by the field boundary visible to the left of the line. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The older line curved round to the Southwest and followed a straight course towards Borgo-San-Dalmazzo Railway Station. The newer line has taken its place on the approach to the Station from the Northeast.
San-Dalmazzo is a very old trading town located at the crossroads of three valleys: the Stura, the Gesso and the Vermenagna. The station had three platforms, a goods yard, a 5.50 m turntable and a large overflow yard that could be used for the embarkation and disembarkation of military units deployed in the area. “When the railway arrived in Borgo-San-Dalmazzo, this small town had already had a rail service for several years. In fact, private entrepreneurs Ercole Belloli and Carlo Chiapello opened a 1.445 m gauge horse-drawn tramway between Cuneo and Borgo in 1877, passing through the San-Rocco-Castagnaretta district on the left bank of the Gesso. Horse-drawn traction was replaced by steam locomotives on this modest 8-km line in 1878.” [1: p27][48]
The Cuneo-Borgo San-Dalmazzo-Demonte tramway linked the cities of Cuneo, Borgo San Dalmazzo and Demonte from 1877 to 1948. In the late 1870s, following the success of similar initiatives in the Turin area, the construction of tramways was pursued in the province of Cuneo. [48] As we have already noted, this was just one of a number of such tramways in the area.
The Cuneo Borgo-San-Dalmazzo tramway was extended in 1914 to Demonte (26.4 km) and converted on this occasion to a 1.10 m gauge to facilitate the exchange of goods with the Compagnia Generale dei Tramways Piemontesi (CGTP) which operated the Cuneo Boves line (8.3 km) from 1903. The Boves steam tramway disappeared in 1935 and that of Borgo and Demonte in 1948. [1: p28] The story of these tramways seems worth investigating, but their histories are a matter for a different article!
The station had an ignominious place in history. During the Second World War two convoys of Jewish deportees departed from the Borgo San Dalmazzo railway station bound for Auschwitz , coming from the adjacent Borgo San Dalmazzo concentration camp. The first convoy, on 21st November 1943, completed its journey via Nizza Drancy with 329 people on board. Only 19 survived. The second convoy, on 15th February 1944, with 29 people on board, headed instead for the Fossoli transit camp where it was combined with transport no. 8 bound for Germany. Only 2 survived. [49][50]
The Deportation Memorial , with a row of cattle wagons similar to those used then (the wagons are from 1953) commemorates the names of the deportees, their age and nationality and their family relationships. [50][51]
Burgo San-Dalmazzo to Robilante: The second construction contract covered the length from Borgo San-Dalmazzo to Robilante. Work began in late 1883. From Burgo San-Dalmazzo the line leaves the plain and begins its ascent up the Vermenagna Valley, heading towards the Tende Pass. The route, was designed to accommodate heavy traffic, so the line does “not include any curves with a radius less than 300 m, with two exceptions: one at the southern end of Cuneo station and one at the exit from Borgo station, where the route curves sharply to the left in a 257-meter curve to reach the left bank of the Gesso River. There, a 21 m three-arched masonry viaduct, shared by the railway and the SS20 road, crosses this Alpine torrent for the third and final time.” [1: p27]
This satellite image shows the sharp curve from the Railway Station at Borgo San-Dalmazzo to the viaduct across the River Gesso. [Google Maps, July 2025]
As the railway curves round towards the river its embankments are pierced twice to allow local roads to pass beneath the line.
This is the first structure. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The second structure, closer to the River Gesso. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The southern approach to Borgo San-Dalmazzo Railway Station, seen from the cab of a multiple unit. The line to the right of the image is a siding which terminates close to the River Gesso. [45]
The 3-span viaduct across the River Gesso carries both the railway and the SS20. [Google Streetview, June 2025]Looking South along the SS20 as it crosses the Gesso. The railway cantenary is on the left with the tracks hidden behind the dividing fence. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
A view from the South showing the road on the left. This is a view from the cab of the multiple unit again. [45]
Once over the river the road and railway remain at a high level with an access road to the SS20 passing under both the railway and the road. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
After crossing the river the line ran on through Roccavione. …
Roccavione Station is a simple station with two public platforms and one track serving a military platform. Another level crossing sits beyond the South end of the station site.
Looking back from the level-crossing at Via Piano Sottano towards Roccavione Railway Station. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
A similar view looking North into Roccavione Railway Station from the cab of the multiple unit. The station has no passing loop. [45]
The view Southwest across the level-crossing. [Google Streetview, June 2025]Looking South-southeast as the line continues up the Vermenagna valley. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The line follows an easy gradient between the SP259 (which used to be the SS20) and the left bank of the River Vermenagna to Robilante Railway Station. [1: p27]
The line runs Northwest to Southeast across this extract from Google Maps satellite imagery. It runs close to the SP259 between Roccavione and Robilante. [Google Maps, July 2025]A link road under the railway and under the SP259 beyond. It provides access from Via Piano Sottano to the SP259. [Google Streetview, June 2025]What in the UK we might choose to call an underpass or cattle-creep under the railway. Apologies for the slight distortion of the image which comes from the way in which Google’s algorithm merges the 360° camera photographs. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
Robilante Railway Station had three platform tracks, a small goods yard, a water feed, a 8.50m turntable and an engine shed. Beyond the station track gradients increased significantly and provision needed to be made for banking engines in steam days. [1: p27]
Robilante Railway Station. [Google Maps, July 2025]The station building sat on the Southwest side of the line, This view looks through the station to the Southeast, (c) Gum Gum. [Google Maps: July 2023]Robilante Station building and forecourt seen from the Northeast on Via Roma. [Google Streetview, June 2025]This view looks Northwest through the station towards Cuneo, (c) Mattia Vigano. [Google Maps: April 2019]
A similar view to that immediately above but taken from the driver’s cab on a multiple unit. In the distance in this image the old goods shed can be seen to the left of the line. The shed is no longer present in the more modern image above. [45]
A station plan for the station at Robilante. The line is oriented Northwest to Southeast. The turntable is located at the Northwest end of the yard. The engine shed is opposite the passenger building. The goods shed was Northwest of the passenger facilities and is shown here with a single siding passing through the building. The bridge, shown in images below crosses the station throat at the Southeast end of the station site. Not shown on this early plan are five sidings added for clinker wagons from the Buzzi Unicem cement plant nearby. [47][53]
Robilante Goods Shed seem from the cab of a multiple unit. As noted above, the shed has now been demolished. [45]
This image taken from the Southeast of the station from the cab of an approaching Cuneo service gives a broader view of the station site. [45]
A broader view of Robilante Station taken from a road at the Southeast corner of the station site. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The road overbridge at the Southeast end of the station site. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The view Northwest from the road bridge which carries Via Luigi Emina over the line. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The view Southeast from the same road bridge. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The bridge which carries Via Luigi Emina over the line, seen from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The second phase of the construction work on the line terminated in Robilante. “The preliminary design for the third phase from Robilante to Vernante was submitted to the Ministry of Public Works on 11th January 1884, and work began the following summer. On this 6,419-meter-long section, the railway crosses the mountain with gradients of 25 mm/m.” [1: p27]
This extract from Google Maps satellite imagery shows the length of the line from Robilante to VernanteVia Ferrovieri runs immediately adjacent to the railway for some distance, passing under a road over bridge along with the railway. This view looks ahead up the Vermenaga valley. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The same bridge seen from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The two images immediately above were taken at the end of a road serving a small industrial area. The first looks Northeast, the second, Southeast. [Google Streetview, September 2023]
After passing under the SS20, the line runs alongside the road for a kilometre or so.
Trains can be seen passing immediately adjacent to the road. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
A short distance further South a side road from the SS20, Via Tetto Pettavino, bridges the line. The two photographs below were taken from the bridge.
Looking North towards Robilante. [Google Streetview, June 2025]Looking ahead along the line towards the viaduct over the River Vermenagna. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The railway crossed the Vermenagna River by means of a viaduct of 5 arched spans – three of 21 metres flanked at each end by an 8 metre span. [Google Maps, July 2025][1: p27]
A photograph of the viaduct over the Vermenagna surrounded by trees can be found here on Flickr. [54]
Banaudo et al tell us that seven further significant structures were included in the contract which covered the line as far as Vernante [1: p27] all of which sit within approximately 3 kilometres along the line:
the Rio Vermanera masonry viaduct, with three 8-metre arches;
the Ponte Nuovo Tunnel, 425 metres long;
the Brunet Tunnel, 161 metres long;
the Corte-Soprano Tunnel, 95 metres long;
the San Giovanni masonry viaduct, with six arches measuring 7.90 m, three measuring 13.75 m, and one measuring 6 m;
the San Giovanni Tunnel, 138 metres long; and
the Costa Tunnel, 147 metres long. [1: p27]
The first of these – the Rio Vermanera Viaduct is pictured below.
The Rio Vermanera masonry viaduct, seen from the West, one span of which crosses the Strada Vermanera, another spans the Vermaners stream. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The same viaduct seen from the East. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
Strada Vermanera provides road access to a number of small hamlets to the East of the railway line. [Google Maps, July 2025]
The Ponte Nuovo Tunnel: this extract from OpenStreetMap shows the tunnel curving significantly. It ran from just to the South of the Rio Vermanera Viaduct to open out immediately adjacent to the SS20/E74 but at a higher level. [55]
Immediately beyond the southern portal of the Ponte Nuovo Tunnel, a masonry retaining wall supports the railway above the SS20/E74.
Looking back towards the South portal of the Ponte Nuevo Tunnel the parapet railings of the retaining wall can be seen on the left of this image. [45]
The southern portal of the Ponte Nuovo Tunnel is at the far end of this retaining wall. Immediately at the Southeast end of the retaining wall is the short Brunet Tunnel (161 metres long) [Google Streetview, June 2025]
The Brunet Tunnel is shown dotted on this extract from OpenStreetMap. [56]
The South Portal of the Brunet Tunnel. [45]
The next tunnel is only 200 metres or so along the line, the Corte-Soprano Tunnel is even shorter at only 95 metres in length. [57]
The South Portal of the Corte-Soprano Tunnel. [45]
Just to the Southeast of the tunnel portal is the next structure, the San Giovanni Viaduct. masonry viaduct, with six arches measuring 7.90 metres, three measuring 13.75 metres, and one measuring 6 metres. [Google Maps, July 2025]
It is not feasible to get a photograph of the full length of the viaduct. The three images below give a good impression of its length and height.
Two further short tunnels, the San Giovanni Tunnel (138 metres long) and the Costa Tunnel (147 metres long) follow in the next few hundred metres.
The two tunnels are only separated by a short length of the line. [Google Maps, July 2025]
The South portal of the San Giovanni Tunnel. [45]
The South portal of the Costa Tunnel. [45]
The railway continues to climb higher on the eastern slope of the Vermenagna Valley and reaches Vernante, about 23 km from Cuneo.
Another of the plans and profiles that we encountered earlier in this article. This one shows the final approaches to Vernante Railway Station. Some of the structures described above can be seen on this plan. [47]
On the final approaches to Vernante Railway Station two further structures can be seen on the plan above. They carry the line over minor roads. The first spans Via La Tina, the second spans Vicolo Castello/Strada da Castello.
Looking East through the underpass which takes Via La Tina under the railway. [Google Streetview, June 2025]Looking East through the structure that carries the railway over Strada da Castello. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
Vernante Railway Station was the end of the third tranche of works on the railway. Vernante is “a busy centre of livestock breeding and craftsmanship where renowned knives are produced. Vernante station … has two platform faces with a passing loop, … [a goods shed] and platform for goods traffic, a 5.50 m turntable and a curious installation, unique on the line, the “binario di salvamento”. This is a counter-slope safety [line which leaves the main running line close to the station throat] on the Limone side. The switch is permanently positioned to provide access to the safety line, so that any vehicle drifting down the 26 mm/m gradient south of the station can enter it, be slowed down by the opposite gradient and then come to a stop. Each descending train must stop before the switch, so that it can be maneuvered on site to allow normal entry into the station. This simple but effective precautionary measure applies to other steep-gradient lines on the Italian network, in the Alps and the Apennines.” [1: p27]
A plan of Vernante Railway Station. [47]Vernante Railway Station. [Google Streetview, July 2025]The view Southeast from the station car park, after demolition of the old goods shed. The main station building features at the centre of the image. [Google Streetview, June 2025]The main station building at Vernante seen from the West. [Google Streetview, June 2025]
Photographs showing the station building and the goods shed prior to its demolition can be seen here. [58] “Inaugurated in 1889, the station served as the terminus for the Cuneo-Ventimiglia line for nearly two years, until it was extended to Limone Piemonte. The passenger building features classic Italian architecture, with two levels. It is square, medium-sized, and well-maintained. Its distinctive feature is the two murals depicting scenes from the Pinocchio fairy tale, adorning its façade. The lower level houses the waiting room and self-service ticket machine, while the upper level is closed.” [58]
A photograph from the cab of a Cuneo-bound train arriving at Vernante. The passenger building is on the left with the goods shed beyond. [45]
While construction work was underway on the first three tranches (Cuneo to Vernante), the Italian rail network was undergoing a major reorganization. The Law passed on 27th April 1885, placed control of the railways into the hands of “the new Società per le Strade Ferrate del Mediterraneo, more commonly known as Rete Mediterranea (RM), … including the route ‘from Cuneo to the sea’.” [1: p28]
In 1887, the time had come for the first trains! “The Cuneo-Robilante section was inaugurated on Saturday, 16th July 1887, and opened for service on Monday 18th. Less than two weeks later, Francesco Crispi became President of the Council of Ministers, and relations between Italy and France would soon be strengthened. Then came the beginning of the future Cuneo-Mondovi line, which opened on 2nd October 1887, as far as Roccadebaldi. The Roccadebaldi and Robilante lines thus formed a common section for 359 meters, starting from Cuneo [Gesso] station and crossing the Gesso River on the same viaduct. … Two years later, the Robilante-Vernante section was … opened on 1st September 1889.” [1: p28]
As footnotes to this article we note that:
Banaudo et al comment: “construction of the Ceva Ormea branch line began in the upper Tanaro Valley. With a terminus about 30 km from Vernante or 25 km from Tenda and Briga, this line would play an important role in the battle of interests that would unfold in the final years of the century to confirm a definitive route to the sea.” [1: p28]
They also give details of the locomotives used on the line in these very early years, by Rete Mediterranea (RM). The locomotives were 030s (in the UK 0-6-0s) with tenders and came from the roster of the Turin depot and loaned to the Cuneo-Gesso Locomotive depot. They belonged to just one series: “Nos. 3201 to 3519 RM, which became group 215.001 to 398 at the FS. [The series was built] between 1864 and 1892 based on a model derived from the French “Bourbonnais” locomotives of the PLM. These 450 hp engines were equipped with saturated steam, single expansion, and Stephenson internal distribution. The [later] Cuneo depot, established in 1907, still had five type 215 locomotives in 1922, mainly operating service trains.” [1: p86] It is also worth noting that some of the locos used on the line after 1899 came from a second series of locomotives (“Nos. 3801 to 3869 RM, later 3101 to 3169, then group 310.001 to 069 at the FS, built from 1894 to 1901 [1: p86]). While these locomotives were old enough to have served in the period from 1887 to 1891, they only arrived on the line during 1901. … I anticipate there being a separate article about motive power on the line in due course.
We finish this first part of the journey from Cuneo to the sea at Vernante. The next article about the line will begin at Vernante and head South towards Limone and Vievola. It can be found here. [61]
References
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 1: 1858-1928; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 2: 1929-1974; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 3: 1975-1986; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
“The locomotive developed by the Scottish engineer Robert Francis Fairlie (1831-1885) from 1869 on the Ffestiniog narrow gauge railway in Wales, had two boilers connected by a single central firebox. Each boiler supplies steam to a pair of cylinders driving an independent group of axles. This system was developed in France from 1888 by artillery captain Prosper Péchot (1849-1928) and engineer Charles Bourdon (1847-1933), creators of an articulated narrow gauge locomotive widely used by the French army.” [1: p21]
Séraphin Piccon; Etude Comparative de Deux Lignes de Chemin de Fer Entre Nice et Coni; 1872.
The Fell System which created “additional adhesion using a raised central rail, patented by British engineer John Barraclough Fell (1815-1902), was first applied in the Alps in 1868 on the railway running along the Mont Cenis route between St. Michel-de-Maurienne and Susa, pending the completion of the Fréjus Tunnel in 1871.” [1: p21]
A. Cachiardy de Montfleury; Chemin de Fer de Nice a Coni; Imprimerie Cauvan, Nice, 1872.
Marius de Vautheleret; Chemin de Fer Cuneo Ventimiglia – Nice Traversant le Col de Tende; Editions Giletta, Nice, 1874.
Marius de Vautheleret; Chemin de Fer Cuneo – Nice par Ventimiglia et le Col de Tende; Kugelmann, Paris, 1883; Trajet direct de Londres à Brindisi par le Col de Tende; Kugelmann, Paris, 1884; Ligne directe Londres – Brindisi par le Col de Tende; Retaux, Abbeville, 1890; Le Grand Saint-Bernard et le Col de Tende Ligne Ferrée Directe de Londres à Brindisi avec Jonction à la Méditerranée; Malvano & Mignon, Nice, 1897.
Stefano Garzaro & Nico Molino; La Ferrovia Di Tends Da Cuneoba Nizza, L’ultima Grande Traversata Alpina, Colleferro (RM); E.S.T. – Editrice di Storia dei Trasporti, Luglio, 1982, (Italian text)
Ferrovie dello Stato; Circolare Compartimentale del Compartimento di Torino 54/1937, (Italian text).
Franco Collidà, Max Gallo & Aldo A. Mola; Cuneo-Nizza: Storia di una ferrovia, Cuneo (CN); Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo, Luglio, 1982, (Italian text).
The locomotive depot area, left vacant after the opening of the new Cuneo station, was later reused by a sawmill connected by a siding to the Gesso station. [25]